140+ Easy Vegetarian Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegetarian/ Tried & True Recipes · No Refined Sugars Sat, 18 Nov 2023 20:54:05 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.3.2 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2018/01/cropped-icon-1-32x32.png 140+ Easy Vegetarian Recipes Anyone Can Make - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/special-diet/vegetarian/ 32 32 Chestnut Stuffing https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/ https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/#respond Sat, 18 Nov 2023 20:54:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72033 Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings a special addition to the holiday table. Classic and simple, and a wonderful make ahead, let’s just say this will be one more task you can check off your holiday to-do list. If you are interested in more chestnut recipes, we have a delicious recipe for Cream of Chestnut Soup,...

The post Chestnut Stuffing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Stuffing is one of my favorite Thanksgiving side dishes, and I like to think this stuffing recipe with chestnuts brings a special addition to the holiday table. Classic and simple, and a wonderful make ahead, let’s just say this will be one more task you can check off your holiday to-do list.

If you are interested in more chestnut recipes, we have a delicious recipe for Cream of Chestnut Soup, too. But don’t stop there. Get to cooking throughout November with plenty of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes and Friendsgiving Food Ideas.

Chestnut stuffing in a casserole dish from the top view.

Ingredients

Whether you call it chestnut dressing or stuffing, the ingredients for this side dish remain the same. I provide plenty of tips when it comes to bread and chestnuts, too. We will need:

  • Bread: Go for white bread, sourdough bread, Italian bread, or cornbread, cut into ½-inch cubes with a sharp knife. Brioche is another option, however, store-bought brioche is very sweet and will alter the taste if you make a chestnut brioche stuffing. If you have a good bakery nearby or have the time to make Brioche at home, I say go for it. I personally think that it is worth all the effort.
  • Unsalted butter: Unsalted butter is best, but salted butter can be used, just make sure to adjust the salt in the recipe. Olive oil can be used as a dairy-free option.
  • Vegetables / Aromatics: A classic combo of onions and celery, along with fresh garlic for some punch, gives this chestnut sage stuffing recipe so much flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Savory herbs including fresh sage, parsley, and fresh thyme will provide the best flavor, but you can substitute dried herbs if you are short on time.
  • Large eggs: Eggs bind and hold the stuffing together and give it that sought-after stuffing texture. Beat the eggs together separately before adding to the chestnut turkey stuffing mix.
  • Stock: Keep it vegetarian with Vegetable Stock, or use Chicken Stock, turkey stock, or low-sodium store-bought chicken broth instead.
  • Seasonings: I like to keep the seasoning simple with salt and pepper to allow the flavor of the chestnuts to shine.
  • Chestnuts: Use cooked and peeled chestnuts rather than raw ones. Feel free to cook your fresh chestnuts by following any one of our recipes. We recommend Boiling Chestnuts for their optimal texture. Fire Roasted Chestnuts are quick and easy, and Roasted Chestnuts for stuffing is a little bit harder in texture, so I recommend chopping them into smaller pieces. For convenience, you can also buy pre-cooked chestnuts online (affiliate link) or at grocery stores, just make sure ‘chestnuts’ are the only ingredient (no sugar) and be sure to drain them before using.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While the basic ingredients I listed above are more than enough, you can customize this chestnut dressing for turkey according to your tastebuds with a few delicious ingredients. Here are a few ways to do it:

  • Meat: Pancetta, sweet Italian sausage (casings removed and crumbled), or bacon are delicious and add a meaty bite. My favorite is chestnut pancetta stuffing, but sauteed crumbled sausage is delightful as well. The key is to make sure to sautee your meat of choice before adding it to the stuffing mixture.
  • Other veggies: This is where you can get creative. I like the addition of thinly sliced mushrooms or fennel.
  • Heavy cream: For a richer chestnut stuffing, substitute ½ cup of the stock with heavy cream.
  • A touch of sweetness: One small cubed apple or a handful of dried cranberries or raisins adds a pop of sweet flavor that would pair beautifully with the nutty flavors of this dressing recipe.
  • Nuts: While it will no longer be a chestnut stuffing, you can swap chestnuts for toasted and chopped walnuts or pecans instead.

How to Make Chestnut Stuffing

Making this turkey stuffing with chestnuts couldn’t be easier. I have got you covered whether you want to bake it in a baking dish or stuff it into the turkey. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make stuffing with chestnuts.
  1. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch shallow casserole dish with softened butter.
  2. Saute vegetables: In a large saute pan over medium-high heat, melt butter. Then, saute onions and celery until softened, about 5-7 minutes.
  3. Add aromatics: Reduce to medium heat, add the garlic, and saute for 1 minute. Add the sage and saute for an additional minute. Remove from heat and allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  4. Mix bread and herbs: In a large bowl, toss the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme.
Step by step images showing how to make chestnut dressing for turkey.
  1. Make stuffing mixture: Add eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and vegetable mixture to the bread mixture, gently tossing until just combined.
  2. Add the star ingredient: Gently stir in the chopped chestnuts.
  3. When it comes to cooking it, you have two options:
    1. Bake in a casserole dish: Transfer the mixture to the shallow baking pan and spread into a single layer. Bake, uncovered until it is golden brown on top, about 35-40 minutes. Serve warm.
    2. Stuff the turkey: Transfer the chestnut stuffing for turkey into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Bake the turkey as needed until the internal temperature of the stuffing reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

How to Make Ahead and Store

This old-fashioned chestnut stuffing recipe is a wonderful make-ahead dish. Here’s how I like to make it ahead, store, and reheat leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stuffing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes, or until warmed through.

What to Serve With Chestnut Stuffing?

Expert Tips

While this recipe is pretty straightforward and not much different than making any other stuffing, I think there are a few things to pay attention to. Here are a few helpful tips for the best chestnut stuffing recipe:

  • Use day-old bread: Stale bread is best for stuffing as the dry texture absorbs all the moisture from the stock. If you only have fresh bread on hand, cut it into cubes and spread out onto a rimmed baking sheet to dry out overnight, or go for toasted bread by placing the bread cubes in a preheated 375 degrees F oven until slightly dry, about 7-10 minutes.
  • Store-bought bread cubes: If you are short on time, feel free to use Pepperidge Farm stuffing cubes or those clear bags of bread cubes you find throughout the grocery store this time of year.
  • Amount of liquid: We are looking for a texture that is ‘moist but not soggy’. To achieve this, the stock may have to be adjusted based on the type of bread you use. For best results, start with the 2 ½ cups in the recipe card, then add additional stock ⅛ cup at a time if you find the stuffing mix is a little dry.
  • Adding meat: If you are using meat, make sure to cook it through before adding it in.
  • Do not overmix: When you are mixing the chestnut turkey dressing, it is imperative that you are doing it in a gentle way. You do not want to break the bread cubes, as this will create a crumbly, mushy texture. The bread cubes will absorb the liquid and will produce a nice texture when gently tossed.
Vegetarian chestnut stuffing in a bowl from the top view.

FAQs

What is the origin of chestnut stuffing?

Stuffing with chestnuts is said to have been around for more than 200 years, with the first recipe in print found in The Frugal Housewife by Susannah Carter in 1772.

Are chestnuts supposed to be soft?

This is more about personal preference. Boiled chestnuts will be soft and creamy, whereas fire-roasted or roasted chestnuts will be harder. If you make roasted chestnut stuffing, cut them into smaller pieces.

Can chestnut stuffing be frozen?

Even though you can technically freeze this dish, we do not recommend freezing as the texture will be mushy once thawed. That being said, if you would like to freeze the chestnut stuffing, do so by transferring it to a freezer-safe airtight container with room at the top for expansion. Freeze for up to 1 month. Thaw the frozen stuffing overnight in the fridge. Reheat in a 325-degree oven for 15-20 minutes, or until warmed through.

What is the difference between stuffing and dressing?

While the two terms are used interchangeably, the name you use largely depends on the region you are from and the cooking method. Technically speaking, ‘stuffing’ is cooked inside the cavity of the turkey, whereas ‘dressing’ is baked exclusively outside the turkey in a separate baking dish.

Other Stuffing Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe for Chestnut Stuffing, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chestnut dressing in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Chestnut Stuffing Recipe

Chestnut Stuffing, a classic Thanksgiving (or Christmas) dinner favorite, combines cooked chestnuts with a medley of vegetables and fresh herbs, creating a rustic, flavorful side dish that's a hit at any festive gathering.
Course American
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 287kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter (2 oz) plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh sage chopped
  • 1 pound day-old white bread ~10 cups, cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 large eggs beaten
  • 2 ½ cups vegetable stock or chicken or turkey stock would also work
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups cooked chestnuts* roughly chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Coat a 9×13-inch casserole dish with softened butter.
  • Melt butter in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Add the onion and celery and saute for 5-7 minutes until softened.
  • Add the minced garlic and saute for an additional minute, being careful not to burn it. If necessary, reduce the heat.
  • Add the chopped sage and saute for 1 minute. Take the skillet off the heat and set it aside to cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the cubed bread, parsley, and thyme in a large bowl. Toss to combine.
  • Add the eggs, stock, Kosher salt, pepper, and the cooked vegetables, lightly tossing everything until just combined. Do not overmix.
  • Using a spatula, gently fold in the chestnuts.
  • Transfer the mixture to the prepared baking dish and spread it evenly, lightly pressing in the dish. Bake uncovered for 35-40 minutes until it is lightly browned on top. Alternatively, you can transfer the chestnut stuffing into the cavity of the bird until it is full and compact. Roast turkey as needed until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. Allow to cool, then scoop and serve alongside the carved turkey.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a stuffing good for 8 servings. It is enough the fill the cavity of a 14-20 pound turkey if you prefer to stuff it into your turkey. Otherwise, you can bake it in a 9X13 casserole dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Stale bread: Using a day-old (or dry) bread is key to making this recipe. You can cube the bread the night before and store it uncovered to dry it out. Or, you can bake the cubes on a baking sheet in a 375-degree F oven for 10 to 12 minutes without browning. However, make sure that they are fully cooled before using them in this chestnut stuffing recipe.
  • Chestnuts: You can purchase already-cooked chestnuts from the store. Just make sure that the only ingredient in the packaging is chestnuts. Alternatively, you can buy raw chestnuts and cook them yourself. I highly recommend buying Italian chestnuts (instead of Chinese) as they are easier to peel. You can boil chestnuts, roast them in the oven, or even roast them in an open fire following our recipes. 
  • Moisture: If you feel the chestnut dressing appears dry, you can add more stock in ⅛ cup increments to your preferred moisture. Remember that the stock will evaporate slightly during the cooking. It is best not to make this stuffing too moist.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare the dressing up until baking, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge 30 – 45 minutes before baking to bring to room temperature. Uncover and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftover stuffing will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Just make sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a preheated 325-degree oven for 7 – 10 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Covering the top: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover this dressing with foil while it was baking in the oven. However, if yours is browning too quickly (especially if you are cooking multiple things in your oven), you can cover it with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last 5-10 minutes to ensure it is fully cooked.

Nutrition

Calories: 287kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 874mg | Potassium: 261mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 530IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 154mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Chestnut Stuffing appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chestnut-stuffing/feed/ 0
Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/#respond Wed, 15 Nov 2023 18:28:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=71889 Green bean recipes are a must for tender, nutritious, and versatile eats. They are also a part of any collection of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes or Friendsgiving Potluck Ideas.  If you agree, I recommend trying my other crowd-pleasing green bean dishes, such as my rich and robust Buttery Garlic Green Beans. Or, transform this vegetable into an endlessly customizable vegan snack or side dish with my Air Fried String Beans recipe....

The post Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Green bean recipes are a must for tender, nutritious, and versatile eats. They are also a part of any collection of Healthy Thanksgiving Recipes or Friendsgiving Potluck Ideas.  If you agree, I recommend trying my other crowd-pleasing green bean dishes, such as my rich and robust Buttery Garlic Green Beans. Or, transform this vegetable into an endlessly customizable vegan snack or side dish with my Air Fried String Beans recipe. No matter how you prepare them, these green beans will surely be the star of your dinner menu. 

Green bean casserole without mushroom soup on a wooden spoon.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You don’t have to sacrifice an ounce of flavor when making this gourmet mushroom-free recipe. A quick roux and umami-rich ingredients, like bold cheeses, are all you need to make the ultimate substitute for cream of mushroom soup in a green bean casserole. 

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh green beans: Fresh, firm, and unblemished green beans (also sold as string beans) are essential to giving this dish its mildly sweet, earthy flavor. Before using them in your recipe, clean and dry your veggies as much as possible, trim their ends, and cut them into two-inch pieces.
  • Unsalted butter: Butter is the key to achieving a rich, decadent flavor profile when making the roux and prepping your baking dish. You may also use salted butter instead, but be sure to adjust the other seasonings to avoid over-salting your recipe. 
  • All-purpose flour: Flour is an essential ingredient in any roux, which will help thicken the sauce of your green bean casserole.
  • Vegetable stock: I use vegetable stock in this recipe to lend it a light, fragrant flavor. However, you may also use chicken stock to give your mushroom-free green bean casserole extra hearty, savory undertones.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream is the key to giving creamy decadence to this simple casserole recipe. You can also use 2% milk for a lighter, low-calorie green bean casserole, though your recipe won’t have the same rich, thick flavors.
  • Cheese: Strong cheeses make the perfect substitute for cream of mushroom in green bean casserole, given their savory umami flavor. I use a mixture of white cheddar and parmesan cheese in this recipe, but you may also add more white cheddar if you prefer not to use parmesan. You can also use Colby Jack for a butterier, mildly sweet taste.
  • Fresh herbs, spices, and seasoning: Bright, warm, and savory, the ultimate seasoning for this green bean casserole recipe is a mixture of fresh thyme, ground nutmeg, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper. For a slight spice kick, you may also add a pinch of red pepper flakes, though this ingredient is optional.
  • French fried onions: Any store-bought French fried onions, including the Durkee brand, will give your casserole a crisp, rich topping.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Canned or Frozen Green beans: I recommend using fresh green beans when making this dish because of their crisp, bright taste. However, if desired, you may also prepare frozen or canned green bean casserole. If using canned green beans (or canned French-style green beans!), you’ll need three 14.5-ounce cans thoroughly drained and dried. If using frozen green beans, three 10-ounce bags should suffice. However, be sure to increase your casserole’s cooking time to 17-18 minutes to ensure it heats through, given the colder veggies. Furthermore, if you use canned or frozen green beans, you do not need to blanch the veggies before adding them to your casserole, so you can skip those steps.
  • Enhanced umami flavors: To give your cheesy green bean casserole without mushroom soup even more umami flavor, add one tablespoon of soy sauce or Worcestershire sauce to your sauce mixture. If you find this amount insufficient, feel free to add more, tasting as you go. However, please keep in mind that a little goes a long way with these salty ingredients, and you may have to adjust the amount of salt used to avoid an overly salty casserole.
  • Bacon: Crisp, rich, and salty, bacon (or turkey bacon) makes an impeccable addition to this green bean casserole recipe. To ensure the meat cooks fully and maintains its crunch, I recommend first cooking your bacon until lightly crispy, chopping it up, and sprinkling it on top of your casserole as an extra topping.
  • Sour cream: Want to give this dish extra tangy, creamy overtones? Making an old-fashioned green bean casserole with sour cream (Grandma’s style) is an easy way to do it. Simply use one cup of sour cream instead of this recipe’s chicken stock. Alternatively, to make a low-fat green bean casserole, use one-half Greek yogurt and one-half sour cream instead.

Alternative Toppings

Want to make your green bean casserole with an alternative topping that will make the most of your pantry and stun your dinner guests? Prefer to make it without fried onions or want to use up some of the crackers in your pantry? These simple solutions will ensure your side comes out with all the crisp, savory taste of traditional green bean casserole recipes.

  • Panko breadcrumbs: A go-to substitute for fried onions in green bean casserole, one cup of lightly toasted panko breadcrumbs make an excellent topping when mixed with two tablespoons of parmesan cheese. Even better, you can sprinkle this rich, savory mixture on top of your green bean casserole at the beginning of baking to simplify the cooking process.
  • Crumbled croutons: Crumbled croutons—pre-seasoned and already crisp—make another great topping for this green bean casserole recipe.
  • Crackers: Equally parts crunchy and buttery crackers are a simple, cost-effective substitution for fried onions in green bean casserole recipes. Most people prepare green bean casserole with Ritz crackers due to their rich, mildly sweet flavor, but feel free to experiment with whatever crackers best fit your desired flavor profile.
  • Cornflakes: Don’t want to run to the grocery store for extra ingredients? No problem! For this simple green bean casserole topping, you only need to crumble one cup of cornflakes on top of your casserole before baking.
  • Caramelized onions: Take your no-mushroom green bean casserole recipe to the next level by adding caramelized onions’ sweet, rich, and robust flavor. Simply prepare your caramelized onions separately and add them to your casserole while adding your blanched green beans. 

How to Make No Mushroom Soup Green Bean Casserole?

There’s no secret to making a delicious, crowd-pleasing green bean casserole without canned soup. These step-by-step instructions will ensure your casserole has all the tender, creamy, and rich flavors you love in this signature side.

Person washing and trimming green beans.
  1. Prep the green beans: Wash, dry, and trim the ends of your fresh green beans. Then, cut them into two-inch pieces and set aside.
  2. Boil water and prepare the ice bath: Add water and salt to a large pot and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. As this water heats, fill a separate large bowl with ice and water and set it aside.
Person blanching green beans to prepare for making green bean casserole.
  1. Boil the green beans: Following the blanching method I describe in my foolproof guide to boiling green beans, add the green beans to the boiling water and cook until crisp and tender—5-7 minutes in total. Be careful not to overcook the veggies during this step, as they should still maintain their shape and firm texture to avoid mushiness.
  2. Cool the green beans: Use a slotted spoon or strainer to transfer the cooked green beans directly to the ice water bath. Let the green beans sit in the ice bath for five minutes or until they cool to room temperature. Once cool, drain the green beans from the water, spread them on a clean kitchen towel, and pat dry as much as possible.
A collage of images showing how to make the sauce for green bean casserole without mushroom soup.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. While the oven heats, butter your casserole dish with a tablespoon of butter and set it aside.
  2. Saute the garlic: Melt the remaining butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute it for 30 seconds.
  3. Make the green bean casserole roux: Add the flour to the melted butter and whisk constantly until lightly browned (about five minutes). Then, gradually pour in the stock, followed by the heavy cream. Whisk the mixture constantly for about ten minutes until thickened, adjusting the heat as necessary to avoid burning.
Step by step images showing how to mix the sauce with green beans to make no mushroom string bean casserole recipe.
  1. Finish the sauce: Remove the roux from the heat and whisk in the cheddar cheese, parmesan, thyme, nutmeg, salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using).
  2. Add the green beans: Fold the blanched green beans into the sauce until they are evenly coated.
Person preparing green bean casserole for baking with and without crispy fried onions on top.
  1. Fill the casserole dish: Transfer the green bean mixture to the prepared dish, evenly spreading the filling.
  2. Bake and serve: Bake the dish in the preheated oven for ten minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onion rings in an even layer over the casserole’s top and bake for five minutes or until the onions turn golden brown.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

You don’t need to stress over meal prep when making a homemade green bean casserole with no mushrooms. These pro tips make prep, storage, and reheating a breeze, whether you make this dish for Thanksgiving dinner or a weeknight meal.

  • Make ahead: To make your no-mushroom green bean casserole ahead of time, prepare the recipe until the step in which you transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish. Then, let the mixture cool down, cover it tightly with aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator for up to one day in advance. When ready to eat, bake the dish as directed.
  • Store: You can store your leftover green bean casserole in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your casserole, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 7-10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Though technically possible, I don’t recommend freezing green bean casserole without condensed soup, as it will likely come out mushy after thawing. Unlike soup-based versions of this recipe, this dish comes together with a roux base, and sauces that use flour for thickening don’t hold up well through the freezing process. Furthermore, the fried onion topping will lose its crispness and become mushy while storing.

What to Serve with this Dish?

No one can resist the creamy decadence of a thick, veggie-packed green bean casserole. Not only is this recipe perfect for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners (especially when served alongside roasted turkey, cranberry sauce, sweet potato casserole, and mashed potatoes!), but it also works as a tasty side dish ideal for Sunday supper.

  • Turkey: Roasted turkey is a given main when serving this decadent, creamy side dish. However, if you don’t want to spend all day in the kitchen, you can serve it with equally savory, tender turkey dishes, like Roasted Turkey Tenderloin, Baked Turkey Wings, and Turkey Meatloaf.
  • Chicken: Not a fan of turkey? No worries! No-mushroom soup green bean casserole makes an ideal pairing with any poultry main. Whole Roasted Chicken and Goat Cheese Chicken are five-star dishes worthy of a master chef’s kitchen, while Roasted Cornish Hens are a succulent way to prepare perfectly portioned meals for all your dinner guests.
  • Beef: When you make the best green bean casserole without cream of mushroom soup, it’s a given that you’ll want to serve it alongside your tastiest mains. My filling and savory Pot Roast and unbelievably tender Reverse Sear Chateaubriand are just what you need to satisfy your Instagram followers and your tastebuds.

Expert Tips

Below are some of the lessons we learned as we were testing this recipe for the blog. Follow our tips for the best green bean casserole without cream of mushroom soup:

  • Blanching the green beans: When boiling your green beans, be sure not to over-blanch them. Cooking them too long will produce a mushy casserole, so I suggest boiling the veggies long enough to maintain a firm texture and nice bite.
  • Making the roux: When preparing your roux, take your time cooking the flour, ensuring it’s lightly browned before adding more ingredients. Then, add the liquids gradually—whisking constantly—to avoid clumps, separating, and boiling.
  • Taste for seasoning: Just because this recipe is a healthier green bean casserole doesn’t mean you have to sacrifice an ounce of flavor. I highly recommend tasting your casserole sauce as you cook to ensure it achieves your desired flavor profile, adding more seasoning as necessary.
  • Fresh mushrooms: Clearly, this recipe teaches you how to make green bean casserole without mushrooms or mushroom soup. However, if you’d like to add fresh mushrooms to the mixture (preferably cremini or baby bella mushrooms), you won’t believe how easy it is. Simply saute the sliced mushrooms with a tablespoon of butter, remove them from the pan, and prepare your roux. Once you drain your sauteed mushrooms (if necessary), add them to the sauce mixture while adding the green beans, tossing them until thoroughly coated.
  • Covering the top: If you find your topping browns too quickly while baking, cover the casserole with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last few minutes until ready to serve.
  • Let it rest: After removing the green bean casserole from the oven, let it rest for 10-15 minutes so the sauce can set.

FAQs

If you want to know more about this easy homemade green bean casserole, look no further! This no-fuss FAQ will answer all your questions, from the origins of green bean casserole to ideal texture tips.

Where did green bean casserole originate?

According to Wikipedia, this classic Thanksgiving side comes from the kitchen of Dorcas Reilly—a home economist working for Campbell’s test kitchen—in 1955. Reilly created this dish hoping to make a simple, accessible recipe for Americans using ingredients many had on hand—namely, canned green beans and cream of mushroom soup. Though the original recipe called for a mixture of cooked green beans, cream of mushroom soup, seasonings, and crispy fried onions, many have since adapted this dish to meet their own dietary needs, taste preferences, and available ingredients, leading to this recipe for homemade green bean casserole no soup.

How do you make green bean casserole less soupy?

Because we make this easy green bean casserole without mushroom soup, it’s unlikely to come out soupy like other soup-based versions. However, if you want to reduce the casserole sauce, you may cook it longer, let it sit longer, or drain excess sauce before serving. You might also consider adding breadcrumbs on top of your casserole, as this addition will soak up some of the liquid from the mixture, eliminating unwanted soupiness.

Which is better in a green bean casserole: canned or frozen green beans?

Fresh green beans are the best option to give your casserole a nutritious, mild taste. However, between canned and frozen options, I prefer frozen because these veggies tend to have a better, firmer bite to them.

Other Green Bean Recipes You Might Also Like

Tender, mild, and endlessly customizable, it’s no wonder why green beans are such a popular veggie. Below, you’ll find just a few of my favorite green bean recipes, guaranteed to pack your table with fresh, savory flavors in minutes.

If you try this Green Bean Casserole recipe without mushroom soup, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Green bean casserole recipe made without mushrooms in a 9 X 13 casserole dish.
Print

Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup Recipe

Making Green Bean Casserole without Mushroom Soup is easy, and let’s face it, it is much healthier because it is made from scratch! Follow our foolproof recipe to make the best homemade green bean casserole and impress your friends with this delicious version of the classic Thanksgiving side dish.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 397kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds fresh green beans* cleaned, ends trimmed, and cut into 2-inch pieces
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more to coat the casserole dish
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 1 ¾ cups vegetable stock or chicken broth
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • 4 ounces shredded white cheddar cheese approximately 2 cups
  • 2 ounces Parmesan cheese* shredded approximately ¾ cup
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme minced
  • teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup French fried onions 6 ounces

Instructions

  • To blanch the green beans, place water and a pinch of salt in a large pot over medium-high heat. Bring it to a boil.
  • Meanwhile, fill a large bowl with ice and water. Set it aside.
  • Carefully add the green beans to the boiling water. Cook until crisp and tender, 5-7 minutes.
  • Using a slotted spoon or a spider strainer, transfer the green beans into the ice water. Let them cool to room temperature for about 5 minutes. Drain.
  • Spread out the blanched green beans on a clean kitchen towel and pat dry as much as you can.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F. Butter the casserole dish with a tablespoon of butter and set it aside.
  • In the large skillet, melt the rest of the butter over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds.
  • Add the flour and whisk constantly until lightly browned, for about 5 minutes.
  • While continuously whisking, gradually pour in the stock, followed by the heavy cream (again while gradually pouring), until thickened for about 10 minutes. Adjust the heat as necessary to avoid burning.
  • Off the heat, whisk in the cheddar cheese, parmesan, thyme, nutmeg, kosher salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes (if using).
  • Fold in the green beans and toss until they are evenly coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish and spread it out evenly.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Then, sprinkle the fried onion rings over the top of the casserole dish and bake for an additional 5 minutes until the fried onion rings are golden brown.
  • Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This homemade green bean casserole makes enough for 6 to 8 side dish servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Canned or Frozen Green beans: I recommend using fresh green beans when making this dish because of their crisp, bright taste. However, if desired, you may also prepare frozen or canned green bean casserole. If using canned green beans (or canned French-style green beans), you’ll need three 14.5-ounce cans thoroughly drained and dried. If using frozen green beans, three 10-ounce bags should suffice. However, be sure to increase your casserole’s cooking time to 17-18 minutes to ensure it heats through, given the colder veggies. Furthermore, if you use canned or frozen green beans, you do not need to blanch the veggies before adding them to your casserole, so you can skip those steps.
  • Heavy cream: You can also use 2% milk for a lighter, low-calorie green bean casserole, though your sauce won’t have the same rich, thick flavors.
  • Cheese: We found that the addition of parmesan cheese provided the overall dish with the umami flavors it was lacking. However, if you do not have parmesan cheese, you can use more cheddar cheese. Also, you can use sharp yellow cheddar cheese in place of white cheddar.
  • Fresh mushrooms: Clearly, we wanted to show you how to make green bean casserole without canned mushroom soup in this recipe. However, if you’d like to add fresh mushrooms to the mixture (preferably baby bella mushrooms), you can easily do so in a few basic steps. Simply saute the sliced mushrooms with a tablespoon of butter, remove them from the pan, and prepare your roux. Once you drain your sauteed mushrooms (if necessary), add them to the sauce mixture while adding the green beans, tossing them until thoroughly coated.
  • Covering the top: During our testing, we did not feel the need to cover the top with foil. However, if you find your topping browns too quickly while baking, cover the casserole with aluminum foil until the baking is nearly complete. Then, uncover the dish for the last few minutes until ready to serve.
  • Make Ahead: To make it ahead of time, prepare the recipe until the step in which you transfer the green beans to the prepared casserole dish. Then, let the mixture cool down, cover it tightly with aluminum foil, and store it in the refrigerator for up to one day in advance. When ready to eat, bake the dish as directed.
  • Store: You can store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your casserole, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 7-10 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freezing: Though technically possible, I don’t recommend freezing green bean casserole without condensed soup, as it will likely come out mushy after thawing.

Nutrition

Calories: 397kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 2196mg | Potassium: 383mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2102IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 325mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Green Bean Casserole Without Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/green-bean-casserole-without-mushroom-soup/feed/ 0
Cauliflower au Gratin https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/ https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/#comments Thu, 12 Oct 2023 22:38:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7676 I am always inspired by cauliflower because of the incredible recipes that are created from this humble vegetable. But let me tell you, this cauliflower au gratin recipe is so special. Adapted (with minor changes) from Ina Garten’s Cauliflower Gratin recipe, this is a sure winner. A year-round recipe that does especially well as a Thanksgiving side dish or as a part of your holiday dinner, it will be love...

The post Cauliflower au Gratin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I am always inspired by cauliflower because of the incredible recipes that are created from this humble vegetable. But let me tell you, this cauliflower au gratin recipe is so special. Adapted (with minor changes) from Ina Garten’s Cauliflower Gratin recipe, this is a sure winner. A year-round recipe that does especially well as a Thanksgiving side dish or as a part of your holiday dinner, it will be love at first bite. Think of this cauliflower side dish as comfort food the whole family will love.

If you love cauliflower as much as I do, be sure to check out Broccoli and Cauliflower Salad and Cauliflower Curry.

Cauliflower gratin in a casserole dish with a spoon on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This cheesy cauliflower au gratin recipe requires a list of simple ingredients, one of the main ingredients being cauliflower. We will need:

Ingredients for scalloped cauliflower recipe in individual portions.
  • Cauliflower: The key to this recipe is to have 3 pounds of cauliflower florets. In other words, we want 3 pounds total after cutting into pieces and removing the stalks and stems. I found the best way to ensure enough cauliflower to fill a 9 x 13-inch baking dish is to purchase a 3-pound and 2-pound head of cauliflower. Fresh cauliflower has a higher water content, so in this case, we want cauliflower that is a bit older.
  • Unsalted butter
  • Fresh cloves of garlic: While we prefer fresh garlic cloves, you can use garlic powder, but if you want to take this cauliflower au gratin casserole to the next level, do yourself a favor and use roasted garlic.
  • All-purpose flour
  • Whole milk: Low-fat milk can be used in place of whole milk, but it will not be as creamy. There is also a higher chance of curdling if a lower fat milk is used.
  • Seasonings: A simple mix of Kosher salt, black pepper, and nutmeg elevates the dish to new heights. For extra kick, a pinch of cayenne pepper can also be added.
  • Cheese: We are following along with the Barefoot Contessa’s cheesy cauliflower gratin recipe and using a mix of Gruyere and Parmesan cheese, but sharp cheddar cheese, Swiss cheese, or Fontina can be used in place of the Gruyere. Steer clear of pre-packaged shredded cheese, which contains anti-caking agents and can affect the consistency of the cheesy sauce.
  • Bread crumbs: Yet unlike Barefoot Contessa’s recipe, we went with Panko breadcrumbs for extra crunch. For extra indulgence, you could try crushed Ritz crackers mixed with a bit of melted butter for a salty, buttery crunch.
  • Optional garnish: Fresh parsley gives it a beautiful finish and color. Fresh chives would be a nice addition, too.

How to Make Cauliflower Gratin?

If you are looking for an easy recipe for cauliflower au gratin, you have come to the right place! There are three main parts to making a cauliflower gratin, but I can assure you your efforts will be worth it. Here’s how to do it in a few basic steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cauliflower gratin recipe.
  1. Boil cauliflower: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. In a large pot, place the cauliflower florets, a few teaspoons of salt, and enough water to cover everything. Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes, or until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife. Drain and shake to remove any excess water. Set aside.
  2. Make a roux: Melt butter in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the garlic and stir for 30 seconds until fragrant. Add the flour and whisk constantly until the flour is cooked (but not browned) for 1 minute, until a thick paste forms.
  3. Make the white sauce: While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a gentle boil and cook for 2-3 minutes, or until slightly thickened.
A collage of images showing how to prepare gratin of cauliflower.
  1. Add the cheese: Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4  cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.
  2. Add cauliflower: Add the cooked cauliflower florets and toss to combine. Transfer the mixture to a 9 x 13-inch baking pan. Sprinkle the top with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese, and panko breadcrumbs.
Ina Garten's cheesy cauliflower gratin before and after it is baked.
  1. Bake: Bake for 25-30 minutes until the cheese is bubbling and the top is browned. At this point, the cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork.
  2. Garnish and serve: Allow to cool for 5-10 minutes. Garnish with a sprinkle of parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This scalloped cauliflower recipe is a wonderful make-ahead and can be stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so properly, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Blanch the cauliflower and make the creamy sauce up to 2 days in advance. Store each separately in airtight containers in the refrigerator. Or, make the entire casserole dish 1 day in advance. Remove from the fridge at least 30 minutes before baking.
  • Storing Leftovers: Leftover gratin of cauliflower can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Freezing: Cauliflower gratin can be frozen, but keep in mind the texture may be affected once reheated due to the water content in cauliflower. For best results, cool the gratin completely (to prevent the formation of ice crystals) and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container with a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw frozen gratin overnight or up to 24 hours in the refrigerator.
  • Reheating: Reheat leftovers, uncovered, in a preheated 350 F oven for 15-20 minutes. If reheating frozen but thawed cauliflower gratin, it could take up to 30 minutes. If reheating from frozen, bake at 350 F for 45 minutes – 1 hour, tented with aluminum foil, then remove the aluminum foil during the last 15 minutes of baking.

Variations

Cauliflower gratin is a gorgeous recipe that can be elevated or adapted based on what you are craving. Below are a few variations of this basic recipe that you can also try:

  • Roasted Cauliflower Au Gratin: If you enjoy the smoky roasted flavors, instead of blanching your cauliflower, you can roast them in the oven. To do so, drizzle the florets with a tablespoon of olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Bake for 15-20 minutes or just until softened. Transfer it to your baking dish and drizzle the creamy cheese sauce over the cauliflower. Then bake your roasted cauliflower gratin following the recipe as written.
  • Broccoli Cauliflower Au Gratin: For more of a healthy and veggie-packed version, you can swap out half the cauliflower for an equal amount of broccoli instead. You can blanch them at the same time, so it is just a quick and easy swap.
  • Potato and Cauliflower Gratin: If you want to incorporate potatoes into this dish, it is totally possible and easy to do so. Simply swap out one pound of cauliflower for one pound of peeled and cubed Yukon gold potatoes. I recommend cutting the peeled potatoes into bite-sized chunks and boiling them in water until al dente. Be sure to drain them well before adding them to the cheese sauce with the cauliflower florets.
cauliflower gratin in a casserole dish right after it came out of the oven.

What to Serve It With?

Decadent yet easy cauliflower au gratin is a beautiful side dish for holidays and special occasions. I love to make it a part of my Thanksgiving dinner menu, and it makes a fun addition to Friendsgiving menu ideas. But it is delicious enough to enjoy with any main dish when you are craving a cheesy, delectable vegetable side dish. Serve it with:

Expert Tips

As you can see, the recipe for this creamy side dish is pretty straightforward. However, we learned a few lessons during our recipe testing that I think are important to share to help you end up with the best cauliflower au gratin of your life (I know it is quite a bold statement, but I mean it.):

  • Cauliflower florets: As noted above, the total weight of the cauliflower is in reference to the cauliflower florets, not the whole head of cauliflower. I’ve found the stalks weigh about 1 pound each per head, so pick up a 2-pound and 3-pound cauliflower head to get 3 pounds of florets in total.
  • Blanching the cauliflower: Make sure to cook the cauliflower in a large pot of boiling salted water and keep a close eye on the texture. We are not cooking the cauliflower all the way through, just enough to parboil it into tender cauliflower florets as it will continue to cook in the oven.
  • Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.
  • Patience is key with the bechamel sauce: When you are making the roux (aka bechamel sauce), patience is the key. Do not rush, and be sure to cook the flour with the butter for at least 1 minute so that you cook out the raw flavor of the flour. For ease, make the roux with a wooden spoon, then switch to a whisk when you begin adding the milk. And whatever you do, do not leave it unattended.
  • Look for nape: A simple way to check if the sauce has the right thickness is to dip a wooden spoon in it. When you remove the spoon, the sauce should cling to its back rather than being runny. This is referred to as “nape” in French.
  • Cold milk vs warmed milk: Slightly warmed or room temperature milk mixes better, but we tested the recipe with cold milk, and it worked just as well.
  • Don’t fret about consistency: Upon first making the cheese sauce, it may seem a little loose, but keep in mind that some of the moisture will evaporate in the oven, and it will thicken as it bakes.
  • Browning: If the cauliflower is tender, but the top hasn’t browned enough, place it under the broiler for 1 minute or until browned to your liking. Make sure to check it often to avoid burning.

FAQs

What is cauliflower au gratin?

Cauliflower au gratin is a twist on the French potatoes au gratin that features delicious cauliflower coated in a cheesy bechamel sauce, then topped with breadcrumbs and baked until golden brown and bubbly.

Why is my cauliflower gratin watery?

A watery cauliflower au gratin can be due to overcooked cauliflower, too thin bechamel sauce covering the dish while baking, or too low of an oven temperature. To remedy this, place it back in the oven, uncovered, to evaporate some of the moisture.

Can you make cauliflower au gratin ahead of time?

Yes, easy cauliflower gratin is a wonderful make-ahead recipe and can be made 1 day in advance. Bring it to room temperature before baking.

Can cauliflower au gratin be frozen?

Yes, you can freeze cauliflower au gratin. Keep in mind, however, that freezing the gratin may affect the texture upon reheating. Simply bring it to room temperature, and transfer it to a freezer-friendly container. Cover well (to avoid freezer burn) and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator.

Other Cauliflower Side Dishes You Might Like:

It is no secret that this cauliflower bake makes a delicious side dish to serve along with any of your favorite main dishes. Here are a few other cauliflower recipes that you might also like to try:

If you try this Cauliflower Gratin recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cauliflower Au Gratin in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Cauliflower Au Gratin Recipe

This Cauliflower Au Gratin is a delightful cheesy bake that elevates cauliflower to a golden and crispy treat. Whether you make it a part of your Thanksgiving menu or serve it as a side dish to accompany your favorite steak and chicken recipes, it is guaranteed to impress.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 heads cauliflower cut into bite-sized florets (total of 3 pounds of florets) *
  • Kosher Salt
  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 3 tablespoons all-purpose flour
  • 2 ¼ cups whole milk
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • ¾ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • Pinch of nutmeg
  • 1 ¾ cups Gruyere cheese shredded, divided – 6 ounces – Swiss or Cheddar cheese would also work
  • ¾ cup grated Parmesan cheese divided
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Place the cauliflower florets in the stock pot and a few teaspoons of salt and cover with water.
  • Cover the pot and bring it to a boil over high heat, then reduce to medium heat and cook for 4-5 minutes until the cauliflower is softened but still firm when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Drain and shake to remove any excess water. Set aside.
  • Meanwhile, melt the butter in a large skillet* over medium heat. Add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds to soften.
  • Add the flour. Whisk constantly until the flour is cooked (but not browned) for 1 minute.
  • While whisking constantly, pour in the milk and increase the heat to medium-high. Bring it to a boil and cook for 2-3 minutes or until thickened but still smooth.
  • Remove from the heat and add the Kosher salt, ground pepper, nutmeg, 1 cup of Gruyere cheese, and 1/4 cup of Parmesan cheese. Whisk to combine until the cheese melts and the mixture is smooth.
  • Add the cauliflower florets and toss to combine.
  • Place the mixture into the baking dish and smooth it out evenly.
  • Sprinkle the top of the mixture with the remaining Gruyere cheese, Parmesan cheese and panko bread crumbs.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes until the cheese is bubbling and the top is browned. The cauliflower should be tender when pierced with a fork or knife.
  • Cool for 5 minutes, garnish with parsley if desired and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a 9 by 13 casserole full of cauliflower gratin, which is ideal for serving as a side dish for 6 (generous portions.) The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cauliflower florets: The total weight of the cauliflower (3 pounds) is in reference to the cauliflower florets, not the whole head of cauliflower. During our recipe testing, we found the stalks weigh about 1 pound each per head, so pick up a 2-pound and 3-pound cauliflower head to get 3 pounds of florets in total. 
  • Use a large enough skillet to mix everything together: I used a 12-inch skillet (affiliate link), which was large enough to make the cheese sauce, and tossed all the cauliflower so that each floret was coated with the sauce.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this dish a day in advance. Simply follow the recipe until you place the cheese and cauliflower mixture into the casserole dish (until step 11.) Bring to room temperature and cover well. Keep it in the fridge until you are ready to bake. When ready, follow the recipe as written and bake.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers of this cauliflower casserole (after they come to room temperature) in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the fridge. 

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 1148mg | Potassium: 224mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 910IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 629mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Cauliflower au Gratin appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cauliflower-au-gratin/feed/ 8
Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/#comments Wed, 13 Sep 2023 12:50:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8520 This oatmeal apple bake checks all the boxes for a delectably nutritious breakfast. Still, there are so many other healthy apple breakfast recipes to try! My Farro Breakfast Bowl with Apple Cinnamon will fill your bowl with sweet cranberries and nutty quinoa crunch, while my Healthy Vegan Apple Crisp is a gluten-free recipe packed with tender, warm baked apples. Or, if you’re looking for a moist, grab-and-go option, my paleo...

The post Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This oatmeal apple bake checks all the boxes for a delectably nutritious breakfast. Still, there are so many other healthy apple breakfast recipes to try! My Farro Breakfast Bowl with Apple Cinnamon will fill your bowl with sweet cranberries and nutty quinoa crunch, while my Healthy Vegan Apple Crisp is a gluten-free recipe packed with tender, warm baked apples. Or, if you’re looking for a moist, grab-and-go option, my paleo Apple Almond Muffins will make every morning a piece of cake.

Baked apple oatmeal sliced in a square baking dish with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients to Make This Baked Apple Oatmeal

Made with only the tastiest natural ingredients, this apple cinnamon baked oatmeal recipe is perfect for anyone looking to transform their home pantry into a gourmet breakfast.

  • Coconut oil: Melted coconut oil is a must when greasing your baking dish, ensuring that your apple oat bake doesn’t stick to the edges of the pan. However, you may also use butter or cooking spray, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Rolled oats: It’s essential that you use rolled oats (also known as old-fashioned oats) in your baked oatmeal recipes. When considering the difference between Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats, remember that instant oats (quick-cooking oats) will melt under high oven temperatures, and steel cut oats will come out thick and gummy.
  • Chia seeds: Though chia seeds are optional, they add deliciously nutty undertones while loading your breakfast with protein, fiber, and antioxidants. You can also incorporate other superfoods, like hemp seeds, to add nutrition to your breakfast bake.
  • Warm spices: The best way to season this healthy baked apple oatmeal recipe is with everyone’s favorite fall classics—ground cinnamon and ground nutmeg. You can also add a pinch of apple pie spice for extra warm, woody overtones.
  • Baking powder and kosher salt: These two ingredients are perfect for bringing out this sweet breakfast recipe’s nuanced flavors and giving it a light, pastry-like rise.
  • Large eggs: We use two large eggs to thicken and bind this hearty breakfast recipe. However, if you prefer a vegan apple cinnamon bake, you can substitute these eggs with a flax egg. To make flax eggs, stir together two tablespoons of ground flax seed and five tablespoons of water in a small bowl. Once combined, let the mixture rest for ten minutes to thicken it. It’s ready to add to your batter when it reaches the desired consistency.
  • Milk: I used almond milk in my cinnamon apple oatmeal bake, but any of your favorite types of milk—from dairy-free options (i.e. oat milk, soy milk, coconut milk, etc.) to traditional cow’s milk—would work.
  • Unsweetened applesauce: The key to making apple-baked oats as sweet, moist, and tender as possible is preparing your baked oatmeal with applesauce. I prefer using homemade Unsweetened Applesauce because it’s vegan, smooth, and only uses a few simple ingredients.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Maple syrup: I only use ⅓ cup of maple syrup to sweeten my baked apple oats, but if you like your oatmeal sweeter, you can increase it to ½ cup.
  • Apple: Any of your favorite fresh apples would work in this apple and oatmeal bake, including Honeycrisp, Pink Lady, Granny Smith, Fuji, Braeburn, and even Gala. Depending on your preference, you may also choose whether to use peeled or unpeeled apples for this recipe. However, you must cut them into even-sized cubes before adding them to your mix to ensure maximum tenderness and uniform baking.
  • Nuts: I recommend crunchy pecans, walnuts, or almonds to give your baked oatmeal a touch of earthy, buttery notes. Just be sure to give them a rough chop before adding them to your batter to ensure a balanced flavor distribution and delicious texture.
  • Dates: I love adding dates to my oatmeal recipe due to their rich flavor and chewy texture. However, other dried fruit—including raisins, cranberries, and figs—would also work.
  • Coconut or brown sugar: If you love the deep, toffee-like taste of baked sugar, you may choose to add a sprinkle of coconut sugar or light brown sugar to the top of your baked apple oatmeal.

How to Make Baked Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal

You don’t have to work at a diner to make this healthy baked oatmeal with apples easily. This tasty breakfast will come out with irresistibly sweet, hearty, and warm flavors in eight easy steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baked apple cinnamon oatmeal.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. While the oven heats, coat an 8×8 baking dish with coconut oil and set it aside.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, stir the oats, chia seeds (if using), cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and Kosher salt. Ensure the ingredients mix evenly throughout the blend.
  3. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, applesauce, vanilla extract, and maple syrup until thoroughly mixed.
  4. Combine the wet and dry ingredients: Pour the wet ingredients into the bowl of dry ingredients and mix until combined.
A collage of images showing how to make apple baked oatmeal.
  1. Incorporate the add-ins: Gently fold the chopped apples, walnuts, and dates into the oat mixture.
  2. Transfer the oatmeal blend: Pour the apple oatmeal batter into the prepared baking dish and spread it into a single even layer.
  3. Bake: Bake the dish for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  4. Serve: Remove the breakfast apple bake from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes. Then, drizzle it lightly with maple syrup and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

This apple cinnamon oatmeal bake is one of my cookbook’s most meal prep-friendly breakfast recipes. Take the stress out of your early mornings with this must-have make-ahead breakfast.

  • Make ahead: To make baked apple cinnamon oats in advance, bake the recipe and let it come to room temperature. Then, store the mixture, covered, in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Store: When storing your baked oats, let them come to room temperature first. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days. You may also keep your oatmeal in individual portions for a convenient grab-and-go breakfast.
  • Reheat: You can reheat this recipe in the oven at 325 degrees F. for 15 minutes or in the microwave in 30-45-second intervals until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Though you can freeze this baked oatmeal recipe, it will likely come out a bit dry once thawed. However, if you freeze your baked oats, let them come to room temperature first, transfer them to an airtight container, and place them in the freezer. It’s essential, too, to cover the oats tightly to avoid freezer burn.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen apple oatmeal, place it in the fridge overnight and reheat it in the morning.
Sliced baked oatmeal with applesauce on a plate with a spoon on the side.

What to Serve it With?

A warm cup of coffee or tea is all you need to turn this cinnamon apple baked oatmeal recipe into a five-star breakfast. However, these easy additions will add all the creamy, sweet, and moist flavors you could want from your morning meal.

  • A drizzle of maple syrup or honey: If you’re a fan of caramelly, floral flavors, I recommend topping your apple breakfast bake with maple syrup or honey. This simple addition will infuse every slice with a rich, complex taste.
  • A dollop of Greek yogurt or vanilla yogurt: Add a spoonful of yogurt to this delicious breakfast, and your baked apple oatmeal recipe will come alive with cool, creamy flavors.
  • Breakfast fruit salad: What pairs better with juicy apples than a brilliant blend of your favorite fruits? Made with a customizable mix of bananas, blueberries, strawberries, and pineapple, this healthy breakfast option will delight your tastebuds with just fifteen minutes of prep.
  • Maple whipped cream: Transform this wholesome breakfast into a sweet treat the whole family will love with a small dollop of light, fluffy whipped cream.
  • A dollop of almond butter or peanut butter: If you love the nutty, tart combination of apples and peanut butter, you’ll love adding this creamy addition to your apple oatmeal breakfast bake.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making an oatmeal apple breakfast bake packed with warm, caramelized flavors. This expert guide has everything you need, from what oats to use to tasty serving suggestions.

  • Oats: To achieve the best texture in this easy breakfast recipe, using the correct type of oats is essential. This delicious apple cinnamon bake requires rolled (AKA old-fashioned) oats for its moist, tender consistency. Instant, quick-cook, and steel-cut oats will result in a burnt, soupy, or gummy bake.
  • Size of your casserole dish: I tested this recipe in both an 8×8 and 9×9 pan, and either size will work when following my recipe instructions. However, if you prefer to make your apple cinnamon baked oats in a larger dish, such as a 9×13 baking dish, double the recipe.
  • Baking it in a muffin tin: You can also prepare this tasty breakfast in muffin tins for perfectly portioned oatmeal cups. Simply divide the batter among the cups of a 12-cup muffin pan and bake for 20-25 minutes.
  • Adjusting the sweetness: I designed this healthy breakfast dish with mild sweetness, a moist texture, and maximum nutrition. However, if you prefer a sweeter version, feel free to add more maple syrup, coconut or brown sugar, or other sweet add-ins for a dessert-level recipe.
  • Can be served warm or cold: You can serve this delicious morning recipe warm, room temperature, or cold, depending on your preference.

Other Baked Apple Recipes

This easy apple-baked oatmeal has all the sweet, tart, and warm flavors you love in your favorite baked apple recipes. Below, you’ll find even more tasty apple recipes to satisfy all your fall cravings.

If you try this Baked Apple Cinnamon Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Apple cinnamon baked oatmeal in a square dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal Recipe

Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal offers a healthy and wholesome start to your day. Made with tender apples, warm cinnamon, and a touch of maple syrup, this healthy breakfast bake is the ultimate fall/winter oatmeal recipe.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 271kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 teaspoon coconut oil
  • 2 ½ cups old-fashioned rolled oats
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs* or flax eggs for vegan option (recipe below in the notes)
  • 1 ½ cups unsweetened almond milk or any other non-dairy milk of your choice
  • 1 cup unsweetened applesauce
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • cup maple syrup plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 apple* peeled (or unpeeled) and diced into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 cup chopped walnuts or pecans optional
  • ½ cup chopped dates optional (5-6 Medjool dates)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat an 8×8- inch* baking dish with the coconut oil and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir the oats, chia seeds (if using), cinnamon, nutmeg, baking powder, and Kosher salt until combined.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, applesauce, vanilla extract, and maple syrup until fully combined.
  • Pour the egg mixture into the oat mixture and stir to combine.
  • Gently fold in the diced apples, walnuts, and dates.
  • Pour the mixture into the baking dish and gently spread it evenly.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  • Cool for 10 minutes and serve with a drizzle of maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields 9 slices of baked apple oatmeal. The nutritional values below are per slice. 
  • Size of your baking dish: You can use both an 8×8 or a 9×9 square dish to make this recipe. If you prefer to use a 9×13, we recommend doubling the recipe and baking it for 45 minutes.
  • Use flax eggs to make it vegan*: This is a gluten-free and dairy-free recipe. If you prefer to make this dish vegan, you can substitute the eggs with “flax eggs.” To make flax eggs, mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds with 5 tablespoons of water, stirring to combine. Set aside for 10 minutes, then use it in place of the eggs. 
  • Apple: I used Honeycrisp apples but any type of apple you have on hand would work.
  • Make Ahead: You can bake apple oatmeal bake in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container. You can reheat it in the oven at 325 degrees F for 15 minutes or microwave it (in 30-second increments) until warmed through.
  • Store: Be sure to bring the leftovers to room temperature. Then,  transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to three days. You may also keep your oatmeal in individual servings for a convenient grab-and-go breakfast.

Nutrition

Calories: 271kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 248mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 80IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 130mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Apple Cinnamon Baked Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-oatmeal-with-date-butter-apples-and-walnuts/feed/ 26
Blackberry Oatmeal Bake https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/#comments Sun, 10 Sep 2023 18:06:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3455 Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Warm, natural, and healthy, this baked blackberry oatmeal is a no-brainer when it comes to filling morning meals. If you love the hearty yet nutritious taste of fresh oats, there are dozens of other mouthwatering recipes to try. Steel Cut Overnight Oats and Overnight Yogurt Oats make mornings a breeze with exceptionally creamy flavor, while Muesli offers countless ways to customize your breakfast with sweet and savory flavors.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal in a square baking dish from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

When you make blackberry breakfast recipes like this, there’s no need to spend hundreds at the grocery store. This simple oatmeal bake only uses natural, pantry-ready ingredients to start your morning.

  • Coconut oil: I use coconut oil to coat my oatmeal baking dish, though oil spray would also work. If you feel luxurious and want to give your oatmeal rich, sumptuous undertones, you may also prepare this recipe with melted butter.
  • Old-fashioned oats: Old-fashioned oats (also known as rolled oats) are my go-to for this blackberry-baked oatmeal, as their flat, round flakes are perfect for absorbing excess liquid and withstand the baking process. However, if you’re unsure about the difference between Rolled Oats vs. Quick Oats or Steel-Cut Oats vs. Rolled Oats, these simple guides explain everything you need to know. Furthermore, you may also make this dish with gluten-free oats to accommodate a gluten-free diet.
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Unsweetened shredded coconut: I prefer my coconut-baked oatmeal to get a mild sweetness from natural ingredients, such as maple syrup and fresh berries. However, you can also use sweetened shredded coconut to add sweetness to your breakfast.
  • Nuts: I used sliced almonds, but you can also use chopped almonds or other nuts like walnuts or pecans.
  • Chia seeds
  • Baking powder
  • Salt: You only need a pinch of salt to bring out the other nuanced flavors of this recipe.
  • Large eggs
  • Milk: Though I usually use unsweetened almond milk in this dish, any kind of milk will work, from oat milk to soy milk, cow milk, coconut milk, and beyond. If you prefer making your own milk, my Homemade Almond Milk recipe is the one I recommend.
  • Vanilla extract
  • Maple syrup
  • Lemon zest
  • Frozen or fresh blackberries: I love making this blackberry breakfast with the luscious, tart flavor of fresh blackberries. However, you may also use frozen blackberries as long as you reduce the almond milk to 1⅔ cups. This reduction will help balance the added moisture in frozen berries, keeping your oatmeal from becoming watery.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Spices: This original recipe calls for ground cinnamon to give it its signature woody warmth. However, feel free to experiment with other spices, like nutmeg for a nuttier profile or cardamom for a slightly peppery dish.
  • Fruit: Any berry would work in this easy-baked oatmeal recipe, so you can mix and match according to your personal preference. If desired, you can even take this dish to the next level by transforming it into a triple-berry oatmeal bake using a mixture of juicy blackberries, raspberries, strawberries, and/or blueberries.
  • Other superfoods: Want to pack this simple recipe with even more nutrients? Add a tablespoon of healthy superfoods, like hemp seeds, ground flaxseeds, and oat bran, and your breakfast will contain countless vitamins and minerals, like magnesium, protein, and omega-3 fatty acids. Not only do these simple ingredients promote digestive and heart health, but they also add deliciously nutty undertones to this easy breakfast.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Protein powders: If you want your oatmeal to boost your metabolism while promoting muscle gain and reducing late-morning cravings, add 2-3 tablespoons of your favorite protein powder.
  • Make it vegan: To make this dish vegan, simply substitute the eggs with flax eggs. You can make flax eggs at home by mixing two tablespoons of ground flaxseed with five tablespoons of water until combined. Set the mixture aside for 10 minutes before adding it to your oatmeal recipe.

How to Make It

This baked oatmeal with berries recipe is a cinch to make and makes waking up a delight. In just nine steps and ten minutes of prep time, a delectable dish will be ready on your table.

A collage of images showing how to make blackberry oatmeal bake.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F., and coat an 8×8-inch baking dish with coconut oil. Set the coated dish aside.
  2. Mix the dry ingredients: Stir the oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt in a large mixing bowl until thoroughly combined.
  3. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest until fully integrated.
  4. Combine wet and dry ingredients: Pour the milk mixture into the large bowl of dry ingredients and stir until combined.
  5. Add the blackberries: Gently fold the blackberries into the oat mixture.
A couple of images showing the process of mixing and baking oatmeal with blackberries.
  1. Transfer the oatmeal: Pour the oatmeal recipe into the oiled oven-safe pan and spread it evenly with a spatula.
  2. Bake: Cook for 35-40 minutes or until the oatmeal turns golden brown.
  3. Cool: Remove the baking dish from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  4. Serve: Once cooled, divide the berry oatmeal bake among several bowls, garnish them with extra berries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

How to Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

Out of all the blackberry recipes for breakfast, this is one of the most meal prep-friendly. These simple tips will show you how to make baked oatmeal to enjoy throughout the week or freeze it for future use.

  • Storage: To store your baked blackberry oatmeal, first let it reach room temperature. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. If preferred, you can also slice it and store it in single-serving portions for extra easy morning meal prep.
  • Reheat: You can reheat it in a 325-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or in the microwave in 30-second increments.
  • Freeze: When freezing this recipe, let it reach room temperature first. Then, cover it tightly with several layers of plastic wrap to avoid freezer burn and store it in the freezer for up to 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your frozen blackberry oatmeal bake, place it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in the oven for 15 minutes at 325 degrees F.

How to Serve?

Making blackberry recipes for breakfast is a great way to add creativity to the kitchen. Serve it any way you want, from a grab-and-go morning meal to a healthy dessert guaranteed to make your mouth water.

  • A cup of coffee or juice: If you’re used to busy mornings, nothing is as satisfying as serving up a piece of this oatmeal bake alongside a hot cup of coffee or fresh juice.
  • Greek Yogurt: One of my favorite ways to serve this dish is with a sweet dollop of Honey Vanilla Yogurt. If you prefer a plant-based yogurt, you may also add a spoonful of coconut yogurt or almond milk yogurt for an equally creamy addition.
  • Milk: Do you prefer your oatmeal bake to be a little creamier? Adding a splash of milk to your baked dish will add a rich taste and an extra helping of calcium to your breakfast.
  • Nut butters: An easy way to make this simple recipe more filling and add protein is to spread a spoonful of peanut, almond, or cashew butter over your oatmeal bake slice.
  • Sweeteners: When prepared as-is, this blackberry baked oatmeal has a mildly sweet flavor—perfect for those who don’t like their breakfasts to taste too sugary. However, if you prefer more sweetness in your morning meal, add a drizzle of honey, maple syrup, or more blackberries. 
  • Sauce: If you’re like me, you know that a dash of sauce is all that’s needed to bring a recipe to life. Add a dollop of Date Caramel, Applesauce, or Homemade Blueberry Sauce to give this oatmeal bake extra rich, gooey flavor.
  • Ice cream: If you want to transform this tasty breakfast recipe into an irresistible dessert, try serving it with a scoop of your favorite ice cream! Honey Vanilla Ice Cream exquisitely balances the warm, woody undertones of oatmeal, while Chocolate Honey Ice Cream is a great addition for those who love the rich taste of cocoa powder.
Baked blackberry oatmeal cut into slices and served on small plates.

Expert Tips

Want to prepare a healthy breakfast worthy of a five-star dinner? These pro tips will ensure you have zero hassle making this blackberry oatmeal breakfast loaded with tart, hearty, and sweet flavors.

  • Baking dish: I prefer to bake this dish in an 8×8-inch baking dish to get the best post-baking consistency, though you may also use the same cooking instructions for a 9×9-inch dish. To make baked oatmeal in ramekins, reduce the cooking time by 10-15 minutes. Or, if you’re serving a crowd, you may double the recipe and bake it in a 9×13-inch baking dish at 350 degrees F. for 40 minutes.
  • Serving: The beauty of this oatmeal bake recipe is that you can serve it at whatever temperature you prefer—warm, room temperature, or cold.
  • Play with the add-ins: Endlessly customizable, this oatmeal recipe allows you to experiment with whatever add-ins you like. By extension, don’t worry if you’re missing one or two of the listed add-ons or want to add more or less. This dish is perfect for accommodating personal preferences when designing the oat mixture.

FAQs

Are blackberries good in oatmeal?

Blackberries are easily my favorite baked oatmeal berry. Baked blackberries have a delectably sweet yet tart flavor, perfectly balancing the mild notes of oatmeal. Even better, these low-calorie berries are also packed with nutrients, including Vitamin C, Vitamin K, and fiber, while also preventing heart disease.

Why are my baked oats soggy?

There are a few reasons your baked oatmeal might come out soggy. First off, you might have too much liquid in your mixture, either from how much milk you added or if you used frozen blackberries instead of fresh. It’s also possible you didn’t bake the recipe for enough time or that the size of your baking dish is too small. It’s also important to let your baked oats rest after baking to allow them to reabsorb their liquids. Finally, you should also consider the type of oats you use in your recipe. Instant oats and quick-cooking oats don’t have as hearty of a texture as old-fashioned oats, so they might be unable to soak up as much liquid during baking.

Other Oatmeal Recipes You Might Like

There are few better ways to start your morning with a filling, heart-healthy taste than with a bowl of warm oatmeal. These tasty recipes will ensure you never endure another bland breakfast again.

If you try this Blackberry Oatmeal Bake recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked Blackberry Oatmeal sliced in a baking dish with a spoon on the side.
Print

Blackberry Oatmeal Bake Recipe

This Blackberry Oatmeal Bake is an easy-to-make, healthy baked oatmeal recipe packed with juicy blackberries and superfoods and sweetened with maple syrup. It is a delicious morning treat that is also breakfast meal-prep friendly.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 215kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons coconut oil avocado oil, or oil spray would also work
  • 2 cups old-fashioned oats aka rolled oats*
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ cup unsweetened toasted shredded coconut optional
  • ½ cup sliced almonds optional
  • 1 tablespoon chia seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs or flax eggs for a vegan option
  • 2 cups unsweetened almond milk or any milk you prefer
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • cup maple syrup plus more for drizzle
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest optional
  • 2 cups fresh blackberries divided (reserving ½ cup for garnish)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Coat an 8×8 inch square baking dish with the coconut oil and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, stir the rolled oats, cinnamon, shredded coconut, sliced almonds, chia seeds, baking powder, and Kosher salt until combined.
  • In a separate bowl, whisk together the eggs, almond milk, vanilla extract, maple syrup, and lemon zest, ensuring that everything is fully combined.
  • Pour the wet ingredients into the oat mixture and stir to combine.
  • Gently fold in the blackberries.
  • Pour the mixture into the baking dish and spread it evenly using a spatula.
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes until golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 10 minutes.
  • When ready to serve, divide it amongst several bowls, garnish with blackberries, and drizzle with maple syrup.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields 9 slices of baked oatmeal. The nutritional values below are per slice. 
  • Gluten-free rolled oats: If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free oats. 
  • Size of your casserole dish: You can use both an 8×8 or a 9×9 baking dish to make this recipe. If you prefer to use a 9×13, we recommend doubling the recipe and baking it for 40 minutes.
  • Sweetness: This recipe is mildly sweet. You may add an additional ¼ cup of maple syrup to the mixture if you prefer it to be sweeter.
  • Other sweeteners: Don’t have any maple syrup on hand? No problem! You can also sweeten it using other natural sweeteners, like honey, coconut sugar, or brown sugar. However, if you use these sugars in your recipe, I recommend using ⅓ cup less liquid to avoid watery oatmeal.
  • Fresh vs. Frozen Berries: We tested this recipe using both fresh and frozen berries. We found that frozen blackberries can be used in place of fresh. However, if you decide to do so, please reduce the almond milk to 1 ⅔ cup due to the extra moisture in the frozen berries.
  • Make it vegan*: This is a gluten-free and dairy-free recipe. However, if you also want it to be vegan, you can substitute the eggs with “flax eggs.” To make flax eggs, mix 2 tablespoons of ground flaxseeds with 5 tablespoons of water, stirring to combine. Set aside for 10 minutes, then use it in place of the eggs.
  • Make Ahead: You can bake this baked oatmeal in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Just be sure to bring it to room temperature before storing it in an airtight container. You can reheat it in the oven at 325 degrees F for 15 minutes or microwave it (in 30-second increments) until warmed through.
  • Storage: It is best to bring leftovers to room temperature before storing them in an airtight container. We recommend storing them in individual portions so you can easily reheat (if preferred) and grab and go. If stored properly in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 36mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 230mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 122IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Blackberry Oatmeal Bake appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-crunchy-blackberry-oatmeal/feed/ 6
Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/ https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/#comments Mon, 17 Jul 2023 14:18:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3918 Making vegetable lasagna with zucchini is a great way to transform your veggies into a five-star meal. And let me assure you, lasagna with zucchini (instead of noodles) is just as delicious as its version made with pasta. Easy and delicious, zucchini recipes are some of my go-to’s for quick weeknight meals. Zucchini Soup is a light and luscious vegan recipe that comes together in 30 minutes, while Baked Zucchini...

The post Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making vegetable lasagna with zucchini is a great way to transform your veggies into a five-star meal. And let me assure you, lasagna with zucchini (instead of noodles) is just as delicious as its version made with pasta.

Easy and delicious, zucchini recipes are some of my go-to’s for quick weeknight meals. Zucchini Soup is a light and luscious vegan recipe that comes together in 30 minutes, while Baked Zucchini Fritters make the ideal appetizer for anyone looking for yet another creative way of using this summer vegetable.

Vegetable lasagna with zucchini garnished with basil from the top view.

Ingredients

This vegetarian zucchini lasagna recipe only uses simple ingredients to fill your plate and delight your tastebuds with rich Italian flavors.

  • Zucchini: Small- and medium-sized zucchini work best in this recipe, as large zucchini, tend to be more watery and have more seeds. Also, note that there’s no need to peel your zucchini before adding them to your lasagna mixture—especially in summer, during the zucchini season.
  • Olive oil
  • Onion
  • Garlic cloves
  • Fresh baby spinach
  • Ricotta cheese: I recommend using full-fat ricotta cheese to ensure this dish comes out as creamy and rich as possible, being sure to drain away any excess liquid. However, if you don’t have any store-bought ricotta on hand or prefer to make your own, you can also prepare Homemade Ricotta with only four basic ingredients.
  • Egg
  • Parmesan cheese
  • Seasonings: To give your gluten-free lasagna the classic taste of Italian flavors, you’ll need dried oregano, fresh basil, lemon zest, Kosher salt, and ground pepper.
  • Marinara sauce: You can use three cups of your favorite marinara sauce to cut down on prep time, or you can take this recipe to the next level by making your own Tomato Basil Sauce.
Zucchini veggie lasagna ingredients in small portions with text on every ingredient.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Use low-fat or skim cheese: If you want to make your low-carb vegetable lasagna low-fat, too, you may use low-fat or skim cheese instead of whole-milk ricotta.
  • Frozen spinach: Don’t have any fresh spinach on hand? Don’t worry! You can use frozen spinach in this easy zucchini lasagna instead, as long as you fully thaw it and squeeze out all of its juices before adding it to your recipe.
  • Squash: To give your recipe a hint of extra sweetness, try making zucchini squash lasagna instead! Simply mix and match your zucchini with a serving of sliced yellow squash.
  • Cottage cheese: For slightly tangier undertones and an extra helping of protein, you can make your vegetarian lasagna with cottage cheese instead of ricotta cheese. However, be sure to remove as much liquid as possible before adding it to your recipe, preferably by draining the cheese in a colander.
  • Other veggies: Adding more vegetables to your zucchini vegetable lasagna is an easy way to add flavor, color, and extra nutrition to your meal. My favorite add-ins include sautéed mushrooms, carrots, onions, and bell peppers. When adding veggies, it is imperative to sautee and soften them first before adding to the recipe.
  • Vegan: Transforming this dish into a vegan zucchini lasagna recipe is a cinch. First, omit the egg. Then, ensure your vegan lasagna is dairy-free by substituting traditional milk-based cheese with your favorite vegan ricotta, vegan parmesan, and vegan mozzarella. If you prefer to make your own cheese, it only takes five minutes to make tofu ricotta and vegan parmesan with nutritional yeast.
  • Add meat: Satisfying meat eaters is a piece of cake with this versatile zoodle dish. Layer in a half-pound of sauteed ground beef or ground turkey, and prepare your mouth for hearty, savory flavors.

How to Make Zucchini Lasagna

Ever wonder how long to bake zucchini lasagna or how to layer your casserole perfectly? This beginner-friendly guide will show you how to make a veggie lasagna with zucchini that will taste straight out of an Italian restaurant. 

Steps showing how to slice zucchini for lasagna and saute veggies for filling.
  1. Prepare the veggie lasagna noodles: To slice your veggies, I recommend using my go-to method to slice zucchini for lasagna (which I detail more fully in my guide on How to Cut Zucchini for lasagna.) First, cut off a small bit from the top and bottom of each zucchini. Then, hold the end of the zucchini in one hand and use your other hand to shave the veggie lengthwise into thin slices using a veggie peeler, Y peeler, sharp knife, or mandoline slicer. These slices will serve as your vegetable lasagna “noodles.” When the veggie becomes too thin to grasp, lay it on your cutting board and use it as support while you finish slicing.
  2. Let the slices rest: Arrange the zucchini slices in a single layer over a clean kitchen towel or a few paper towels. Let them rest while you prepare the remaining ingredients, as they will naturally release excess moisture during this time. Pat the zucchini dry when ready to assemble the lasagna.
  3. Saute the onions: Heat the olive oil in a medium skillet over medium-high heat. Then, add the onions and sauté, stirring occasionally, until they turn translucent (about five minutes). Lower the heat to medium, add the garlic, and sauté the mixture for one more minute.
  4. Cook the spinach: Add the spinach to the pan and cook until wilted (approximately 2-3 minutes). Then, remove the skillet from the heat, and let it cool for a few minutes. While it rests, begin preparing the ricotta mixture. However, before adding it to the filling, be sure to drain any excess liquid from the pan.
Steps showing how to make the ricotta filling for no pasta lasagna vegetarian.
  1. Make the ricotta filling: In a medium bowl, mix the ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, oregano, basil, lemon zest, salt, and black pepper.
  2. Add the spinach: Add the sauteed spinach and onion to the ricotta mixture. Stir until thoroughly combined.
  3. Prepare the oven: Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
A collage of steps showing how to layer zucchini noodle lasagna.
  1. Add the tomato sauce: Take out a 9×13-inch baking dish, and spread ¼ cup of the tomato sauce over the bottom.
  2. Start the assembling: Cover the lasagna pan with zucchini noodles in a single thin layer. Arrange the slices on top of the tomato sauce, beginning at the shorter side and working across the pan. Cover empty spaces with extra pieces, using about 12-13 slices per layer.
  3. Add the ricotta filling: Spread ⅔ cup of the ricotta mixture evenly over the layer of zucchini noodles. Then, spoon another ½ cup of the tomato sauce on top, and sprinkle that with ⅓ cup of mozzarella cheese.
A collage of images showing how to bake zucchini lasagna vegetarian recipe.
  1. Finish assembling the vegetable noodle lasagna: Repeat the assembly process (Steps 8-10) four more times, resulting in five layers in total. Top it with the remaining tomato sauce and shredded mozzarella.
  2. Bake: Cover the spinach and zucchini lasagna with aluminum foil. Bake the dish for 30 minutes. Remove the aluminum foil from the top of the baked zucchini lasagna and cook it for 15 minutes or until the top turns a bubbly brown.
  3. Rest, garnish, and serve: Let the dish cool for 15 minutes, and if any excess liquid remains, drain it before serving.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

This easy zucchini lasagna recipe is just what every busy chef needs. This delicious dish is perfect for effortless meal prep, storage, and hands-free reheating.

  • Make ahead: This zucchini meatless lasagna is a great make-ahead dish for busy weeknight dinners. First, assemble and bake the lasagna as instructed. Then, bring the dish to room temperature, drain any excess liquid, and place it in an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to three days. When ready to eat, reheat the lasagna in a 350-degree F. oven for 30 minutes or until it warms through.
  • Storage of leftovers: Let your veggie lasagna come to room temperature before storing. Then, transfer it to an airtight container and keep it in the refrigerator for up to three days. Also, drain the lasagna before eating, as it will likely develop extra moisture during storage. 
  • Reheat: After storing your no-meat lasagna in the fridge, drain any excess liquid and reheat it in a 350-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or until warm.
  • Freeze: When freezing lasagna with spinach and zucchini, let it reach room temperature first. Drain all excess liquid, then portion it into an airtight container or cover it tightly with stretch film to avoid freezer burn. Transfer the covered dish to the freezer for upto a month.
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen veggie lasagna overnight in the refrigerator. Be sure to drain any excess liquid before reheating. Then, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated through. 

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be an Italian chef to prepare a gourmet vegetable lasagna recipe with zucchini. These master tips will ensure your healthy no-pasta recipe always comes out rich, tender, and flavorful.

  • Excess liquid/removing moisture: Because zucchini carries so much water, letting your slices rest on a towel before incorporating them into your lasagna assembly is essential. This time allows the zucchini to naturally sweat out its excess liquid, keeping your zucchini lasagna from becoming soggy. Though some recipes ask you to salt your zucchini before cooking, we found this extra step unnecessary.
  • Layering: Do not stress about the zucchini noodles being perfect. As long as each layer is covered with veggie noodles and then properly spread with tomato sauce and ricotta mixture, you should be fine. It is okay if your slices are imperfect. Simply cover as much of your lasagna surface with zucchini as possible, and your bake will come out perfectly.
  • Equipment: It is important that your zucchini is sliced thinly (⅛-inch pieces.) When we were developing this recipe, we initially tried to slice zucchini noodles using a mandoline slicer. While it did the job, we found that a vegetable peeler was easier to use. If you own a Y-peeler, that is even better, but either one would work.
  • For thicker Slices: If you do not own a peeler or a mandoline, then you can use a sharp knife to slice the zucchini. Though keep in mind that cutting thin, equal strips may be more difficult. If your knife-cut slices are thicker in width, then you can pre-bake them before adding them to your lasagna layers to remove excess moisture and reach a tender consistency. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and arrange your zucchini strips in a single layer. Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F. and bake them for 8-10 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • Bake covered then uncovered: Cheese tends to cook more quickly than the other lasagna layers, so it’s important to bake your dish covered for the first thirty minutes and uncovered for an additional fifteen. This way, your lasagna will cook fully without drying out, and your cheese will lightly melt and brown without burning.
  • Rest before serving: Let this grain-free lasagna rest for 10-15 minutes after removing it from the oven. This resting time will help the lasagna solidify its shape, making it easier to cut and serve neatly.
Person cutting squash lasagna from the top view.

What to Serve with this Meatless Zucchini Lasagna?

Vegetarian lasagna with zucchini is the perfect meal for any night of the week. This collection of menu ideas will complete your table with everything from flaky garlic bread to succulent poultry.

  • Bread: No one can resist sopping up gooey lasagna sauce with a hearty piece of bread. A crusty loaf, like ike my No-Knead Bread, is ideal for balancing the tender texture of the zucchini lasagna noodles. For something quick (and super flavorful!), our Air Fryer Garlic Bread also makes an excellent addition to the meal.
  • Salad: Green salads are the way to go if you’re looking for a light, nutritious side to pair with your healthy zucchini lasagna recipe. Creamy Caesar Salad is a classic Italian option, while Quinoa Avocado Salad is a colorful and crisp mix that comes together in just 15 minutes. For other equally healthy, filling sides, you could also whip up any of my other Quinoa Salad Recipes and prepare yourself for a brilliant spread of delicious food.
  • With meat: Want to add some hearty protein to your meat-free lasagna? This cheesy, veggie-packed recipe is great for serving alongside Chicken Parm, Chicken Fricassee, and Grilled Cornish Hens.

FAQs

How do you keep zucchini lasagna from getting watery?

Zucchini tends to carry a lot of juices, so to avoid watery zucchini lasagna, I recommend letting your veggie slices rest on paper towels for a few minutes before adding them to your baking pan. This resting time will help draw out excess moisture before baking. Other ways to reduce wateriness include letting your baked lasagna rest after cooking so water can either evaporate or more evenly permeate its layers. It’s also a good rule of thumb to select fresh, small- or medium-sized zucchini, as they contain less fluid than larger, less fresh veggies. Still, because of the nature of zucchini, your veggie lasagna will inevitably have a little more liquid than classic lasagna, so don’t worry if you have to drain the top of your dish before serving or during storage.

Can zucchini lasagna be frozen?

You can freeze the dish once it reaches room temperature. Just be sure to transfer your lasagna to an airtight container or cover it as tightly as possible with several layers of stretch film to keep it from becoming freezer burnt. You can then thaw your frozen vegetarian zucchini pasta overnight in the fridge and reheat it for about 20 minutes at 350 degrees F.

Other Vegetarian Dishes with Summer Vegetables

Nothing tastes as light yet filling as this summer vegetable lasagna. However, if you want to make the most of your summer garden, these other healthy veggie dishes will satisfy all your cravings.

If you try this Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Print

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna Recipe

Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna made with zucchini "noodles" instead of pasta noodles!  Layered with ricotta & tomato sauce, this healthy, gluten-free, grain-free, and keto-friendly meal is the perfect summer meal.
Course Main Course
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Resting Time 15 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 15 minutes
Servings 9 slices
Calories 269kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized zucchini approximately 1 pound in total (60 slices)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or crushed through a garlic press
  • 6 oz. fresh baby spinach roughly chopped
  • 1 ½ cups full-fat ricotta cheese* excess liquid drained
  • 1 large egg
  • 1/2 cup parmesan cheese
  • 2 teaspoons oregano dried (optional)
  • 3 tablespoons basil fresh and chopped plus more for garnish
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground pepper
  • 3 cups Tomato Basil Sauce or your favorite storebought Marinara Sauce
  • 2 ⅓ cups mozzarella shredded

Instructions

  • To prepare the zucchini: Cut a small slice off the end of each zucchini. Slice the zucchini thinly lengthwise using either a mandoline, a y peeler or a sharp knife*.
  • Arrange the zucchini slices in a single layer on a kitchen towel or a few sheets of paper towels. As they rest, you will notice a trace amount of moisture emerging on the surface. Let them sit on the counter while you are working on the rest of the ingredients, and be sure to pat dry before the assembly stage.
  • In a medium skillet, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat, then add the onions and saute, stirring occasionally, until translucent, approximately 5 minutes. Lower the heat to medium and add the garlic and saute for an additional 1 minute.
  • Add the spinach and cook until fully wilted, 2-3 minutes. Remove from the heat, and let it cool for a few minutes while you are making the ricotta mixture. If there is any liquid in the pan, drain it prior to adding to the ricotta mixture.
  • To prepare the ricotta filling: Mix together ricotta cheese, egg, parmesan cheese, oregano, basil, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a medium bowl.
  • Add in the spinach mixture and stir to combine.
  • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
  • To assemble the zucchini lasagna: Spread ¼ cup of tomato sauce at the bottom of a 9×13-inch casserole dish.
  • Arrange the zucchini slices on top of the tomato sauce, placing them across the shorter width and covering the empty spots with more zucchini slices. You should use around 12-13 slices per layer.
  • Spread ⅔ cup of the filling (~7 oz.) over the zucchini layer. Spoon ½ cup of the tomato sauce and sprinkle with ⅓ cup of the mozzarella cheese.
  • Repeat the process four more times (5 layers in total), ending with the remaining tomato sauce and shredded mozzarella.
  • Cover with aluminum foil and bake for 30 minutes.
  • Remove the foil and bake for an additional 15 minutes so that the top will become bubbly brown. Let it cool for 15 minutes on the kitchen counter.
  • Garnish with some torn fresh basil leaves, slice and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe is made in a 9X13 baking dish that yields 9 slices of zucchini lasagna. The calorie and nutrition information below is per slice.
  • Ricotta Cheese: You can make your own ricotta or buy it from the store. However, be sure to drain any excess liquid before adding it to the mixture.
  • Excess liquid: If you have excess liquid in the baking dish after cooking, you can drain it out before serving. Letting the lasagne rest for 15 minutes will help the liquid set up. 
  • Make Ahead: First, assemble and bake the lasagna as instructed. Then, bring it to room temperature, drain any excess liquid, and place it in an airtight container. Store it in the refrigerator for up to three days. When ready to eat, reheat the lasagna in a 350-degree F. oven for 30 minutes or until it is thoroughly warmed.
  • Storage of leftovers: Bring the lasagna to room temperature, transfer it to an airtight container, and keep it in the refrigerator for up to three days. It is possible that it will develop extra moisture during storage, so feel free to drain it before reheating.
  • Reheat: Reheat it in a 350-degree F. oven for 10-15 minutes or until warm.
  • Freeze: If you want to freeze this dish, we recommend baking it first. Simply bring it to room temperature and cover it tightly with stretch film to avoid freezer burn. Transfer the covered dish to the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thaw: Thaw it in the fridge overnight. Be sure to drain any excess liquid before reheating. Then, place it in a 350-degree F. oven for 20-30 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 269kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 619mg | Potassium: 520mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2645IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 358mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Vegetarian Zucchini Lasagna appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/zucchini-lasagna/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Garlic Bread https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/#comments Fri, 14 Jul 2023 13:39:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68957 With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes. How to Make Garlic Bread...

The post Air Fryer Garlic Bread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes.

Air Fryer Garlic Bread on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You can say goodbye to complicated Italian recipes with this super-easy side dish. You only need a handful of ingredients to make air fryer homemade garlic bread.

Ingredients to make garlic bread in air fryer with sliced bread.
  • Bread: During our recipe testing, we found that the best bread for this delicious garlic bread recipe is a French baguette because of its fluffy insides and firm yet crusty exterior. Day-old bread, too, is preferable as it is drier compared to a fresh loaf. However, you can also make garlic bread with white, Italian, or French bread if you don’t have a baguette. If you want to make your own loaf, you could also whip up my favorite crusty bread, aka No-Knead Bread, for an effortless solution. However, remember that the air frying time may need to be modified based on the type of bread you are using. Irrespective of the bread variety, we recommend cutting your bread into ½-inch slices to ensure proper cooking.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter is the best choice for garlic bread because it keeps your side from tasting overly salty when paired with parmesan cheese. However, if you want to make this recipe without cheese, I recommend using salted butter or adding a touch of flaky sea salt or Kosher salt to your butter mixture.
  • Garlic: It’s essential to use finely minced garlic in this recipe to ensure its flavors evenly coat each slice of bread. If you prefer fresh garlic, I recommend using a garlic press (affiliate link) to chop the ingredient into an ultra-fine paste. If you don’t have any fresh garlic in your pantry, you may substitute this ingredient for an equal amount of garlic powder. You could also use Roasted Garlic Cloves instead for a rich, caramelized taste.
  • Parsley: Parsley is essential to giving this dish its herby undertones and a pop of bright color. You can use dried or fresh parsley if you chop it thinly.
  • Shredded parmesan cheese: I usually use shredded parmesan when I make cheesy garlic bread in the air fryer, giving each bite a touch of nutty, rich flavor. However, shaved parmesan or shredded mozzarella cheese would also work.

How to Make Garlic Bread in the Air Fryer?

Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a simple way to enjoy warm, perfectly toasted sides every night of the week—or even a quick snack! Plus, it only takes six steps and no lengthy oven time.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to make garlic bread in the air fryer.
  1. Make the garlic butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese.
  2. Coat the bread slices: Spread about one teaspoon of the butter mixture onto each slice of bread, covering the entire surface.
  3. Transfer the bread: Arrange the buttered bread slices in the air fryer basket. Make sure they lay in a single layer without any overlap. If all your bread doesn’t fit, you may need to cook them in two batches.
  4. Air fry the garlic toast: Toast the garlic bread in the air fryer for approximately five minutes or until golden brown.
  5. Serve: Serve the toasted garlic bread while still warm.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This recipe for garlic bread in the air fryer is an easy way to simplify your meal prep. Prepare this recipe ahead of time for an easy crowd-ready side, or store your leftover garlic bread to enjoy throughout the week.

  • Make-ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, make the garlic butter mixture up to one day beforehand and slice your bread into ½-inch slices. Then, store the butter mixture in an airtight container in the fridge and keep the bread slices separately, spreading the pieces with the softened butter just before air frying. If you’re preparing for a dinner party and won’t have time to spread the slices before cooking, you can also coat the bread slices with the butter mixture one day in advance. Then, arrange them in a single layer on a sheet pan, cover them tightly with stretch film or aluminum foil, and store them in the fridge until ready to cook.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature to make frozen garlic bread for later use. Then, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight freezer-safe container (or Ziploc bag) in the freezer until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices when reheating garlic bread in an air fryer. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

What to Serve with Air Fried Garlic Bread?

Cooking garlic bread in the air fryer is one of the best ways to ensure a five-star meal any day of the week. This simple collection of recipes will satisfy any craving, from creamy pasta to light salads.

Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to toast French bread in the air fryer. With this expert guide, you’ll enjoy deliciously crisp, heartily flavored garlic bread in no time.

  • Evenly sliced bread: When making air fryer garlic bread with sliced bread, slicing your loaf into evenly thick pieces is imperative. The thickness of your slices will directly affect how long they take to cook., so I recommend cutting ½-inch portions to ensure ideal toasting. 
  • Spread butter evenly: An easy way to give each bite of your garlic bread a delectably bold flavor is to spread your butter mixture over your slices evenly. For best results, only about one teaspoon of butter per slice (granted, you are using French baguette slices), as too much will result in soggy bread.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer: Be sure to arrange your garlic bread in the air fryer in a single layer without any overlap to get evenly browned slices. You may have to cook this recipe in multiple batches if you have extra pieces of bread.
  • Different air fryer brands: How long it takes to air fry garlic bread may change depending on the air fryer you own. We tested this recipe both in Ninja Foodie and Instant Pot air fryers. It took slightly shorter to cook Ninja Foodi garlic bread than its Instant Pot air fryer version. Therefore, we recommend using this recipe as a general guide and watching your slices closely to ensure they’re perfectly golden brown before serving.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Because toasting French bread in an air fryer takes so little time, you must watch your bread slices while they cook to keep them from burning—especially when you add parmesan cheese.

FAQs

Making fresh garlic bread in an air fryer is a beginner-ready recipe that comes together with minimal effort. Below, I’ve answered all your questions about this easy dish, taking the stress out of the process.

Can you air-fry garlic bread?

Yes! Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a quick and easy way to ensure robustly flavored, evenly toasted slices any day of the week. And the best part, it is much quicker than making it in the oven.

What is the best time and temperature to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

I recommend air-frying your garlic bread for about five minutes at 350 degrees F. However, this time may change depending on the thickness of your slices and the brand of your air fryer.

How long to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

When making garlic bread in an air fryer that’s not frozen, you’ll need about five minutes at 350 degrees F. to give your slices an ideal warmth and crispiness.

How long to reheat garlic bread in an air fryer?

To warm up garlic bread in an air fryer, preheat your air fryer to 300 degrees F. Then, toast your slices for 2-3 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

How long to toast frozen garlic bread in an air fryer?

To cook frozen garlic bread, set your air fryer to 350 degrees F. and cook the slices for 5-7 minutes or until golden brown.

How to cook store bought garlic bread in an air fryer?

Though instructions may vary between brands, it only takes five minutes at 350 degrees F. to air-fry Texas Toast (prepackaged.) However, keep in mind that the timing might slightly change based on the brand you are using. Therefore, we recommend watching your batches closely when making store-bought air-fried garlic bread.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

No one can resist the hassle-free, tasty eats possible with an air fryer. If you liked this air fryer garlic toast, here are a few other easy air fryer recipes you might also like.

If you try this Air Fryer Garlic Bread recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried garlic bread on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Garlic Bread Recipe (Fresh or Frozen)

Making fresh garlic bread in the air fryer is possibly the easiest and quickest way to treat yourself to a delicious side dish or appetizer. Not to mention, using your air fryer cuts down on the cooking time, allowing you to enjoy your garlic bread in minutes.
Course Bread, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup unsalted butter at room temperature (2 ounces)
  • 5 cloves garlic crushed through a garlic press or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley or chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated (optional*)
  • 1 baguette sliced into ½-inch thick slices

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese (if using) in a bowl.
  • Spread the butter mixture evenly onto each slice of bread, approximately 1 teaspoon per slice.
  • Place the garlic toast slices in the air fryer in a single layer, ensuring that they are not overlapping. Depending on the size of your air fryer, if they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for approximately 5 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Serve immediately while they are still warm.
  • Any leftover browned slices can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. You can reheat in the air fryer at 300 degrees F for 2-3 minutes until warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 slices of French baguette bread. The nutritional information below is per slice.
  • Bread: You can use any other bread you have on hand. Italian bread, sourdough bread, French bread, and even ciabatta would all work. However, keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of bread and air frying time. We recommend slicing in ½-inch slices for the best results. We also recommend day-old bread as it absorbs the garlic-butter mixture better.
  • Parmesan Cheese: If you decide to make this recipe without parmesan cheese, add in 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt into the butter mixture.
  • Garlic: We found that minced fresh garlic was way better than garlic powder. However, the two can be used interchangeably in a pinch. If you do have the time, we recommend trying this recipe with Roasted Garlic or Air Fried Garlic for truly next-level garlic bread.
  • Parsley: If you do not have dried parsley, you can substitute it with fresh, but it should be finely chopped when incorporating it into the butter mixture. Alternatively, you can use other dried or fresh herbs such as thyme, oregano, and rosemary. 
  • Keep in mind that individual air fryer brands may perform differently, so consider this recipe as a starting point and adjust the cook time according to your personal preference.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight Ziploc bag in the freezer until ready to cook.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices before reheating. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 197mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 154IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Garlic Bread appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/feed/ 2
Avocado Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/#comments Mon, 03 Jul 2023 21:34:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6943 You heard that right – vegan avocado ice cream is made with coconut milk and ripe avocados for a homemade treat you can feel good about. Much like my other vegan frozen desserts, including Strawberry Coconut Milk Popsicles and Cashew Ice Cream, this one gets its richness and fatty texture from whole plant foods. And because it is a no-churn recipe, no ice cream maker is required. If you are...

The post Avocado Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
You heard that right – vegan avocado ice cream is made with coconut milk and ripe avocados for a homemade treat you can feel good about. Much like my other vegan frozen desserts, including Strawberry Coconut Milk Popsicles and Cashew Ice Cream, this one gets its richness and fatty texture from whole plant foods.

And because it is a no-churn recipe, no ice cream maker is required. If you are a fan of avocados, you are going to love this one.

Avocado Ice Cream placed in coconut bowls with an ice cream scoop on the side.

Ingredients

Avocado based ice cream requires just a handful of simple ingredients you can pick up from your local grocery store. For the complete list of ingredients, we will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Coconut Milk: We recommend a can of full-fat coconut milk, shaken or blended until smooth, for the best flavor. That being said, coconut cream can also be used. Though I liked the version of it made with coconut milk better. Do not use a carton of coconut beverage, as this does not impart the same flavor or creamy texture.
  • Avocado: Look for avocados with dark green to black skin that yield slightly to pressure. When you pop the cap off the top, the avocado flesh should be bright and green. This means they are ripe but not browned and spoiled.
  • Banana: One ripe banana adds creaminess and a slightly sweet flavor.
  • Maple Syrup: Go for pure maple syrup for the best flavor.
  • Lime Juice + Lime Zest: The lime juice and lime zest add a beautiful pop of citrus flavor. Lemon juice and lemon zest can be used instead. You could also add 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract to further enhance its flavor profile.
  • Unsweetened Coconut Flakes: Coconut flakes add a nice crunch and tropical finish. Make sure to toast the coconut flakes for the best flavor.
  • Coconut shells: If you have access to coconut shells, they make the pretties “bowls”.

Optional Add-Ins & Variations

  • Chocolate: With a little inspiration from Tom Brady and for a chocolate avocado ice cream treat, add 2-3 tablespoons cocoa powder or antioxidant-rich cacao powder. And if you are a fan of chocolate mint ice cream, add a mere ¼ teaspoon of peppermint extract, too.
  • Keto: To make keto avocado ice cream, omit the banana and maple syrup. Replace the banana with ½ cup heavy cream and sweeten it with ⅓ cup of your favorite keto sweetener (such as allulose).

How to Make Avocado Ice Cream?

This creamy homemade avocado ice cream recipe comes together after a quick whiz in your food processor and some freezing time – no ice cream machine required. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Chill loaf pan: Place a 9×5 inch loaf pan in the freezer for 30 minutes before making the ice cream.
A collage of images showing how to make vegan avocado ice cream.
  1. Puree ingredients: Place the coconut milk, avocados, banana, maple syrup, lime juice, and Kosher salt in a food processor fitted with the S-blade. Puree for about 1 minute, until all the ingredients reach a smooth texture, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through. Once the avocado mixture is smooth, add the lime zest and pulse a few times.
  2. Store: Transfer the ice cream base to the chilled loaf pan. Smooth into an even layer with a spatula or the back of a spoon. Cover the surface of the ice cream mixture directly with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible.
  3. Freeze: Place the avocado ice cream into the freezer for at least 4 hours before serving. 
  4. Scoop: Remove it from the freezer 15 minutes before serving for it to soften. Scoop into bowls (or coconut bowls) and garnish with coconut flakes, if preferred.

How to Store?

This dairy-free avocado ice cream will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer if stored properly. For best results and prolonged shelf life, make sure to:

  • Use a frozen container: We found a pre-chilled loaf pan to be the best mode of storage for this avocado frozen dessert as the larger surface area makes it easier to scoop. That being said, you can store it in an ice cream container (affiliate link) or a freezer-safe airtight container.
  • Cover with plastic wrap: Place a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface of the ice cream to prevent air bubbles and the formation of ice crystals.
  • Allow good airflow: Place the loaf pan in the coldest part of your freezer (usually in the back, away from odorous foods) with good air circulation. A consistent temperature maintains the texture and flavor.
  • Avoid frequent thawing and refreezing: Constant temperature fluctuations may create an icy texture.
  • Consume within one week: Homemade ice cream does not have as long a shelf life as commercially-made ice cream. For the best texture and flavor, enjoy within 5-7 days.

How to Serve

This healthy avocado ice cream recipe can be served just as is or jazzed up to really play up its tropical vibe. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Person holding guacamole ice cream in a coconut bowl from the front view.
  • Cone or Bowl: Keep it simple by scooping into your favorite cone or ice cream bowl.
  • Coconut Bowls: If available to you and to really give it the island appeal, serve it in fresh coconut halves with a sprig of fresh mint and toasted coconut flakes, as pictured here.
  • Blend into Smoothies and Milkshakes: This avocado ice cream has a minimal amount of natural sugars, which means it is healthy enough to enjoy on the regular in daily smoothies or milkshakes.
  • With Toppings: Finish with any and all of your favorite healthy or crunchy toppings, such as fresh fruit, dark chocolate chips, toasted nuts, or even granola.

Expert Tips

  • Blend coconut milk well: Whether you shake the can vigorously or blend the coconut milk in a blender, make sure the coconut milk is a smooth consistency before pureeing.
  • Process well: Be sure to use a high-powered food processor or high-speed blender, such as a Vitamix, to achieve optimal texture.
  • Ripeness is key: Since avocados are the main ingredient in this recipe, it’s important that the avocados are at the right degree of ripeness. Brown or mushy avocados will result in a bitter flavor. The same is true for the banana.
  • Add lime zest at the end: A few specks of lime zest running throughout the ice cream add visual appeal and pops of citrus flavor. And adding it at the end prevents it from disappearing into the ice cream.
  • Churn, if desired: While we did not find it necessary to churn the avocado ice cream in an ice cream maker, you can certainly do so following the manufacturer’s instructions. It takes about 15-20 minutes for it to fully freeze in my ice cream maker (affiliate link.)
  • Allow to thaw for 15 minutes before serving: Because this ice cream with avocado has a ton of healthy fats and lower water content when compared to dairy-based ice cream, it takes longer to reach a softer consistency. Allow to sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes, or until it is scoopable.
  • Fun fact: Did you know that avocado ice cream is Tom Brady’s favorite ice cream? 

FAQs

What is avocado ice cream made of?

Avocado ice cream is made with ripe avocados, coconut milk, banana, and maple syrup, along with lime juice and lime zest for a tropical feel.

What does avocado ice cream taste like?

Avocado ice cream tastes like avocados, with its earthy, mild, almost fruity flavor coming through with each bite. It is pleasant, delightful, and refreshing, with a creamy and rich texture.

Other Ice Cream Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Avocado Ice Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Avocado ice cream with coconut milk in coconut bowls garnished with coconut flakes.
Print

Avocado Ice Cream Recipe

Here’s a creamy and rich avocado ice cream that requires no ice cream maker. Made with healthier ingredients and sweetened with maple syrup, this is the perfect vegan ice cream to serve on a hot summer day.
Course Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cooling Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 527kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 can unsweetened coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 2 Hass Avocados ripe, total weight 1 pound with pits; skinned and pitted
  • 1 banana ripe
  • ½ cup maple syrup
  • 2 teaspoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest from 2 limes

Optional Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons Unsweetened toasted shredded coconut

For Serving (Optional)

  • Coconut Bowls

Instructions

  • Place a 9×5 inch loaf pan in the freezer for 30 minutes before making the ice cream.
  • Place the coconut milk, avocados, banana, maple syrup, lime juice, and Kosher salt in a food processor and puree until all the ingredients are smooth for approximately 1 minute. Scrape down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing so that all the ingredients are pureed.
  • Add the lime zest and pulse into the mixture for a couple of “bursts.”
  • Transfer the mixture to the loaf pan and smooth it out evenly. Cover with stretch film, removing as much air as possible.
  • Place the covered ice cream into the freezer for at least 4 hours before serving.
  • Remove it from the freezer 15 minutes before serving for it to soften. Scoop into bowls (or coconut bowls) and garnish with coconut flakes, if preferred.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields a little less than 1-quart ice cream.
  • Coconut Milk vs Cream: This recipe was tested both with canned coconut milk and canned coconut cream. We prefer the version made with the milk better as the version made with cream had an overwhelming coconut taste whereas the milk version allowed the avocado flavors to shine. 
  • Storage: Be sure to store in an airtight container, cover it tightly and consume within 5-7 days.
  • This recipe is adapted from David Lebovitz’s Avocado Ice Cream recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 527kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 23g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 951mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Avocado Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/coconut-milk-and-avocado-ice-cream/feed/ 18
Honey Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/#comments Sat, 01 Jul 2023 21:20:21 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1393 If you have never made homemade ice cream with honey before, consider this a sign. Making ice cream at home is not only easy to make, but it also gives you complete control over the ingredients used. This simple vanilla ice cream recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand. The best part, you ask? You can use it as a base for...

The post Honey Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you have never made homemade ice cream with honey before, consider this a sign. Making ice cream at home is not only easy to make, but it also gives you complete control over the ingredients used. This simple vanilla ice cream recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand. The best part, you ask? You can use it as a base for (pretty much) any ice cream flavor you like.

Love making ice cream? Put your ice cream maker to good use with Coconut Cashew Ice Cream (dairy-free) or Avocado Ice Cream, or go the no-churn method with Yogurt Bark.

Honey Vanilla Ice cream is being drizzled with honey from the front view.

Ingredients for Honey Vanilla Ice Cream

This homemade honey ice cream requires only 6 simple ingredients. Here’s a look at what we need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Heavy Cream: Pick up a pint of heavy cream or heavy whipping cream for the creamiest texture. 
  • Milk: Use full-fat whole milk for the richest texture and flavor.
  • Honey: Choose high-quality honey, local or raw honey is even better. As always, the honey flavor will determine the flavor of your ice cream. My favorite types of honey are orange blossom and clover. Maple syrup could also be used but be aware that the flavor profile of the overall ice cream would be different.
  • Salt: We are using Kosher salt to season the honey-flavored ice cream. Feel free to give it a finish of Maldon flaky salt upon serving for a salted honey ice cream twist.
  • Vanilla: You can use vanilla extract or the luxurious vanilla bean paste (affiliate link). If using vanilla extract, be sure to add it at the end while the ice cream mixture cools to room temperature.
  • Raw Egg Yolks: Whole egg yolks add texture and richness to the honey and ice cream. The trick is to temper the egg yolks into the cream mixture, but more on this later.

How to Make Honey Ice Cream Recipe?

If you never thought of making vanilla ice cream with honey, think again! Just like all homemade ice cream recipes, this one requires a bit of patience. But your efforts will be rewarded in the end. Here’s how to do it:

Person showing how to make honey ice cream in a collage of pictures.
  1. Heat the cream mixture: In a medium saucepan over medium-high heat, heat the cream, milk, honey, salt, and vanilla paste (if using) for approximately 5 minutes, stirring frequently, until it just barely begins to simmer. Do not let it boil.
  2. Temper egg yolks: While the cream mixture is coming up to a simmer, place the egg yolks in a medium bowl and whisk until smooth. When the cream mixture has just barely reached a simmer, pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup. Slowly pour the cream mixture into the yolks while continuously whisking as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is paramount to prevent the eggs from curdling.
Person tempering eggs to make the ice cream base.
  1. Cook custard: Pour the egg mixture back into the saucepan while stirring constantly with a wooden spoon. Reduce to medium heat and cook for approximately 10 minutes (stirring constantly) until it is slightly thickened or registers 180 degrees F. As you are stirring, ensure that you are scraping the bottom edge of the pan as it thickens. The mixture should produce “milk bubbles” on the edge of the pan, which is a good indication of proper temperature. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk.
  2. Cool ice cream base: Pour the cream mixture into a heat-proof cup or bowl. Allow to cool on the kitchen counter for 30 minutes. Then, cover it with a lid or plastic wrap and place it in the refrigerator for at least 3 hours or up to 24 hours.
Person churning vanilla honey ice cream and then freezing it in a collage of images.
  1. Churn ice cream: After the custard is thoroughly chilled, churn the mixture in an ice cream maker (affiliate link) according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Mine takes about 15-20 minutes, and in the end, the mixture resembles the texture of soft-serve ice cream. 
  2. Freeze: Transfer the ice cream to an airtight container or a loaf pan and cover it tightly. Freeze the ice cream until firm, at least 2 hours, but preferably overnight. Serve once chilled.

How to Store

This honey milk ice cream will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer if stored properly. Here are my best tips for storage:

  • Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, preferably an ice cream tub (affiliate link.) Use the back of a spoon to gently push it down to remove any air. 
  • Place in the back of the freezer, away from any odorous foods (i.e., fish, onions, etc.).

How to Serve Honey Ice Cream?

Honey-sweetened ice cream will become one of your favorite ice cream flavors you are going to want to put on everything. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

  • Bowl / Cone: Keep it classic by scooping ice cream into a bowl or cone to enjoy all on its own. Use any of your favorite toppings, such as nuts, fresh fruit, or even better, a drizzle of your favorite caramel.
  • Make Ice Cream Sandwich: Sandwich a generous scoop of it in between Almond Flour Cookies, or Almond Flour Peanut Butter Cookies for a scrumptious summer treat.
  • On Top of Baked Goods: Serve it a la mode style on top of Almond Flour Brownies, Peach Galette, or Easy Apple Crisp.
  • Make a Honey Ice Cream Sundae: Create a luxurious ice cream sundae at home by topping it off with dark chocolate, chocolate chips, fresh fruit, or fruit sauce, like my Blueberry Sauce and Maple Whipped Cream.
Copycat Haagen Dazs honey vanilla ice cream in a bowl.

Expert Tips

  • Simmer instead of boiling: Do not bring the cream and honey mixture to a boil. Boiling honey changes its color, texture, and nutrient value. Bringing the mixture to too high of a temperature could also scald the milk as well as break the egg yolk emulsion. 
  • Use good quality ingredients: Good quality ingredients will always yield a more flavorful ice cream. Use your favorite brands of cream, honey, and vanilla, and pay a little extra for organic, if possible.
  • When tempering eggs, be patient: If this is your first time tempering eggs, be patient and confident. It’s always best to work slower rather than faster to avoid scrambling the eggs.
  • Use a wooden spoon: A wooden spoon helps to get into the crevices of your saucepan. This is important because we don’t want the milk to scald at the bottom.
  • Look for ‘nape’: This is a French term that means the ice cream base is ready when it is thick enough to coat the back of a wooden spoon. You can also use a digital thermometer to check doneness. The egg mixture should reach 180 degrees Fahrenheit before getting it off the heat.
  • Strain, if needed: We tested this recipe several times and did not need to strain. However, a few clumps are possible. If that happens to you, straining the mixture through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted egg chunks that may have developed during the tempering of the eggs.
  • Make sure it is completely cool before churning. The ice cream base must be chilled before churning to ensure the proper functioning of your ice cream maker. Chill in the fridge for at least 3 hours or up to overnight.
  • Allow to freeze until firm. While the ice cream can be enjoyed straight from the ice cream machine for more of a soft-serve texture, I find it’s best to freeze for at least 2 hours before enjoying it.
  • Cover the “skin”: For extra precaution, place a piece of stretch film directly over the surface of the ice cream before freezing. This can help to prevent a skin from forming.
  • Store properly. Store the honey vanilla ice cream in a freezer-safe airtight container or your favorite ice cream tub (affiliate link) to prevent freezer burn. This will allow the ice cream to last a week, if not longer.

FAQs

Is honey a good sweetener for ice cream?

Yes, honey is a delicious natural sweetener for ice cream that adds sweet, floral notes. Go for orange blossom or clover honey for the best flavor.

What is the secret to creamy ice cream?

Heavy cream and full-fat milk will produce the creamiest, dreamiest ice cream. Don’t skip on the fat for this recipe.

Other Honey-Sweetened Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe for Honey Ice Cream, please take a minute to rate and comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

honey ice cream being drizzled with honey in a bowl.
Print

Honey Ice Cream Recipe

Try this homemade honey ice cream recipe for a super creamy and naturally sweetened treat that is superior to any store-bought brand. Drawing inspiration from Haagen Dazs’ Honey Vanilla Ice Cream, this simple recipe is an excellent delight to savor all year round.
Course Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting 10 hours
Total Time 10 hours 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 549kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • ½ cup honey
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 ½ teaspoon vanilla paste or pure vanilla extract*
  • 4 large egg yolks

Instructions

  • Heat the cream, milk, honey, salt, and vanilla paste in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat for approximately 5 minutes, stirring frequently, until it just barely begins to simmer. Do not let it boil.
  • While the cream mixture is simmering, whisk the egg yolks in a bowl until smooth. Set them aside.
  • Pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup.
  • Gradually whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is paramount to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  • Pour the egg and milk mixture back into the saucepan while stirring constantly with a wooden spoon. Cook over medium heat for approximately 10 minutes (stirring constantly) until it is slightly thickened or it registers 180 degrees F. As you are stirring, ensure that you are scraping the bottom edge of the pan as it thickens. The mixture should produce “milk bubbles” on the edge of the pan, which is a good indication of proper temperature. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk.
  • Pour the cream mixture into a heat-proof cup and let it cool on the counter for 30 minutes. Cover it with a lid or stretch film and refrigerate for at least 3 hours or for up to 24 hours.
  • Churn the mixture after it has chilled according to the ice cream manufacturer’s instructions. Mine takes about 15-20 minutes, and in the end, the mixture resembles the texture of soft-serve ice cream.
  • Transfer it to an airtight container and cover it tightly. Freeze it until firm for at least 3 hours, preferably overnight. Serve when chilled.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1 quart of ice cream.Storage: Store in an airtight container, preferably an ice cream tub (affiliate link.) or a loaf pan that is tightly covered with stretch film. Use the back of a spoon to gently push it down to remove any air. 
  • Vanilla: If you do not have vanilla paste, you can use vanilla extract. However, be sure to add it at the end while the ice cream mixture cools to room temperature. Otherwise, it will evaporate during the cooking process.
  • This recipe has been adapted with minor changes from The Perfect Scoop.

Nutrition

Calories: 549kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 24g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 295mg | Sodium: 359mg | Potassium: 263mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 1705IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 196mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Honey Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-vanilla-ice-cream/feed/ 15
Honey Chocolate Ice Cream https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/ https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/#comments Sat, 01 Jul 2023 21:16:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1509 As with most of my easy chocolate recipes, this chocolate honey ice cream has no high fructose corn syrup and no refined sugar. It is sweetened with only the natural goodness of honey. And if you are a serious ice cream lover, be sure to check out my Avocado Ice Cream and Cashew Coconut Milk Ice Cream. Ingredients This chocolate honey ice cream recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients....

The post Honey Chocolate Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
As with most of my easy chocolate recipes, this chocolate honey ice cream has no high fructose corn syrup and no refined sugar. It is sweetened with only the natural goodness of honey.

And if you are a serious ice cream lover, be sure to check out my Avocado Ice Cream and Cashew Coconut Milk Ice Cream.

Honey and Chocolate Ice Cream served over a cone in a person's hand.

Ingredients

This chocolate honey ice cream recipe requires just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Heavy Cream: Heavy cream, sometimes labeled heavy whipping cream, provides a rich and creamy consistency that is so akin to ice cream. 
  • Whole Milk: Make sure to also use full-fat milk for the richest texture.
  • Honey: Seek out high-quality honey from a brand you trust. Whether it is local or raw honey, or both, pick a flavor you like, like orange blossom or clover.
  • Unsweetened Cocoa Powder: Unsweetened cocoa powder (not Dutch-processed) provides a rich, earthy, chocolatey flavor. I tested this recipe with both Hershey’s (affiliate link) and Valrhona (affiliate link), and both were equally delicious. For even more powerful antioxidants, try organic Cacao Powder (affilaite link), which is not heated to as high a temperature during processing as traditional cocoa powder.
  • Raw Egg Yolks: Egg yolks add richness and create a chocolate custard ice cream dream.
  • Vanilla Paste: Although more expensive, vanilla bean paste (affiliate link) adds richness and specks of vanilla bean. If you would like to use pure vanilla extract instead, make sure to add it while the chocolate ice cream base is cooling, so as to not evaporate the alcohol.
  • Salt: A pinch of Kosher salt enhances the sweet cream and chocolate notes.

How to Make Chocolate Ice Cream with Honey?

Honey-sweetened chocolate ice cream is just as delicious, if not more so, than traditional ice cream recipes. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make chocolate ice cream with honey.
  1. Heat cream mixture: In a medium saucepan, place the cream, milk, honey, unsweetened cocoa powder, vanilla paste, and salt. Cook over medium-high heat, string frequently until it is barely simmering, 7-8 minutes. Do not let it boil.
  2. Whisk egg yolks: While the cream mixture is coming up to a simmer, whisk the egg yolks in a medium bowl.
  3. Temper egg yolks: Carefully pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup. Gradually and slowly whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is very important to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  4. Make the chocolate custard: Immediately pour the egg yolk mixture back into the saucepan. Cook over medium to medium-high heat for approximately 8 minutes, stirring constantly with a wooden spoon, until it is slightly thickened. Make sure to also stir the bottom edge of the saucepan to incorporate the mixture. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk. The mixture should be around 180 degrees Fahrenheit.
Photos showing churned custard based chocolate ice cream.
  1. Chill: Pour the chocolate mixture into a heatproof container or a medium bowl. Keep it uncovered and allow it to cool to room temperature on the counter for 30 minutes. Then, cover it with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 3 hours, or up to 24 hours.
  2. Churn: Once the custard is thoroughly chilled, churn it in your ice cream maker (affiliate link) according to the manufacturer’s instructions. My ice cream maker takes about 20 minutes for it to reach a soft-serve consistency.
  3. Freeze: Transfer the now-churned ice cream to an ice cream tub (affiliate link) or a loaf pan and be sure to cover or wrap tightly. Let it freeze for at least 3 hours before serving.

How to Store

Chocolate ice cream with honey will keep for up to 1 week in the freezer. For proper storage, make sure to:

  • Store in a designated ice cream tub (affiliate link), or freezer-safe airtight container.
  • Store away from any odorous foods (i.e. seafood, onions, etc.), preferably in the back of the freezer.
  • Optionally, place a piece of plastic wrap directly on the surface of the ice cream to prevent the formation of ice crystals.

How to Serve Honey Ice Cream?

Naturally sweetened chocolate ice cream is going to become your favorite homemade ice cream flavor. To really bring out its chocolate flavor, I love to serve it in any of the following ways:

  • Bowl / Cone: Scoop into a bowl or cone, and finish with your favorite toppings like fresh fruit, naturally sweetened Strawberry Sauce, dark chocolate chips, melted chocolate sauce, and toasted nuts for a little crunch or flaky sea salt (affiliate link.)
  • Over Cake or Brownies: Get a double dose of chocolate by scooping on top of warm Almond Flour Brownies, or any of our Cake Recipes.
  • Ice Cream Sandwiches: The rich chocolate flavors are perfect in between two Almond Butter Cookies or Chocolate Chip Cookies.
  • Affogato: Pour a shot of hot espresso over a scoop of custard chocolate ice cream for a scoop of Italian flair.

Expert Tips

  • Do not let it boil: We want the custard to simmer rather than boil as too high of a temperature could also scald the milk as well as break the egg yolk emulsion. Boiling honey also changes its color, texture, and nutrient value. 
  • Opt for organic, if possible: Use your favorite brands of cream, honey, and vanilla, and pay a little extra for organic, if within your budget.
  • Patience is key: Be patient and confident when tempering the egg yolks. Work slower rather than faster, especially if this is your first time doing so.
  • Stir with a wooden spoon: Use a wooden spoon when stirring the chocolate custard, as it is easier to get into the nooks and crannies of your saucepan.
  • Do as the French do: A key detail to look out for is nape, a fancy French term that basically means the ice cream base is ready when it is thick enough to coat the back of a wooden spoon. For a foolproof method, this would be 180 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer (affiliate link.)
  • Use a fine mesh strainer for extra insurance: I made this recipe three times and didn’t need to strain the mixture. However, straining through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted clumps of egg yolk that may have developed during tempering the eggs. This is a good practice to follow if you are new to tempering eggs.
  • Chill before churning: It’s important for the chocolate ice cream base to be completely chilled before churning to ensure the proper functioning of the ice cream machine.
  • Freeze until firm: Freezing the ice cream for at least 3 hours (or preferably overnight) before enjoying makes it more like that Haagen Daz texture we all love. While it is tempting to eat it right away, letting it freeze fully is ideal for the best chocolate ice cream.

FAQs

Do honey and chocolate go together?

Yes, the floral notes of honey really complement the deep, dark, earthy flavors of cocoa.

How do I substitute honey for sugar in ice cream?

While the substitution will depend on your specific recipe, I use ½ cup of honey for every 3 cups of total liquid (in this case, whole milk and heavy cream.) However, please keep in mind that when working with honey, boiling it should be avoided as heating honey at high temperatures can change the composition of nutrients and can deteriorate its quality.

Other Ice Cream Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Chocolate Honey Ice Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A person is holding chocolate ice cream in her hand.
Print

Honey Chocolate Ice Cream Recipe

Honey chocolate ice cream is an ultra rich, naturally sweetened custard based ice cream that is the ultimate summer indulgence. Made with just a few basic ingredients, it is an easy ice cream recipe you’ll be making over and over again.
Course Dessert/Ice Cream
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Cooling Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 577kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups heavy cream
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • ½ cup honey
  • ½ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
  • 4 large egg yolks
  • 1 ½ teaspoon vanilla paste or vanilla extract*
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Place cream, milk, honey, unsweetened cocoa powder, vanilla paste, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan over medium-high heat. Cook, string frequently until it is barely simmering, 7-8 minutes. Do not let it boil.
  • Whisk the egg yolks in a medium bowl.
  • Carefully pour 1 ½ cups of the warmed cream mixture into a measuring cup.
  • Gradually whisk the cream mixture into the eggs while constantly stirring as you pour it into the bowl. Continuous whisking is very important to prevent the eggs from curdling.
  • Pour the egg yolk mixture back into the saucepan. Using a wooden spoon, cook over medium to medium-high heat for approximately 8 minutes, stirring constantly until it is slightly thickened making sure you also stir the bottom edge of the saucepan to incorporate the mixture. Do not let it boil, as this will scald the cream and milk. The mixture should be around 180 degrees F.
  • Pour the cream mixture into a heatproof container and let it cool (uncovered) on the counter for 30 minutes. Cover it with stretch film (place it on the surface of the custard) and refrigerate for at least 3 hours or for up to 24 hours.
  • Churn the mixture after it has chilled according to the ice cream manufacturer’s instructions. In my ice cream maker, it takes about 20 minutes for it to reach soft serve texture.
  • Transfer the churned ice cream to an ice cream tup (or a loaf pan), put the lid on and let it freeze for at least 3 hours before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1-quart ice cream.
  • You can substitute the vanilla paste with vanilla extract. Use an equal amount but stir it into the custard at the very end (at the cooling stage) to prevent it from evaporating.
  • Check doneness: The proper temperature of the mixture should be no more than 180 degrees F. Boiling or scalding the mixture can cause the eggs to curdle and potentially burn, giving an unpleasant taste. Do not walk away as the boiling point can be very quick! You can easily test for the correct thickness of the mixture by lifting the wooden spoon out and running your clean finger on the back of the spoon. If the other area of the spoon holds on to the mixture and does not run off, it is thick enough.
  • Use a fine mesh strainer (Optional): I made this recipe three times and didn’t need to strain the mixture. However, straining through a fine mesh strainer helps to catch any unwanted clumps of egg yolk that may have developed during tempering the eggs. This is a good practice to follow if you are new to tempering eggs.

Nutrition

Calories: 577kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 25g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 306mg | Sodium: 362mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 1720IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 211mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Honey Chocolate Ice Cream appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/double-dark-chocolate-ice-cream/feed/ 8
Mediterranean Seasoning https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/#respond Wed, 28 Jun 2023 15:00:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68504 There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels...

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are countless reasons to prepare this Mediterranean spice blend. Not only are homemade spice mixes fast and flavorful, but they’re also an easy way to save money on your spice cabinet. With just a handful of fresh, natural ingredients, you can make dozens of spice combinations guaranteed to be free of fillers and preservatives. Plus, you can tailor your recipe perfectly to your preferences by adjusting the spice levels or modifying how much salt you include.

So, go ahead and make a batch and bring the most-loved flavors of the Mediterranean region to your own kitchen with this unique combination of warming spices you probably already have in your spice cabinet.

Mediterranean seasoning with a spoon from the top view.

What is in Mediterranean seasoning?

Also referred to as a Mediterranean herb blend, this seasoning is a classic mixture of common Mediterranean spices and herbs—basic, natural ingredients you likely already have in your spice cabinet!

Mediterranean herbs and spices in small spoons with text on every ingredient.
  • Garlic powder: I use garlic powder here. However, you can use granulated garlic if you can’t get your hands on it. The granulated version is thicker compared to its powdered version. Therefore, if you prefer a finer Mediterranean spice mix, simply use a food processor or spice grinder to crush your granulated garlic into smaller fragments.
  • Onion powder
  • Dried basil
  • Dried oregano: I prefer Italian oregano in this spice blend recipe due to its minty, herbaceous undertones. Mexican oregano will add too much citrusy flavor, resulting in a different flavor profile. 
  • Dried dill weed
  • Dried parsley
  • Dried rosemary
  • Dried thyme
  • Ground black pepper
  • Dried Lemon peel: This is probably the only ingredient that may require a trip to the store, but it is worth it. Dried lemon peel (affiliate link) lends this simple spice mixture an irresistible hint of fresh, tart flavor—in addition to its signature bright color. However, you could also use orange peel. And if that doesn’t work, you can add fresh lemon zest right before you are ready to use this Mediterranean seasoning in your recipe.

Optional Additions:

  • Kosher salt: Add ½ teaspoon salt to your mixing bowl for extra savory spice. Or, add it separately to your recipe while cooking to ensure it doesn’t come out too salty.
  • Ground cumin: Cumin is the key to giving Mediterranean cuisine its hearty, earthy taste—especially when making meat dishes and kabobs. Depending on your recipe, you can add ground cumin directly into your spice or separately. If you are a spice nerd like me, you can also purchase cumin seeds and grind them in your own spice grinder for an even fresh flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Want to add a little warmth to your Mediterranean spices? Just ¼ teaspoon of ground cinnamon will add a woody richness to your blend, making it the perfect addition to meat recipes.
  • Dried mint: Mint is a wonderful addition to this recipe, as it naturally sharpens the unique flavors of the other herbs. However, remember that dried mint is a potent herb, and a little bit can go a long way in this spice blend. 

How to Make This Recipe?

You can have a sumptuous flavoring for all your favorite dishes in just five minutes and one step.

Person mixing Mediterranean spices in a jar from the top view.

Simply add your ingredients to a small mixing bowl, adjusting the salt and seasoning levels to your taste. Mix until thoroughly blended. Use it in your recipe right away, or transfer the Mediterranean herb seasoning to an airtight jar for later use.

Storage Instructions

Whether you’re using this Mediterranean spice blend recipe for weeknight meals or a special occasion, use these storage tips to ensure that your mix stays fresh and flavorful for months.

  • Airtight container: It’s essential that you store your Mediterranean herb mix in an airtight container to ensure the ingredients don’t lose their flavor over time. A jar with a tight-fitting lid is ideal.
  • Check for dryness: Ensure your storage container is fully dry before adding your spice mixture. Also, if you dried your own fresh herbs, ensure all ingredients are completely dry before storing them. Any moisture will make your blend difficult to use, dull its flavors, and may result in unwanted bacteria or mold.
  • Store in a dark place: To keep your spices’ flavors as robust and fresh as possible, store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. Exposure to heat and sunlight can strip your herbs of their flavors and limit how long you can use them. 
  • Date and label: I recommend dating and labeling your Mediterranean spices and herbs before storage to keep track of their freshness. This way, you won’t have to fret over your calendar every time you prepare a new dish.
  • Use within six months: To ensure maximum flavor, I suggest using it within six months of preparation. Though the seasoning won’t go bad, it will likely lose its potency the longer it sits.

Uses of this Mediterranean Spice Mix

There are endless ways to incorporate it into your cooking. In minutes, you can add fresh, sunny flavors to fan-favorite recipes, from hearty chicken to light seafood.

  • Rub for chicken and turkey: This Mediterranean rub does wonders to enhance the succulent, tender flavors of chicken and turkey recipes. Use it to season chicken thighs in my Mediterranean Chicken with Lemon to bring out their zesty profile. Or, sprinkle a bit over my Baked Split Chicken Breast for a savory, herby addition perfect for soups, salads, and everyday meal prep. For an elegant recipe made for presentation, you could use this spice in my Baked Turkey Tenderloin or add it to my Middle Eastern Chicken Kabob recipe for a summer-ready dish any party crowd will love.
  • Beef and steak seasoning: Using Mediterranean spices for beef is an easy way to balance the hearty flavor of steaks, burgers, meatballs (hello, Turkish Kofte!), and roasts with delicately fresh flavors. 
  • Lamb: If you’re a fan of its grassy, robust taste, I recommend using your Mediterranean spices for lamb. Take your recipe to the next level by adding this seasoning mix to lamb shanks, grilled chops, or lamb burgers with feta.
  • Grilled seafood: It’s no secret that Mediterranean cuisine and fresh seafood go hand in hand. Rub fresh-caught fish with olive oil, lemon juice, sea salt, and Mediterranean seasoning for a delectable dish that comes together in minutes. Or, add a dash of this tasty rub on some of my favorite seafood recipes, like Grilled Mahi Mahi and Shrimp Kabobs
  • Marinades and sauces: You won’t be able to resist eating your favorite sauces by the spoonful when you include this simple recipe. Add a touch of authentic Mediterranean taste to flavorful kitchen staples, like Basil Tomato Sauce, Green Pasta Sauce, or Garlic Butter Sauce. Or, elevate your meat marinades using it in my basic Easy Shrimp Marinade or Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade recipes.
  • Salad Dressings: Looking for an easy way to bring your weekday salads to life? Mix your Mediterranean seasoning with olive oil, minced garlic, and either lemon juice or vinegar, and you’ll have a light, healthy salad dressing you can use all week long. You can also embellish my tart Lemon Dressing or creamy Yogurt Dressing by adding a pinch of this easy mixture.
  • Soups and stews: There’s no reason why your favorite soups shouldn’t explode with flavor. Add this Mediterranean blend to my healthy Broccoli and Feta Soup, creamy Red Lentil Soup, or hearty beef stews (hello, Eggplant Beef Stew!) to enliven every spoonful with herby, savory flavors.   
  • Bread dipping oil: The only thing better than a piece of freshly baked bread is one that you serve alongside delicious dipping oil. This Olive Oil Bread Dip would be the perfect accompaniment to dozens of menu ideas—with the addition of this spice mix, of course!
  • Sautéed or roasted vegetables: While some may only think to use this Mediterranean rub for chicken, this fragrant spice mix is one of the easiest ways to add mouthwatering flavor to your favorite veggie dishes. I love including this simple spice in tasty sides, like Pan Roasted Eggplant, Roasted Whole Carrots, and Roasted Cauliflower
Mediterranean herb blend in a wooden spoon from the top view.

Expert Tips

Making your own savory blend of herbs and spices is a great way to add bright, fresh flavor to your menu. With these tips for making Mediterranean spice, you’ll never eat bland food again.

  • Use new herbs and spices: The trick to getting your spice mixture as herbaceous and flavorful as possible is using fresh ingredients. You can make your own dried herbs for extra freshness, but ensure they dry thoroughly before adding them to your mixture.
  • Make it your own: My favorite part about making my own spice blends is how easy they are to customize. Feel free to adjust the spices in this recipe to match your taste. Or, if you don’t like any of the ingredients, you can omit them entirely or use a bit more of something else. For example, if you’re not a fan of dill, you can leave it out and add more thyme. For a spicier mix, you can add red pepper (aka chili pepper flakes), or you could include Spanish paprika for a slightly smokier taste.
  • Give it a good shake: Shake your spices’ storage container before incorporating the blend into your cooking. Because some ingredients tend to shift to the bottom during storage, shaking your mixture will ensure an even distribution of flavors.
  • Start with a small amount: When adding this seasoning to your cooking, I recommend beginning with a small amount and adding more after tasting. Remember, you can always add more spice but you can’t take it out. 
  • Customize your salt levels: When you buy spice blends at the store, you never know how much salt is inside. That’s why I prefer to make my own seasoning mixtures. For this recipe, you can either add the salt directly into the blend or omit it and add salt to your recipe as needed.

FAQs

What is Mediterranean seasoning?

Mediterranean spices generally include a signature blend of ingredients, such as basil, oregano, rosemary, garlic, and onion powder. However, other versions—often resultant of regional differences in the Mediterranean area—include flavor-enhancing additions, such as parsley, thyme, and dill. These different combinations give this classic mixture such versatility in Mediterranean cooking.

Is Greek seasoning the same as the Mediterranean?

Because these two variations often include the same spices used in Mediterranean cooking, there is a significant flavor overlap between them. However, Greek seasonings tend to have earthier overtones due to the inclusion of marjoram. Still, because of their similar flavor profiles and regional variations, you can use this Mediterranean spice mix instead of Greek seasoning in your recipes.

What can I use in place of Mediterranean seasoning?

Several options exist if you need a replacement for these Mediterranean food spices. Herbs de Provence is a common seasoning blend from France with a slightly more fragrant, herbaceous flavor. You can also use Italian seasoning due to its earthy, somewhat sweet overtones. However, remember that these seasoning blends have slightly different flavor profiles and may affect the outcome of your recipe.

Is Mediterranean food spicy?

Generally speaking, Mediterranean dishes are not spicy. However, chefs may add spice to their recipes to increase heat levels and accommodate personal preference.

Other Homemade Seasoning You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Seasoning recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean spices for beef, chicken and lamb in small spoons from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Seasoning Recipe

This Mediterranean spice mix is perfect for flavoring meats, vegetables, soups, stews, sauces, and more. Use this unique blend of spices and herbs in your recipes and bring the Mediterranean to your table.
Course Seasoning
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 21kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ tablespoon dried dill weed
  • ½ tablespoon dried parsley
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon dried rosemary
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon lemon peel
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon coarsely ground black pepper

Optional

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, mix all the ingredients and transfer the mixture to an airtight jar.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 1/3 cup of spice blend. However, it can be multiplied as many times as you need.
  • Storage: B sure to store your mixture in a cool, dark place, such as a pantry or cupboard. As long as it is kept in an airtight container, it should be fresh for up to 6 months. It would technically still be good after then, but we find that you get the freshest flavors if you use it within the first 6 months.

Nutrition

Calories: 21kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 110mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 72IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mediterranean Seasoning appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-seasoning/feed/ 0
Red Skin Potato Salad https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 20 Jun 2023 16:27:30 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68332 After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing sides. Whip up a Deviled Egg Potato Salad for a healthy alternative to traditional deviled egg dishes, or prepare a Caper Potato Salad for a gourmet version of this iconic dish. Want to complete your dinner spread? Any of my Summer Salads will enliven your table with crisp, colorful, and...

The post Red Skin Potato Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
After you make this classic red potato salad recipe, you won’t be able to resist making dozens of other crowd-pleasing sides. Whip up a Deviled Egg Potato Salad for a healthy alternative to traditional deviled egg dishes, or prepare a Caper Potato Salad for a gourmet version of this iconic dish. Want to complete your dinner spread? Any of my Summer Salads will enliven your table with crisp, colorful, and garden-fresh flavors.

Red potato salad with bacon and eggs in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy red potato salad recipe uses a handful of simple ingredients to achieve its creamy texture and irresistible taste:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Red potatoes (aka Red Bliss Potatoes): This recipe requires about three pounds of red skin potatoes. Though you can cook your potatoes whole, I recommend cutting them into one-inch cubes to help them cook faster and to eliminate the need to cut your potatoes post-boiling. I also prefer to leave the skin on, though you can remove the skin before cooking if desired.
  • Bacon: Inspired by the fan-favorite German potato salad, we are adding a generous amount of bacon to the savory salad mixture. I use oven-baked turkey bacon for this dish, though you can also prepare it with my Air-Fried Turkey Bacon recipe to reduce cooking time. You can also make your red-skinned potato salad with regular baked bacon if you prefer something other than turkey bacon.
  • Mayonnaise: You can use whatever quality mayo brand you like for your potato side. However, you can also use vegan mayo to accommodate various dietary lifestyles.
  • Apple cider vinegar
  • Dijon mustard: Though I prefer the tangy, sharp taste of Dijon mustard in my homemade red potato salad, grainy mustard will also work in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: You only need Kosher salt and black pepper to season this dish.
  • Fresh dill: Fresh dill gives this recipe its light, garden-fresh overtones. You can also use one tablespoon of dried dill if you don’t have fresh dill on hand.
  • Celery stalks: Bu sure to chop them finely.
  • Scallions: I recommend using the white and green parts of your green onions to give your salad a delectable balance of robust and mild flavors.
  • Hard-boiled eggs: You can prepare your creamy red potato salad with egg or without egg. If you choose to include boiled eggs, I recommend using a process that I think is the best way to cook hard-boiled eggs. Once cooked, cut the eggs into ½-inch cubes and use them to top your side dish.
  • Dill pickles: Adding a few tablespoons of chopped dill pickles gives this dill red potato salad a deliciously pickled flavor. For a milder taste, you may omit this ingredient.

Substitutions and Variations

  • Potatoes: If you prefer not to use red-skin potatoes, you can use red new potatoes or baby red potatoes. If you use baby red potatoes, be sure that they are of equal size before boiling. You could also use other waxy potatoes that will hold their shape during cooking, such as Yukon Gold or Yellow Finn. Though keep in my that other potatoes, like russet potatoes, will fall apart while boiling.
  • Greek yogurt: For a lighter, tangier version of this potato salad, use ½ cup of Greek yogurt and ½ cup of mayonnaise to make the creamy dressing.
  • Sour cream: Mix ½ cup of mayonnaise with ½ cup of sour cream to make a classic Southern red potato salad. This red skin sour cream potato salad will have a slightly brighter, tarter flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Don’t want to make red potato salad with dill? You can omit this ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley or chives.
  • Vinegar or lemon juice: If you don’t have any apple cider vinegar in your pantry, you can make a red potato vinegar salad with red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar. You may also use fresh lemon juice to make this recipe without vinegar.
  • Red onion: To make this dish milder, substitute the scallions with Pickled Red Onions for a tangier taste or Roasted Red Onions for a more caramelized flavor.
  • Sweet relish or sweet pickles: You can make your red bliss potato salad less briny by swapping the dill pickles for a sweeter alternative, like sweet relish, dill pickle relish, or sweet pickles. Or you can also use briney black or green olives.
  • Garlic: Recipes for old-fashioned red-skin potato salad generally include one teaspoon of garlic powder for bolder undertones. However, you could also make this version with one fresh garlic clove.

How to Make Red Skin Potato Salad

The best part about this recipe is how simple it is. These easy instructions will teach you how to cook red potatoes and prepare a delicious dressing that brings every ingredient to life.

  1. Prepare the potatoes: Place the cubed red-skinned potatoes in a large pot. Fill the pan with enough cold water to cover the potatoes, plus an extra inch of the pot. Cover it with a lid. Transfer the pot to the stove and bring the water to a boil over high heat. Once boiling, reduce the heat to medium so the water maintains a gentle boil.
Person showing how to make potato salad with red potatoes in a collage of images.
  1. Cook the potatoes: Lightly boil the red-skin potatoes for about 7-8 minutes until fork tender. When done, you should be able to spear the potatoes easily with a sharp knife. The cubes should be tender but not falling apart.
  2. Drain: Remove the pot from the heat and drain it so that only the potatoes remain. Place potatoes in a large mixing bowl and let them cool slightly on the counter.
  3. Cook the bacon: If you are new to cooking baking in the oven, be sure to check out my recipe for Baked Turkey Bacon for step-by-step instructions. However, in a nutshell, these are the steps to cook bacon. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. and line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Add a wire rack atop the lined tray. Place four strips of turkey bacon on top of the rack, ensuring the strips don’t overlap. Transfer the turkey bacon to the preheated oven. Cook for 10 minutes, flip the strips, and cook them for another 5 minutes. Let them cool for five minutes before roughly chopping them into bite-sized pieces.
  4. Prepare the dressing: Take out a small bowl while the potatoes and bacon cook. Add the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper, and whisk the ingredients. Once combined, add the chopped dill and whisk again.
A collage of images showing how to assemble red skin potato salad.
  1. Assemble the red potato potato salad: Add the chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles, and turkey bacon into the large bowl where you put the potatoes earlier.
  2. Add the dressing: Drizzle the potato mixture with dressing and toss it gently so that it coats all ingredients equally.
  3. Serve: If using, sprinkle the chopped hard-boiled eggs on top of the red potato salad. Serve the dish immediately or cover it with saran wrap and refrigerate until ready to serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

Red-skinned potato salad is a must-have recipe for hassle-free prep time. Prepare it ahead for effortless potluck preparation, or save your leftovers to enjoy days later.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare this delicious recipe one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
  • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

What to Serve with Red Potato Salad?

You’ll have countless pairable meals for any occasion when you make potato salad with red potatoes. This collection has everything from summer cookout menu ideas to weekday sandwiches.

Person mixing red bliss potato salad in a bowl.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making a deliciously savory and tender bacon red potato salad. Everyone can whip up this fan-favorite side using my beginner-friendly cooking suggestions.

  • Cooking potatoes: The trick to making the best red potato salad recipe ever is correctly cooking the potatoes. Begin by filling your pan with cold water and letting your potatoes heat up in the pot. Doing so allows the potatoes to cook in gentle heat resulting in more evenly cooked creamy potatoes. Additionally, this soaking process will reduce boiling time and ensure your potatoes have a tender texture.
  • Dress properly: I recommend letting your potatoes reach a lukewarm temperature before adding the additional ingredients. If your potatoes are too hot, they will absorb the added liquid, which may result in a mushy potato salad. However, the temperature at which you add your ingredients is entirely up to your preference.
  • Presentation tips: One of the biggest complaints about potato salad is that it looks bland. My solution is to reserve some of the ingredients used in the recipe and sprinkle them on top when mixed with the dressing. A redskin potato salad topped off with bacon bits, fresh herbs, and bright veggies is a treat for the eye.
  • Let it rest: While optional, I recommend letting your potato salad rest for 30 minutes to an hour before serving. This resting time will allow your ingredients to mix their flavors thoroughly so that every bite tastes perfectly balanced.
  • Eggs: When you make this red potato salad with eggs, it’s up to you how you prefer to mix them. I like adding the eggs as a topping to keep them from getting buried in the mix. However, you could also add them along with your other dressing ingredients so that they appear evenly throughout the potato salad.
  • Serve warm, at room temperature, or cold: As it is with most potato salads, this red potato and egg salad can be served lukewarm, at room temperature, or cold. However, if you are serving it as a part of your summer barbecue menu on a hot day, it is advised to place it above a bowl filled with icy water to maintain its coolness.

FAQs

Wondering whether red potatoes are good for potato salad or how to prepare your veggies? This handy guide answers all your questions about this delicious potato salad recipe.

Can you make potato salad with red potatoes?

Yes! Not only can you make potato salad with red potatoes, but I also highly recommend it. Red potatoes hold their shape better than other potatoes during the boiling process, and they bring a sweet, buttery flavor to your potato salad.

How long to boil red potatoes for potato salad?

The time it takes to cook red potatoes may vary depending on their sizes. However, after cutting them into one-inch cubes and letting your water boil, your potatoes should only need to cook for 7-8 minutes until they are fork-tender. Keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potato cubes and cooking time. To check for doneness, insert a knife into the center of a potato piece. If it enters and exits easily, your potatoes are ready.

Do I need to peel the skin of red potatoes when making potato salad?

Not at all! I prefer to leave the skin on when I make this red potato salad recipe with bacon. Not only does this add color to the potato salad, but it also ensures you keep the nutrients present in the red potato skin. However, you can peel your potatoes first if you’d prefer not to include the skin.

Are red or white potatoes better for potato salad?

Whether you use red or white potatoes in your potato salad is up to personal preference. I love making this recipe with red potatoes because of their rich, sweet flavor. However, you can use any potato you prefer as long as they are waxy potatoes that can hold their shape during the boiling process, such as Yukon Gold potatoes.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

Whether you are a Pioneer Woman’s Potato Salad fan or have always made your cherished family recipe, I hope you try our red skin potato salad recipe. And if you happened to have any leftover potatoes, here are a few other potato recipes you might also like:

If you try this Red Skin Potato Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Red skinned potato salad with bacon in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Red Skin Potato Salad Recipe

This Red Potato Salad recipe is packed with creamy potatoes, crispy bacon, crunchy celery, and earthy fresh herbs and then drizzled with a creamy salad dressing. It is the perfect side dish for summer BBQs, picnics, potlucks, and more.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 364kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 pounds red potatoes cleaned and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 6 strips turkey bacon* roughly chopped – or regular bacon
  • 1 cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons apple cider vinegar
  • 2 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • ¼ cup scallions thinly sliced or red onions
  • 2 hard-boiled eggs cut into ½ inch cubes – optional
  • 3 tablespoons chopped dill pickles – optional

Instructions

  • To cook the potatoes: Place the cubed potatoes in a large pan and fill them with cold water, making sure that the water covers the potatoes plus an additional inch. Cover the pan.
  • Place the pan on the stove and bring to a boil over high heat. Turn down the heat to medium and let it simmer for 7-8 minutes* or until fork tender (but not falling apart.)
  • Remove from the heat and drain. Transfer it to a large salad bowl and let it cool slightly.
  • To cook the turkey bacon: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet tray with parchment paper or aluminum foil. Place a wire rack on top of the lined tray. Place the strips of turkey bacon on the wire rack, ensuring the strips do not overlap.
  • Bake for 10 minutes, then flip and cook for an additional 5 minutes. Let them cool slightly, and then cut them into bite-sized pieces.
  • While the potatoes and bacon are cooking, make the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, Kosher salt, and pepper. Add the chopped dill and give it a good whisk.
  • To assemble the red potato salad: Add chopped celery, scallions, dill pickles (if using), and turkey bacon into the bowl with the boiled potatoes.
  • Drizzle them with the dressing and gently toss them, ensuring that the dressing is distributed throughout.
  • If using, add the hard-boiled eggs on top*. Serve right away or cover with stretch film and refrigerate until ready to serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-7 cups of salad if you cut your potatoes into 1-inch cubes. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cook time for potatoes: Please keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the size of your potatoes and cooking time. The best time to check doneness is by inserting a sharp knife into a potato cube.  If it comes in and out easily, it should be cooked.
  • Bacon: I used turkey bacon, but regular bacon can be used. If you are new to cooking bacon in the oven, be sure to check out my detailed post on Baked Turkey Bacon.
  • Eggs: If you are using eggs, you can place them on top at the end or chop them up and incorporate them into the salad with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Make ahead instructions: You can prepare this salad one day in advance. However, if you plan to include eggs, I recommend adding them to the mixture just before serving.
  • Storage: Store your leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge, and they will stay fresh for up to 1-2 days. Because the flavors may settle or change during storage, I recommend stirring the mixture before serving and tasting it so that you can adjust its seasoning as necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 824mg | Potassium: 861mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 134IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Red Skin Potato Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/red-skin-potato-salad/feed/ 2
Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/#comments Mon, 29 May 2023 20:06:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19835 The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious yogurt salad dressing. Plus, it is made with a handful of ingredients you probably already have in your pantry. If you are a fan of similar easy Greek yogurt-based recipes, check out our Tzatziki (aka Greek cucumber salad dressing), Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, and Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad recipes. Ingredients You’ll...

The post Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The best thing about this cucumber Greek yogurt salad is that it is easy to make with the most delicious yogurt salad dressing. Plus, it is made with a handful of ingredients you probably already have in your pantry.

If you are a fan of similar easy Greek yogurt-based recipes, check out our Tzatziki (aka Greek cucumber salad dressing), Greek Yogurt Coleslaw, and Greek Yogurt Chicken Salad recipes.

Greek cucumber salad recipe with greek yogurt dressing in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need:

You only need a few basic ingredients and a few pantry staples to make this cucumber yogurt salad. The ingredients list has two parts:

Ingredients for cucumber yogurt salad recipe from the top view.

For the Greek yogurt salad dressing, you will need the following:

  • Greek yogurt: I recommend using full-fat plain Greek yogurt for the most creamy Greek cucumber salad. However, low-fat Greek yogurt or plain yogurt would also work.
  • Garlic cloves: Be sure to mince them finely to easily incorporate them into the dressing.
  • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best. 
  • Extra virgin olive oil: A drizzle of olive oil deepens the flavors of this yogurt dill cucumber salad, but it is an optional ingredient.
  • Vinegar: All you need is a splash of red wine vinegar to brighten up the yogurt salad dressing. I used red wine vinegar, but white wine vinegar, rice vinegar, or even apple cider vinegar would also work.
  • Fresh Dill: A small amount of chopped fresh dill is a classic ingredient for any Mediterranean cucumber yogurt salad recipe, and this one is no exception. If you find the flavors of fresh dill too strong, you can use a teaspoon of dried dill instead.
  • Kosher Salt and Pepper

For The Salad, you will need:

  • Cucumbers: I used English cucumbers (aka seedless cucumbers) as they have fewer seeds than most other types of cucumbers. However, Persian cucumbers (aka Lebanese cucumbers) and garden cucumbers (the most popular type you find in US grocery stores) would all work. Removing and peeling the seeds is optional and depends on the type of cucumber you use. 
  • Onion: A small amount of sliced red onion pairs beautifully with all the other flavors of this creamy cucumber dill salad. However, scallions can be used as a substitute.

Optional Add-ins and Substitutions:

  • Sour cream: Not a fan of yogurt? Use sour cream instead. I recommend using a lesser amount, about ½ cup. If you are a fan of mayo, you can add a few tablespoons to make it a bit more tangy and flavorful.
  • Fresh herbs: If fresh dill is not your favorite, substitute it with fresh mint and fresh parsley. While you can omit fresh herbs altogether, I love the burst of fresh flavor they bring to this summer salad.
  • Seasoning: Add a teaspoon of my Mediterranean seasoning blend to the creamy yogurt dressing for an even more authentic flavor.
  • Honey: You can add a teaspoon of honey to the tzatziki sauce salad dressing if you want your yogurt cucumber dill salad to taste slightly sweet.
  • Lemon Zest: I find that a small amount of lemon zest helps enhance the flavor of the creamy dressing and make it even more citrusy, but it is optional.
  • Ranch Dressing: If you are a fan of ranch flavors and don’t mind a different flavor profile (with a more American twist), you can use our yogurt ranch dressing instead of the yogurt sauce in the recipe below.

How To Make Cucumber Greek Yogurt Salad?

Making cucumber salad with yogurt dressing cannot be easier. If you have 10 minutes, you can make this recipe. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make cucumber salad with Greek yogurt.
  1. Make the yogurt dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together Greek yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, fresh dill (if using), kosher salt, and black pepper until creamy.
  2. Slice the cucumbers: If preferred, peel the cucumbers. Using a mandoline slicer or a sharp knife, slice them in ¼-inch thickness. Transfer to a large bowl along with sliced red onions.
  3. Dress the cucumbers: Drizzle the vegetables with the creamy yogurt dressing and gently toss to ensure all of the cucumbers are evenly coated. 
  4. Taste for seasoning & serve: Give it a taste and add more if necessary. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

When it comes to summer cookouts, planning, and meal prepping are key. Thankfully, with just a few steps, you can make this creamy cucumber salad a day ahead and put it together in minutes. Here is how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: Make the creamy Greek yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready, assemble the salad as directed in the recipe card below.
  • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover Greek cucumber yogurt salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Regardless of which method you choose, be sure to give it a toss before serving.

What To Serve It With?

This easy cucumber salad pairs beautifully with various of main dishes and similar salads. Here are some suggestions for pairing:

Expert Tips:

While this creamy cucumber salad with Greek yogurt is pretty straightforward, there are a few things to pay attention to for the best results. Here are a few tips I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Use a mandolin slicer: If you have a mandolin slicer, this is the time to use it, as thinly sliced cucumbers make for a more aesthetically pleasing and delicate salad. Not to mention, it makes the process of making this yogurt and cucumber dish much faster.
  • Salt cucumbers: The cucumbers will inevitably release their juices as they sit. However, if you have the time, you can place the sliced cucumbers in a bowl fitted with a colander and sprinkle them with half a teaspoon of salt. Give them a toss and let the juices drain for 15-30 minutes. Doing so will draw the water out of the cucumbers and ensure that your cucumber yogurt dill salad remains crisp rather than becoming watery. 
  • Chill before serving: This salad can be served right away, but letting it sit in the fridge for 30 minutes to an hour allows all the flavors to blend and intensify, resulting in an even more refreshing yogurt cucumber salad. 
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and add more seasoning if necessary.
Greek Yogurt Cucumber salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

FAQs

Is Greek yogurt and cucumber good for you?

According to Healthline, Greek yogurt is high in many nutrients and a good source of protein, fat, and carbohydrate source. Conversely, cucumber is a nutritious and low-calorie fruit that is high in water content and provides many essential nutrients and vitamins. So, consuming yogurt and cucumber together, as we do in this healthy cucumber salad, can be good for you.

How do you keep cucumbers crisp in a salad?

You can keep cucumbers crisp by salting them for 15-30 minutes before assembling the salad. Place cucumber slices in a colander set in a bowl. They should release their juices as they sit. Drain and use them in your salad.

How to thicken a cucumber salad?

You can thicken your cucumber salad by adding and tossing a few tablespoons of extra Greek yogurt into the salad.

Other Cucumber Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Greek yogurt cucumber salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad is a refreshing and healthy side dish you can make in 10 minutes. Tossed in a tangy, tzatziki-inspired Greek yogurt dressing, it is a lighter and healthier alternative to mayo or sour cream-based cucumber salads.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 76kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain Greek yogurt full fat
  • 2 cloves garlic ~ 2 teaspoons, minced
  • cup lemon juice freshly squeezed – from 2 lemons
  • 1 teaspoon extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • ¼ cup chopped fresh dill optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 English cucumber* sliced in 1/4 inch slices (peeling is optional)
  • ¼ cup thinly sliced red onion or scallions – optional

Instructions

  • To make the yogurt dressing, whisk together yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, olive oil, vinegar, dill (if using), salt, and black pepper.
  • Place cucumber and red onion slices in a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle the cucumber salad with the Greek yogurt dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This cucumber salad yields approximately 4 cups of salad (with 1 ¼ cup yogurt dressing). It is ideal for 4 servings if you are serving it as a side dish. If you are serving it to a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe as many times as you need.
  • Cucumber: I used an English cucumber, but yu can also use 4-5 (smaller) Persian cucumbers. 
  • To Make Ahead: Make the yogurt dressing up to 3 days in advance and store it in a jar. Slice cucumbers and red onion a day in advance and store them in separate containers. When ready to serve, place cucumber and onion slices in a bowl, drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine.
  • To Store Leftovers: Place the leftover cucumber salad in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. Please be aware that cucumber slices will release their juices as they sit. You can drain the excess liquid or add a few additional tablespoons of Greek yogurt to thicken the dressing. Be sure to toss before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 76kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 609mg | Potassium: 177mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/creamy-cucumber-salad/feed/ 29
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Sun, 28 May 2023 16:17:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Nothing says summer more than ripe, juicy tomatoes, and this one celebrates tomato season in style. And if you are looking for more ways to use your summer tomatoes, be sure to check out Mozzarella Cucumber Tomato Salad, Turkish Bean Salad, and Caprese Pasta Salad. Ingredients Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You will...

The post Burrata Caprese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Nothing says summer more than ripe, juicy tomatoes, and this one celebrates tomato season in style. And if you are looking for more ways to use your summer tomatoes, be sure to check out Mozzarella Cucumber Tomato Salad, Turkish Bean Salad, and Caprese Pasta Salad.

Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Burrata: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese similar in taste and appearance to fresh mozzarella cheese but with a creamy center. Look for a ball of burrata in smaller Italian markets, cheese shops, or in the cheese section of your local grocery store.
  • Tomatoes: I use a combination of large heirloom tomatoes and cherry tomatoes. Juicy heirloom tomatoes are best for their steak-like quality, and the cherry tomatoes add a sweet bite. Feel free to use any tomatoes, including Roma tomatoes, beefsteak tomatoes, tomatoes on the vine, or grape tomatoes.
  • Fresh basil leaves: Finish with whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands.
  • Balsamic vinegar
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

Optional Add-Ins and Substitutions

  • Balsamic reduction: Balsamic reduction – affiliate link – (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for Caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette, or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Avocado: Although untraditional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad.
  • Mozzarella: If you can’t get your hands on burrata, you can use fresh mozzarella balls instead.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato, and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional Caprese salad. But the best part – it’s ready in less than 10 minutes after a few easy steps. Here’s how to make this burrata caprese:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.
  1. Prepare tomatoes: Slice tomatoes with a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter and season with ½ teaspoon kosher salt.
  2. Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  3. Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the rest of the salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Garnish with basil leaves. Enjoy!

How to Store Leftovers

Leftover tomato caprese with fresh burrata will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Expert Tips

  • Use good quality ingredients: Since this is a salad with such minimal ingredients, use ingredients that taste good to you. I like to seek out good olive oil and aged balsamic vinegar for the best flavor.
  • Season tomatoes liberally: Don’t skip on the salt when it comes to tomatoes; they benefit from a good sprinkle. As always, opt for the juiciest, freshest tomatoes you can find.
  • Serve at room temperature: Burrata tastes best when served at room temperature or just above, as the creamy center is soft and spreadable. Tomatoes also turn mealy and lose their flavor if stored in the fridge.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or be scattered into pieces.
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

What to Serve It With?

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

Person cutting the burrata in burrata caprese salad from the top view.

FAQs

Where does caprese salad come from?

Also referred to as “Insalata Caprese”, Caprese has its roots in Campania, Italy at the Hotel Quisisana on the island of Capri. The salad was a tribute to Italy, as the ingredients represent the color of the Italian flag.

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and Caprese?

Burrata is a soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is a simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Who sells burrata cheese?

You can find burrata in Italian markets, specialty cheese shops, or in the cheese section of large grocery stores. It is most often sold in plastic deli containers with some water or brine to keep the moisture intact.

Other Caprese Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato-basil-burrata or have been a huge fan of the cult-favorite Carabba’s Caprese salad or just cannot get enough of the flavors of caprese, here are a few Caprese-inspired recipes you might like:

If you try this Burrata Caprese recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or reduced balsamic vinegar

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Burrata Caprese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Garlic Butter Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-pasta/#respond Wed, 17 May 2023 14:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67308 Pasta with butter garlic is one of my favorites among all my easy recipes for spaghetti noodles. This simple dish comes together as quickly as my Ricotta Lemon Pasta and packs as much bold, robust flavor as my fan favorite Green Spaghetti. Tossed in my signature garlic butter pasta sauce, this easy dish will make your recipe book hall of fame—next to my creamy and spicy take on Gigi Hadid...

The post Garlic Butter Pasta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Pasta with butter garlic is one of my favorites among all my easy recipes for spaghetti noodles. This simple dish comes together as quickly as my Ricotta Lemon Pasta and packs as much bold, robust flavor as my fan favorite Green Spaghetti. Tossed in my signature garlic butter pasta sauce, this easy dish will make your recipe book hall of fame—next to my creamy and spicy take on Gigi Hadid Pasta!

Garlic butter spaghetti in a bowl garnished with parmesan cheese.

Ingredients for Garlic Buttered Pasta

To make the butter garlic pasta sauce, you will need just a few pantry-ready ingredients:

  • Unsalted butter: Due to its high-fat content, unsalted European-style butter is my go-to for this recipe, as it will give your pasta extra depth and richness. However, you can use any unsalted butter you prefer to balance out the excess sodium of parmesan cheese.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: I recommend using finely minced garlic for your buttery pasta sauce, as it most thoroughly infuses the butter with its flavors. You could also use roasted garlic for a smokier, caramelized taste. In a pinch, garlic powder can be a substitute but if you are after the rich garlicky flavors, I would recommend using fresh garlic cloves in this recipe.
  • Kosher Salt and black pepper
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley is one of my favorite herbs in this butter garlic sauce for noodles. However, you can bring out similarly bright, garden-fresh flavors to your meal by using other fresh herbs matching your unique recipe.
Ingredients for pasta with butter garlic from the top view.

To make the garlic butter pasta, you will need only two simple ingredients:

  • Pasta: I recommend using spaghetti for my garlic butter noodles, as their lean shape can hold more buttery pasta sauce than thicker types. However, you can also make this recipe using another type of pasta, such as linguine, penne, fettuccine, elbow, egg noodles, and angel hair. Additionally, if preferred, gluten-free pasta can also be used.
  • Parmesan cheese: Nutty and bold, parmesan cheese is the perfect finishing touch for transforming your plain spaghetti into an elegant, five-star meal.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Red pepper flakes: If you want to give your recipe a pop of spice and color, a sprinkle of red pepper flakes is just what your plain butter pasta needs.
  • A drizzle of extra virgin olive oil: For an extra-rich, authentic Italian taste, finish it off with a drizzle of EVOO.
  • Add a protein: Top off this butter garlic spaghetti with a tender protein to transform this simple side into a complete meal. I love serving garlic butter pasta with chicken (hello, Roasted Bone-In Chicken Breasts!) and seafood, like my zesty Shrimp Shish Kabob recipe.
  • Green Vegetables: Add a handful of baby spinach leaves or blanched peas to the pasta liquid in the last minute to up the nutritional value and give it some color.

How to Make Garlic Butter Pasta

This quick pasta dish is a cinch with my easy butter garlic pasta sauce. With a handful of ingredients and only six steps, anyone can quickly whip up this delicious side. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make garlic butter noodles.
  1. Cook the pasta: Fill a large pot with water, mix in a generous helping of salt, and bring the mixture to a boil. Add the pasta to the pot of water and cook it according to the package instructions (or until al dente.) Reserve 1 cup of the pasta water, drain the pasta, and return it to the pot.
  2. Make the garlic sauce for noodles: While the pasta cooks, melt the butter in a small skillet or saucepan over medium heat. Add the garlic and cook it over medium-low heat until it softens (2-3 minutes), stirring frequently. Then, remove the pan from the heat and stir in the salt, pepper, and fresh parsley.
  3. Toss the pasta: Add the buttered pasta sauce to the cooked pasta and toss until combined. If the pasta is sticky, add the reserved pasta water to the mix in 2-tablespoon increments until it reaches your desired consistency.
  4. Add the parmesan: Sprinkle the buttered spaghetti noodles with parmesan cheese and chopped parsley, and toss until combined.
  5. Serve: Divide the garlic butter spaghetti noodles into serving bowls. Garnish them with more parmesan cheese and parsley, and enjoy!

Storage and Reheating Instructions

With these storage tips, you can save your butter garlic pasta leftovers for an easy lunch or a quick dinner the next day. Here’s how I do it:

  • Store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: When reheating your garlic butter noodles, add a bit of liquid to the mixture to keep your pasta from drying. Then, heat the leftovers in a saucepan for 5-7 minutes or the microwave in 30-second increments.

What to Serve with this Recipe?

Mild yet rich, buttery garlic pasta is a highly versatile side dish. Serve it with a hearty protein, crisp salad, or tender veggie side, and your table will pack a ton of flavor with minimal prep time.

  • Chicken: This parmesan garlic butter pasta is my favorite simple pasta side dish for chicken. Prepare an Instagram-ready spread by making this recipe alongside a five-star Chicken Shish Tawook, Whole Roasted Chicken or tender Greek Yoghurt Chicken. For a flawless ingredient pair, you can also serve it alongside Baked Panko Chicken Parmesan, and you’ll have a cheesy meal that comes together in no time.
  • Turkey: Light and mild, turkey mains exquisitely balance the buttery richness of spaghetti in butter sauce. Italian seasoned Turkey Meatballs make an excellent pasta topping, while Turkey Tenderloin is a succulent main that only takes 30 minutes to prepare. 
  • Seafood: Nothing says, “match made in heaven,” like butter garlic pasta with shrimp. Top your buttered noodles with my zesty Shrimp Scampi Recipe or Breaded Fish for a family-friendly pairing perfect for busy weeknights. Or, pair your pasta with Grilled Mahi Mahi for a light, summery pair ideal for outdoor events.
  • Salad: Want to add a little fiber to your pasta spread? Balance out the decadence of your pasta with a crisp, garden-fresh salad. You’ll love my easy Caesar Salad Recipe, La Scala Chopped Salad, and Burrata Caprese for light Italian signatures. Or, try out a bright, lemony recipe with my gluten-free and keto-friendly Asparagus Salad.
  • Vegetables: When it comes to tasty veggie recipes, the options are endless. Serve your garlic butter parmesan noodles alongside a plate of Oven-Roasted Asparagus or Air-Fried Green Beans for a nutritious green side. If you want a heartier combination, Roasted Portobello Mushrooms and Eggplant Parmesan will satisfy your appetite while serving any vegetarian needs.
  • Garlic bread: No one can resist a classic. Toasty and filling, oven-baked Garlic Bread and Air Fryer Garlic Bread are two of my favorite pasta sides. You’ll love dipping these tender slices into your spaghetti’s simple butter pasta sauce.
Buttered pasta in a bowl garnished with parsley and parmesan cheese.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to infusing your easy pasta side dishes with decadent, buttery flavors. However, here are a few things to pay attention to when making this easy pasta recipe:

  • Use high-quality ingredients: As it is with any recipe that uses a few basic ingredients, the key to the best garlic butter parmesan pasta is using the freshest and high-quality ingredients. Select firm, fresh-smelling garlic bulbs, your favorite pasta brand, and, if possible, European-style butter (for its high fat content.)
  • Keep a close eye on butter and garlic: Butter and garlic tend to cook quickly, so to avoid burning, watch it closely and stir frequently. Keep in mind, too, that the garlic butter pasta sauce only needs to cook for a total time of 2-3 mins.
  • Be sure to salt pasta water: The key to properly seasoned pasta is to cook it in salted water, so be sure to add a generous amount of salt to the boiling water. This small step will enhance the overall flavor of the pasta and make your plain noodles taste delicious even before they are coated with garlic butter spaghetti sauce.
  • Al dente pasta: To avoid mushy or undercooked pasta, I recommend cooking your spaghetti to al dente, giving it a firm yet tender texture.
  • Taste for seasoning: Because parmesan is naturally salty, it’s important to season your recipe sparsely and taste the sauce before adding extra ingredients.
  • Change the herbs you use to match the main dish: Light, herbaceous, and tasty, any fresh herb can be used in this noodle dish. Think of the dish you are serving it with and select fresh herbs that best complement the meal’s flavor profile.
  • Use a large skillet and add pasta: Another way to prepare this plain pasta recipe is to cook your buttery sauce in a large skillet and toss the cooked pasta directly in the pan. 
  • Multiply: Making it for a crowd? Feel free to multiply the recipe to have buttery garlic pasta enough for everyone!

FAQs

How much pasta should I serve per person?

I recommend preparing two ounces of pasta per person. If serving a larger party, you can quickly multiply this simple recipe to accommodate all your dinner guests.

Should you put butter in pasta?

Absolutely! Pasta in butter sauce—especially garlic butter sauce!—is a classic, easy dish for the whole family. You can either melt butter and drizzle it over your cooked noodles or toss unmelted butter into warm pasta until melted.

How to season plain pasta?

There are countless ways to add flavor to plain pasta. You can toss your noodles with a simple sauce, such as my flavorful garlic butter sauce or an olive oil sauce, or you can top your dish with fresh herbs and cheese for a bright, lush meal.

How to make garlic butter noodles with garlic powder?

To make this easy pasta recipe with garlic powder, substitute the fresh garlic with one teaspoon of garlic powder.

Can I make this recipe vegan?

Yes! For a vegan alternative to my simple garlic butter sauce, use vegan butter and vegan parmesan instead of animal-based products.

Other Easy Pasta Side Dishes You Might Like

Can’t get enough of this easy garlic parmesan butter pasta? For even more quick pasta recipes, these beginner-friendly ideas will fill your table with bright, tender flavors.

If you try this Garlic Butter Pasta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Garlic butter pasta recipe made from scratch in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Garlic Butter Pasta Recipe

An easy and quick to make Garlic Butter Pasta recipe that can be served with any main dish. Spaghetti noodles tossed with buttery garlic sauce and then sprinkled with parmesan cheese and fresh parsley for a flavor packed meal that is both satisfying and comforting.
Course Dinner, Lunch
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 369kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta:

  • 8 ounces spaghetti or any other dried pasta or Gluten free pasta
  • Water
  • Kosher Salt
  • ½ cup grated parmesan cheese plus more for serving

For The Garlic Butter Pasta Sauce:

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter preferably European-style butter with high fat content
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley – roughly chopped, plus more for serving

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of salted water to a boil, add the pasta, and cook according to the package directions until al dente. Reserve 1 cup of the pasta water and drain the pasta. Return the now-drained pasta back to the pot.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the butter garlic pasta sauce. Melt the butter in a small skillet over medium heat until fully melted (but not browned.) Add the garlic and cook, stirring frequently, for 2-3 minutes. Remove from heat and stir in the salt, pepper, and fresh parsley.
  • Drizzle the pasta with the butter garlic sauce and toss to combine. If the pasta is too sticky, use the reserved pasta water by adding and mixing it in 2-tablespoon increments.
  • Sprinkle the buttery pasta with parmesan cheese and chopped fresh parsley. Toss to combine.
  • When ready to serve, divide the pasta into serving bowls and garnish with more parmesan cheese and parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serve 2 ounces of (uncooked) pasta per serving. However, you can multiply it if you are serving a large crowd.
  • Keep a close eye on the butter: Watch the garlic closely when sauteeing as it can burn quickly. It is best to monitor it closely as it cooks.
  • Store: Place the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 369kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 372mg | Potassium: 187mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 775IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 137mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Garlic Butter Pasta appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-pasta/feed/ 0
Garlic Butter Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-sauce/#comments Wed, 17 May 2023 14:29:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67310 If you are like us, a fan of making your own Roasted Garlic Compound Butter, you won’t be able to resist the rich and robust taste of this easy garlic butter sauce recipe. Using this versatile recipe as a base, you can quickly turn your homemade garlic butter sauce into the perfect recipe for countless other dishes. Whether you use it to make Garlic Butter Pasta, Garlic Bread, or dipping...

The post Garlic Butter Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you are like us, a fan of making your own Roasted Garlic Compound Butter, you won’t be able to resist the rich and robust taste of this easy garlic butter sauce recipe. Using this versatile recipe as a base, you can quickly turn your homemade garlic butter sauce into the perfect recipe for countless other dishes.

Whether you use it to make Garlic Butter Pasta, Garlic Bread, or dipping sauce for bread, this quick and easy recipe is going to be a staple in your daily cooking routine.

Butter and garlic sauce in a skillet with a wooden spoon.

Ingredients

The list of ingredients for garlic butter sauce is simple and short. You can make this savory recipe using only three ingredients, possibly with things you already have in your kitchen. So, no grocery trip is necessary!

Garlic butter sauce ingredients from the top view.
  • Butter: I recommend using unsalted European-style butter (I like Vermont Creamery (affiliate link), as its high-fat content gives this recipe extra richness and depth. However, nearly any salted or unsalted butter would also work. Just note that if you use salted butter, I recommend omitting the extra salt to avoid over-seasoning.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: I prefer finely minced garlic for this recipe. However, you can also use my Roasted Garlic or Air Fryer Garlic for a smokier garlic flavor. Though I don’t recommend using garlic powder in this recipe, you can use it in a pinch if you don’t have any fresh garlic on hand.
  • Kosher salt

Optional Add-Ins and Variations

  • Clarified butter: If preferred, you can make this DIY garlic butter sauce with clarified butter or ghee. I make clarified garlic butter whenever I need a vegan or dairy-free version of this recipe.
  • Black pepper: Give your three-ingredient garlic butter recipe a little heat by mixing a bit of ground black pepper at the last minute. 
  • Fresh herbs: To make an authentic Italian garlic butter sauce, fresh herbs are essential. One of my favorite variations is garlic parsley butter, but you can also sprinkle in a little rosemary, oregano, thyme, or dill for a light, herbaceous flavor.
  • Spices and seasonings: This buttery garlic sauce recipe is the easiest way to compliment dozens of different flavors, especially if you use it as a meat marinade. For a Greek-inspired take, try Mediterranean seasoning, or add a pinch of baharat spice mix to compliment Middle Eastern fare. You can also add other dried spices to your sauce, including red pepper flakes, Italian seasoning, and Old Bay seasoning. 
  • Fresh lemon juice and zest: I recommend adding a squeeze of fresh lemon juice or zest to your butter mixture for bright, citrusy overtones. Lemon Garlic Butter Sauce makes the ultimate garlic butter sauce for fish and the perfect dipping sauce for shrimp.

How to Make a Garlic Butter Sauce From Scratch?

Simple yet tasty, this quick butter garlic sauce comes together in just five minutes with these easy instructions:

A collage of images showing how to make a garlic butter sauce.
  1. Melt butter: Heat a small skillet or saucepan over medium heat and add the butter. Wait until the butter melts.
  2. Saute the garlic: Add the garlic to the pan, cooking gently. Stir the mixture until the garlic becomes soft (2-3 minutes). Be sure to watch it closely, as garlic burns easily.
  3. Add the seasoning: Remove the butter from the stove. Then, stir in the salt and other desired add-ins, such as pepper and parsley.
  4. Serve: Serve your melted garlic butter with bread or pasta, or use it as a tasty baste for other recipes.

How to Store, Reheat, Freeze, and Thaw?

You won’t want a single drop to go to waste when you make butter garlic sauce. These expert storage tips will ensure you can quickly meal prep and save your recipe for weeks.

  • Store: To store leftovers of this recipe, place them in an airtight container. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating this butter sauce recipe just before serving to avoid unwanted coagulation. Reheat it over low heat in a small saucepan or the microwave (5-second increments) until it reaches your desired heat and consistency.
  • Freeze: To freeze, first let it reach room temperature. Then, you can pour it into an airtight container or an ice cube tray to make individual portions. Store the sauce in the freezer until ready to use.
  • Thaw: There’s no need to thaw your frozen butter garlic sauce. Instead, reheat it just before serving.

How to Use This Buttery Garlic Sauce?

It’s amazing how versatile this simple garlic butter sauce is. Use it in dozens of dishes—from melted garlic butter for bread to sauce for steak—for a tasty meal no one can resist. Here are a few more suggestions:

  • Bread: For a match made in heaven, serve it as a garlic butter dipping sauce alongside your favorite French bread. Or, if you prefer homemade bread, this hearty side tastes amazing with soft, buttery bread like my Buttery Brioche Rolls and Brioche Slices. Or, serve it alongside crustier recipes—like my No-Knead Artisan Bread and Air Fryer Garlic Bread—for a more rustic feel. 
  • Pizza: Want to take your homemade pizza to the next level? Use this sauce for pizza by brushing your dough before baking it. Or you can also brush the pizza crust right after it comes out of the oven. Either way, every bite will explode with flavor.
  • Meat: Transform your bland meat recipes into five-star meals that will disappear in minutes. Use this butter garlic sauce for steak or beef with recipes like my Beef Tenderloin. You can also use it to drizzle or baste poultry dishes like my Baked Bone-In Chicken, Turkey Loin, and Roasted Turkey Legs.
  • Pasta: It’s undeniable that this recipe makes the ultimate homemade butter sauce for pasta. Serve it with spaghetti, and you’ll have Garlic Butter Pasta the whole family will love.
  • Fish: Few things taste more elegant than using this creamy garlic butter sauce for fish. Drizzle this simple sauce over your favorite fish or seafood recipe—like my Grilled Mahi Mahi, Grilled Shrimp Kabobs, or Breaded Fish—and prepare your tastebuds for a host of rich, sophisticated flavors.
  • Marinade: This simple recipe doubles as one of my favorite garlic butter marinades—a succulent substitution for olive oil. Like my Shrimp Marinade and Marinade for Mahi Mahi, this easy recipe adds flavor to any meat or fish meal. Just be sure that the garlic butter reaches room temperature before adding it to your fish or meat.
  • Vegetables: This recipe makes for a flavorful garlic butter glaze that will give any vegetable side a rich, luscious taste. Drizzle this divine sauce over Boiled Green Beans, Air Fried Corn on The Cob, or Steamed Asparagus for a tender, garden-fresh veggie side. If you want a slightly crispier taste, adding garlic butter to Air Fryer Green Beans is an easy way to take it to the next level.
  • Potatoes: If you’re searching for a lavish, melt-in-your-mouth potato recipe, add garlic butter with minced garlic to your favorite dishes. Mix this garlic butter recipe with Rosemary Mashed Potatoes, and your table will look like a food magazine spread. Or, use garlic butter sauce instead of olive oil to give your Smashed Fingerling Potatoes a robust, crisp bite.
  • Rice or grains: This garlic and butter sauce gives any grain dish a flavorsome depth. Pour some of your sauce into classic recipes, like Cooked Bulgur Wheat, Cooked Quinoa, or cooked orzo, and you’ll savor every bite. You could also add this delicious sauce to dishes like Forbidden Rice or Wild Rice for a subtle flavor boost.
  • Popcorn: If you love the savory taste of gourmet popcorn, drizzle your batch with a few tablespoons of this garlic butter herb sauce. You won’t be able to put down your popcorn bowl until it’s empty.
Seasoned garlic butter sauce in a small bowl from the top view.

Expert Tips

There’s no secret to making garlic butter sauce that will delight your taste buds with its savory, succulent taste. Though I have a few tips to help you get the perfect results every time:

  • Use quality ingredients: Selecting the freshest ingredients is the best way to ensure your fresh garlic butter has the most decadent flavor. Good quality grass-fed butter and fresh garlic are the keys to preparing the best garlic butter sauce.
  • Mince the garlic finely: To infuse every drop of this simple butter garlic sauce with robust flavors, mince your garlic as finely as possible. I recommend using a garlic press if you have one on hand.
  • Keep a close eye on it: No one likes a burnt sauce’s harsh, bitter taste. Because it’s so easy to burn garlic and butter, cook your sauce gently and watch it closely during the sautéeing process.
  • Season to taste: To avoid over- or under-seasoning, I highly recommend giving it a taste before serving and adding more seasoning as necessary.
  • Adjust consistency: You can transform this basic recipe into a thick garlic butter sauce by slowly simmering it over very low heat, stirring it every few seconds until it is reduced. It is imperative that the heat is very low as high heat will turn it into browned butter. Instead, let it simmer low and slow until it thickens to your desired consistency. Conversely, if you prefer a thinner sauce, you can add a splash of water, broth, or white wine to the saucepan.
  • Customize it with fresh herbs and spices: Seasoned garlic butter sauce can compliment countless recipes, from Caprese Pizza to Whole Roasted Chicken, with the right blend of herbs and spices. Add fresh parsley and Italian seasoning for the perfect Italian meal, or make an Old Bay garlic butter sauce for all your fish recipes. The options are endless with this basic butter recipe.

FAQs

What is garlic butter sauce?

Garlic butter sauce is a rich, flavorful mixture made by sautéing garlic in melted butter over low heat until the butter is fully melted and minced garlic is lightly toasted.

How do you thicken garlic butter sauce?

To thicken, let the mixture simmer over low heat until it reduces, stirring frequently. Then, let the mixture rest off-heat until it reaches your desired consistency.

How do you make a vegan version of garlic butter sauce?

To make this recipe vegan, try using vegan butter, which generally includes coconut oil, almond flour, and plant-based milk. Or, to reduce the amount of dairy in your sauce mixture, you can also swap out regular butter with clarified butter or ghee.

Other Garlic Butter Recipes

If you love the rich taste of this garlic-infused butter, then you’ll be amazed by how many other delectable recipes are at your fingertips. This collection has it all, from veggie sides to tasty pasta.

If you try this Garlic Butter Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Butter and garlic sauce in a small bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Garlic Butter Sauce Recipe

Made with just a few simple ingredients, this garlic butter sauce is a quick and easy way to enhance the flavors of any dish. It serves multifunctionally as a pasta sauce, dipping sauce, or a marinade for meats and vegetables.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 8 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter preferably European style butter*
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Heat a small skillet (or small saucepan) over medium heat. Add the butter and let it melt.
  • Add the garlic and stir until soft for approximately 2-3 minutes.
  • Remove from the heat and stir in the salt. If using, add the pepper and parsley as well. Serve or use in your recipe.

Notes

  • Butter: You can make this sauce using salted butter. However, if you use unsalted butter, we recommend omitting salt. Alternatively, you can use clarified butter (aka ghee) as a vegan option. Garlic ghee sauce is just as tasty without any dairy.
  • Optional Add-ins: Depending on the recipe you are planning to use this sauce, you can easily flavor it with dried herbs and spices, parmesan cheese, or add a splash of lemon juice and lemon zest to brighten the flavors.
  • Store: To store garlic butter sauce, place it in an airtight container. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating it just before serving. Reheat it over low heat in a small saucepan or the microwave (5-second increments) until it reaches your desired heat and consistency.
  • Freeze: To freeze, first let it reach room temperature. Then, you can pour it into an airtight container or ice cube trays to make individual portions. Store the sauce in the freezer until ready to use.
  • Thaw: There’s no need to thaw your frozen butter garlic sauce. Instead, reheat it just before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 149mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.05g | Vitamin A: 785IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.1mg

The post Garlic Butter Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/garlic-butter-sauce/feed/ 4
Watermelon Cucumber Salad https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/#comments Thu, 11 May 2023 16:51:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9222 Easy to make, this cucumber watermelon feta salad is inspired by my Watermelon Avocado Salad. Similarly, it can be served as a light meal by itself or as a visually impressive colorful side dish. If you are looking for more cucumber recipes, be sure to also check out our Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad, Cucumber Mozzarella Salad, and Watermelon Cucumber Smoothie. Ingredients This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts...

The post Watermelon Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Easy to make, this cucumber watermelon feta salad is inspired by my Watermelon Avocado Salad. Similarly, it can be served as a light meal by itself or as a visually impressive colorful side dish.

If you are looking for more cucumber recipes, be sure to also check out our Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad, Cucumber Mozzarella Salad, and Watermelon Cucumber Smoothie.

Watermelon cucumber salad in a bowl being stirred by a woman from the top view.

Ingredients

This summer watermelon salad with feta and cucumber starts off with an easy honey-lime dressing and a short list of ingredients. Here’s a look at what we need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Olive oil: We recommend using a brand of extra virgin olive oil that you like.
  • Lime juice: Freshly squeezed lime juice works best for this watermelon salad dressing, but you can use bottled juice in a pinch. The flavors would be slightly different, but freshly squeezed lemon juice can also be used when making the dressing.
  • Kosher salt
  • Honey
  • A small watermelon: Seedless watermelon is preferable for this watermelon cucumber mint salad. However, if a regular watermelon is all that is available, pick out the watermelon seeds as you go.
  • Cucumbers: Persian cucumbers have a great crunch, but regular cucumbers or English cucumbers can be substituted. It is optional, but you can remove the seeds if you like.
  • Herbs: A handful of fresh mint leaves is all you need. However, fresh basil would be a great substitute.
  • Feta cheese: Crumble a whole block of feta cheese rather than buying pre-crumbled feta.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

Looking to truly make this cucumber watermelon salad recipe your own? Swap out one ingredient for another or simply omit it altogether.

  • Dressing: Whenever I want to switch it up, I use Lemon Balsamic Dressing in place of the honey-lime dressing. Watermelon cucumber salad with balsamic vinaigrette is just as delicious and tangy. Alternatively, you can also use balsamic reduction as a drizzle at the end right before serving.
  • Cheese: Prefer a watermelon salad without feta cheese? Omit the feta completely for a light, refreshing salad full of fresh summer produce. Or substitute it for goat cheese or even queso fresco.
  • Without mint: If you prefer your watermelon salad with mint, you can double up on the basil and omit the mint entirely.
  • Onion: Add a savory bite with sliced fresh red onions, Pickled Red Onions, or Roasted Red Onions. Or, you can add in a handful of chopped scallions.
  • Vegan: Make it vegan by omitting the cheese, or try your hand at vegan feta. Also, make sure to swap out the honey for maple syrup instead.

How to Make Watermelon Salad with Cucumber?

This watermelon and cucumber salad recipe comes together in 15 minutes, start-to-finish! Here’s how to do it in just a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make watermelon salad.
  1. Make the dressing: In a mason jar or small bowl, add olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey. Shake or whisk vigorously until emulsified.
  2. Assemble the salad: In a large bowl, add diced watermelon, cucumber, mint, and basil.
  3. Drizzle with the dressing: Just before serving, pour the dressing over the salad and toss gently.
  4. Finish with feta: Finish with salty feta cheese, mix once more, and serve in your favorite serving bowl. A final sprinkle of sea salt is optional but a great addition!

How to Make Ahead and Store?

If you are planning to make this watermelon cucumber feta salad recipe ahead of time, here are my best tips:

  • Make Ahead: Cut the watermelon, slice the cucumbers, crumble the feta, and make the dressing. Store each component in separate containers with a tight-fitting lid. Assemble the watermelon salad right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftover watermelon cucumber salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and mix with a touch more dressing to bring it back to life before serving.

What to Serve with Watermelon Salad?

There are so many options when it comes to serving this watermelon salad with feta and mint. While I usually make it for lunch and serve it by itself, you can easily pair it with meats and vegetables for your summer meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

A close up of watermelon feta basil balsamic salad in a bowl.

Expert Tips

Making this watermelon feta cucumber salad is easy, but I’d love to share a few helpful tips to help you as you make it in your own kitchen:

  • Choose a good watermelon: Look for a ripe watermelon that is heavy for its size with a large yellow spot on one side (this is the field spot that indicates ripeness).
  • Properly cut watermelon and cucumber: Dice watermelon into bite-sized pieces, or use a melon baller if you want to make it look pretty. For the cucumber, peeling is optional, but I recommend cutting it into thin slices or equal size cubes.
  • Do not skip on salt: Although adding salt to sweet watermelon may sound strange, do not skip this step. The salt brings out the natural sweetness and freshness of the watermelon and cucumber.
  • Serve it chilled: This salad is best eaten cold. I like to keep the watermelon, cucumber, and feta in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all components of this recipe are cold (and super refreshing) just before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Combine watermelon, cucumber, and mint with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle when mixing: Use gentle hands when mixing to keep the shape and structure of the delicate ingredients.

FAQ’s

What is watermelon salad?

Watermelon salad can be whatever you like it to be, but this version is a simple mix of watermelon, cucumber, mint leaves, basil leaves and feta cheese, all mixed gently in a lemon or lime dressing.

Does watermelon and cucumber taste good together?

Yes, watermelon and cucumber are exceptionally delicious when paired together. The juicy watermelon is the perfect balance to the crisp cucumber.

What is watermelon salad made of?

Watermelon salad consists of watermelon, cucumber, fresh mint, fresh basil, and feta cheese tossed in a lime or balsamic vinegar-based dressing.

How do you cut watermelon to make a salad?

Dice the watermelon into small, 1-inch pieces or cubes. For a special presentation, you can also use a melon baller.

Other Savory Fruit Salads You Might Also Like:

If you try this Watermelon Cucumber Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to give it a star rating and leave a short comment about your experience. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Watermelon and cucumber salad in a bowl with two spoons in the bowl.
Print

Watermelon Cucumber Salad Recipe

This Watermelon cucumber salad is an incredibly refreshing savory fruit salad that is flavored with honey lime dressing. Ready in 10 minutes, it is the perfect summer salad you can serve for lunch or take with you to summer potlucks, picnics, and BBQ parties.
Course Lunch
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 290kcal

Ingredients

For the Honey Lime Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons fresh lime juice from 1 lime
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Salad:

  • 8 cups fresh watermelon cut into 1-inch cubes ~ 5 to 6 lbs – preferably seedless
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick, or English cucumbers
  • 3 tablespoons fresh mint roughly torn
  • 2 tablespoons fresh basil roughly torn
  • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese or goat cheese

Instructions

  • Mix olive oil, fresh lime juice, salt, and honey in a mason jar and shake vigorously. Set aside.
  • Place watermelon cubes, sliced cucumber, fresh mint, and basil in a large salad bowl.
  • Right before serving, drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a gentle toss being careful not to bruise or break the watermelon chunks.
  • Sprinkle the feta cheese on top, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields about 6-8 cups of cucumber watermelon salad.
  • You can use a melon baller to scoop out the watermelon for a special presentation.
  • Serve it chilled. This salad is best when served cold. I like to keep each ingredient in the refrigerator before and after prepping. This way, all the salad is perfectly chill (and super refreshing) before serving.
  • Assemble at the last minute: Toss all the ingredients with the dressing just before serving. This keeps the integrity and texture of the watermelon and cucumber intact.
  • Be gentle while tossing: Use gentle hands to keep the delicate ingredients’ shape and structure.
  • Make Ahead: Prepare all the ingredients and store them in separate containers. You can also make the dressing 3 days in advance and keep it in a mason jar in the fridge. Toss it all together just before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers of this salad will keep fresh in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. However, be aware that the watermelon mixture will collect water as it sits. Simply drain, sprinkle salad with fresh herbs, and toss with a touch more the honey lime dressing to bring it back to life before serving.
  • Balsamic glaze: A light drizzle of balsamic glaze is optional but highly recommended if you have some in your fridge.
  • Short on time? The most time-consuming part of this recipe is the cutting of the watermelon. If you want to make it even quicker, you can buy pre-cut watermelon when you are at the store.

Nutrition

Calories: 290kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 365mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 2056IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Watermelon Cucumber Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/minted-watermelon-salad-bulgur/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant-parmesan/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant-parmesan/#respond Mon, 24 Apr 2023 19:09:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66588 Can’t get enough of air fryer eggplant recipes? Be sure also to check out our Air Fried Eggplant recipe for a more simple preparation of eggplant made without breadcrumbs. How To Air Fry Eggplant Parmesan? Making this air fryer eggplant parmesan recipe is a breeze with our easy-to-follow guide. We start with making my breaded eggplant in the air fryer and then top it off with tomato sauce and mozzarella...

The post Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Can’t get enough of air fryer eggplant recipes? Be sure also to check out our Air Fried Eggplant recipe for a more simple preparation of eggplant made without breadcrumbs.

Air fried eggplant parmesan garnished with fresh basil on an oval plate.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for the air fryer eggplant parm recipe is quite simple, yet each component plays a vital role in creating a healthier version of this Italian eggplant recipe. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: Amongst all the different types of eggplants, I find that globe eggplant is the easiest to find, so I tested this recipe using that variety. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, go for it. There is no need to peel eggplant. The skin is edible.
  • Large eggs: Eggs are the binder in this recipe. If you have egg allergies, a good alternative is using aquafaba instead.
  • Panko breadcrumbs: Similar to my Crispy Breaded Eggplant recipe, I used panko breadcrumbs as I love the crispy texture they provide, but you can use regular breadcrumbs as well. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can purchase gluten-free panko or use an equal amount of almond flour instead.
  • Cheese: We incorporate shredded parmesan cheese in the breading mixture while reserving mozzarella cheese to create a sumptuous topping when cooking eggplant parmesan in the air fryer. Both shredded mozzarella cheese and sliced fresh mozzarella cheese would work in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt, garlic powder, and Italian seasoning are all you need. Don’t have Italian seasoning? Make your own spice mix by mixing ¼ teaspoon of dried oregano, ¼ teaspoon of dried rosemary, ¼ teaspoon of dried thyme and ¼ teaspoon of dried basil.
  • Tomato Sauce: I used my go-to Basil Tomato Sauce, but you can also use store-bought marinara (such as Rao’s Marinara Sauce (affiliate link) for an even quicker air fryer eggplant parmesan.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh basil and oregano are the classic herbs when making eggplant parm. However, you can also use their dried versions.

How To Air Fry Eggplant Parmesan?

Making this air fryer eggplant parmesan recipe is a breeze with our easy-to-follow guide. We start with making my breaded eggplant in the air fryer and then top it off with tomato sauce and mozzarella cheese. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Person salting and coating eggplant in a collage of images.
  1. Salt & dry the eggplant: Sweating the eggplant step is optional, especially if you make this recipe during the summer months when eggplant is in season. However, if you prefer to salt your eggplant, start by lining your work surface with a few sheets of paper towels. Slice the eggplant into 1/2-inch slices and spread them on the paper towels. Lightly sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon salt on both sides and let them rest for 15 minutes. Gently pat-dry eggplant slices with a sheet of paper towel to remove the excess moisture.
  2. Prepare your dredging station: Whisk eggs in a shallow bowl and set it aside. In a separate bowl, combine panko, grated parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper.
  3. Assemble: Dip each eggplant slice in the beaten egg (letting the excess drip off) and then in the breadcrumb mixture, pressing gently to ensure an even coating. Transfer them onto a baking sheet until you are ready to start air frying.
A collage of images showing how to make air fried eggplant parmesan.
  1. Air Fry: Pre-heat your air fryer to 350 degrees F. Place breaded eggplant slices in the basket of your air fryer on a single layer. Air fry until crispy and golden brown on both sides for about 14 minutes, flipping halfway through.
  2. Add the toppings: Carefully top each slice of air-fried breaded eggplant with two tablespoons of marinara sauce and a tablespoon of shredded mozzarella cheese. Air fry eggplant parm for 1 to 2 minutes or until the cheese melts.
  3. Garnish and serve: Transfer the air-fried eggplant parmigiana onto a plate and garnish with fresh basil before serving.

How To Store and Reheat?

Like any of my other air-fried eggplant recipes, this eggplant parm is best on the day it is made. However, you can easily store leftovers and reheat them to enjoy later. Here is how I do it:

  • Storage: Bring your air-fried eggplant parmesan slices to room temperature and then transfer them into an airtight container. Store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating leftovers: Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees F. Place the eggplant parm in the air fryer basket in a single layer. Bake for 3-4 minutes or until warmed thoroughly.
Healthy eggplant parmesan in air fryer right after it is cooked.

Variations

If you are serving this dish to people with special diet requirements, below are a few variations:

  • Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan without Breading: You can make this recipe without breading. If you choose to do so, simply skip the breading step and make a batch of my Air Fryer Eggplant Recipe with no breadcrumbs instead. Once the eggplant slices are air fried, you can top them off with marinara and cheese and air fry for one to two minutes or until the cheese is melted.
  • Vegan Eggplant Parmesan in the Air Fryer: To make this recipe vegan, I would recommend swapping eggs and dairy with their vegan counterparts.
    • Use aquafaba in place of eggs.
    • Swap parmesan cheese with vegan parmesan cheese.
    • Substitute vegan mozzarella cheese in place of regular mozzarella.

Expert Tips:

While this air fryer eggplant parmesan recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d love to share so that you can achieve great results on your first try:

  • Uniform slices: While cutting the eggplant, do your best to slice them in equal slices to ensure even baking. 
  • Sweating eggplants: During the eggplant season, the globe eggplants that are widely available in US supermarkets do not need to be salted. However, if you make this recipe during the off-season, I recommend salting your eggplant before air frying. If you want to know more about why and when to salt aubergine, be sure to check my article on Salting Eggplants.
  • Prep your dredging station: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is the coating of the eggplant rounds. I recommend getting everything ready before your start. 
  • Press to coat: I think the best part of this recipe is the crispy and crunchy texture of the eggplant. The secret to getting that crunchy texture is to make sure the slices are completely covered with the panko mixture. As you are coating each slice, press it gently so the bread crumbs stick well to the eggplant.
  • Do not overcrowd: For best results, arrange the eggplant slices in a single layer. Depending on the size of your air fryer, you may need to air fry the crispy eggplant in multiple batches. While this is an extra step, it is important to avoid overlapping slices, as doing so can result in soggy eggplant parmesan rather than the addictive crispy texture.
  • Spray: Some versions of this recipe uses an olive oil cooking spray to spray breaded eggplant before air frying. During my recipe testing, I did not think that it was necessary, but if you want, you can lightly spray the breaded eggplant slices.

What To Serve With This Recipe?

I think we can all agree that eggplant parmesan cooked in the air fryer makes the best side dish you can make in less than 30 minutes. Similar to my Chicken Parmesan recipe, this Italian classic pairs beautifully with a variety of dishes to create a well-rounded and satisfying meal. Below are a few serving suggestions:

FAQs:

Can you make eggplant parm in an air fryer?

Yes, you can. Making eggplant parmesan in the air fryer is not only quicker but also healthier (no more greasy eggplant again!) Start with coating the eggplant slices with a breadcrumb-parmesan topping and bake them in the air fryer. At the last minute, spoon some marinara sauce and shredded mozzarella cheese on top of the eggplant slices. Air fry until the cheese is melted, no more than 1 or 2 minutes.

How long to air fry eggplant parmesan?

It takes about 16 minutes to cook eggplant parmesan in a preheated 350-degree air fryer.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like:

Here at Foolproof Living, we love eggplant. Over the years, we have published several eggplant recipes that are made with wholesome ingredients. Below are a few you might also enjoy if you are a fan as well:

If you make this recipe for healthy eggplant parmesan in the air fryer or any of our other Air Fryer Recipes, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer eggplant parmesan slices placed in an oval plate and garnished with basil.
Print

Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan Recipe

Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan is the healthier version of the classic Italian dish we love. Cooking eggplant parm in the air fryer delivers perfectly crispy eggplant made even more delicious with rich marinara sauce and melted cheese.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 204kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium eggplant globe eggplant ~ 1 pound each – washed and dried (no need to peel)
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 ½ cups panko breadcrumbs 3.5 ounces
  • ¾ cup grated Parmesan cheese 3.2 ounces
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce or your favorite Marinara sauce
  • 1 ½ cups shredded mozzarella cheese or you can use thinly sliced fresh mozzarella
  • Handful of fresh basil leaves as garnish

Instructions

  • Salt eggplant*: Cut the top of the eggplant and eggplant into ½-inch thick slices. Spread them on a paper towel-lined baking sheet. Sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon of salt on both sides (¼ teaspoon salt for each side.) Let them rest for 15 minutes.
  • Pat dry now-rested eggplant slices with a paper towel to remove excess moisture. Set them aside.
  • While the eggplant is resting, prepare your dredging station. In a shallow bowl, whisk eggs. In a second bowl, mix together the panko breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper.
  • Dip each eggplant slice in the beaten egg making sure to let the excess drip off. Then dip it in the panko mixture and gently press to ensure the coating sticks. Continue to follow the same steps with the rest of the eggplant slices. Transfer the now-breaded eggplant slices onto a baking sheet until you are ready to air fry.
  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Place panko-coated eggplant rounds in an even layer in the fryer basket, making sure they are not overlapping. It is best to do this in two batches so that they are perfectly crispy with a crunchy exterior.
  • Air fry for 14 minutes, making sure to flip each slice halfway through the baking process. It should be done when they turn lightly golden brown.
  • Carefully remove the air fryer basket and place two tablespoons of tomato sauce and a tablespoon of mozzarella cheese on top of each slice.
  • Air fry* until the cheese melts for about a minute or two. Repeat the same process with the second batch of eggplant slices.
  • Serve while they are still hot.

Video

Notes

  • Salting the eggplant: If I buy the eggplant from a grocery store and if it is in season (May-September), I skip this step as freshly picked eggplant, harvested before it is full of seeds and eaten within a few days, does not need salting. You can learn more about sweating eggplant in this How to Salt Eggplant post.
  • Yields: This recipe yields 14-16 slices of eggplant parmesan, depending on the size of your eggplants. If you are serving a smaller crowd, you can easily halve the recipe.
  • You may have to adjust the amount of dredging ingredients based on the size of your eggplants. This recipe was developed using two medium-sized eggplants that were less than a pound. 
  • Storing & Reheating instructions: The air-fried eggplant parm is best when served immediately. However, if you have leftovers, you can store them in an airtight container for up to 3 days, then reheat them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F for 3-4 minutes or until warmed thoroughly.
  • There is no need to “reheat the air fryer” when putting them back in the air fryer (after topping them off with the tomato sauce and cheese). Your air fryer should still be hot enough to melt the cheese. 
  • Keep a close eye on them: I tested this air fryer eggplant parmesan recipe in my Instant Pot Vortex Air Fryer (affiliate link.) Please know that depending on the air fryer you are using, the cooking time might change slightly. To get the best results, gauge doneness by examining the color. As you flip halfway through the air frying process, you will be able to tell if they are browning too quickly. Once you top them off with the tomato sauce and cheese, they melt quickly, so I recommend keeping a close eye on them.

Nutrition

Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 66mg | Sodium: 759mg | Potassium: 478mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 512IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 237mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-eggplant-parmesan/feed/ 0
Breaded Eggplant In Air Fryer https://foolproofliving.com/breaded-eggplant-in-air-fryer/ https://foolproofliving.com/breaded-eggplant-in-air-fryer/#respond Mon, 24 Apr 2023 19:07:19 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66550 No one can resist this eggplant air fryer recipe’s crispy texture and savory taste. However, there’s no need to miss out on the tastiness if you don’t have an air fryer! You can whip up dozens of fiber and potassium-packed eggplant recipes in the oven, like my easy Roasted Eggplant Slices, hearty Baked Eggplant Parm, and more. Ingredients You’ll Need for Air-Frying Eggplant Air fryer breaded eggplant comes together with...

The post Breaded Eggplant In Air Fryer appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
No one can resist this eggplant air fryer recipe’s crispy texture and savory taste. However, there’s no need to miss out on the tastiness if you don’t have an air fryer! You can whip up dozens of fiber and potassium-packed eggplant recipes in the oven, like my easy Roasted Eggplant Slices, hearty Baked Eggplant Parm, and more.

Air fried breaded eggplant on a plate with marinara sauce and fresh parsley on the side.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Air-Frying Eggplant

Air fryer breaded eggplant comes together with just a few simple ingredients and zero added oil. You won’t need any last-minute runs to the grocery store with this easy side dish.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: I recommend using globe eggplants for this dish, as they’re usually the most common among the many different types of eggplant found at American supermarkets.
  • Kosher salt: Salting eggplant is optional—especially if you’re watching your sodium. However, sweating eggplant may help remove excess liquid and unwanted bitterness if you buy your eggplants out of season. I use half a teaspoon of salt for every pound of eggplant. I then pat dry the slices with a paper towel after letting them rest for 15 minutes.
  • Large eggs: Eggs are the key to bonding your panko mixture to your eggplant rounds.
  • Panko breadcrumbs: Panko forms the base of this recipe’s breading mixture and gives the eggplant slices an irresistibly crispy exterior.
  • Parmesan cheese: Rich and nutty, grated parmesan cheese adds calcium and the Italian flavors we love in breaded eggplant.
  • Seasoning: You’ll need one teaspoon of garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper to season this air-fried breaded eggplant recipe.

Ingredient Substitutions

  • Breadcrumbs: If you’d prefer a diet-friendly alternative to traditional breadcrumbs, you can make keto air fry breaded eggplant using almond flour—a great way to lower your carbohydrates. Or, substitute your breadcrumbs with gluten-free panko breadcrumbs for another low-carb option.
  • Dairy-free option: To make air-fried breaded eggplant without dairy, use vegan parmesan cheese instead of dairy-based options. This simple substitution uses cashews and nutritional yeast to mimic traditional parmesan’s rich, cheesy flavor.
  • Vegan version: Looking for a vegan recipe for air fryer breaded eggplant slices? Use aquafaba instead of eggs and vegan parmesan instead of parmesan cheese, and your eggplant cutlets will satisfy your dietary needs.

How to Make Air Fry Breaded Eggplant

Whether you’re looking for a great snack or a protein-packed main course doesn’t matter. These instructions will transform your kitchen into a five-star Italian restaurant with minimal prep time.

Person seasoning and drying eggplant in a collage of images.
  1. Salt the eggplant: Cut up the eggplant into ½-inch slices, and lay them on a surface lined with paper towels. Sprinkle salt on top of the eggplant (both sides!), and let it rest for 15 minutes. 
  2. Dry the slices: Use a sheet of paper towel to pat dry the eggplant slices, removing any excess moisture.
  3. Prepare the dredging station: Whisk the eggs in a shallow bowl. Then, whisk together the panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper in a separate shallow bowl.
Person showing how to bread eggplant slices before air frying in a collage of images.
  1. Dip eggplant slices: Dip each piece of eggplant in the egg wash, letting the excess drip off. Then, dip the cuts in the panko mixture, being sure to coat all the sides of the eggplant. I recommend gently pressing the bread crumbs into each slice to ensure complete coating.
  2. Preheat the air fryer: Set the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing breaded eggplant slices in the air fryer before and after they are cooked.
  1. Arrange the slices in the air fryer: Transfer the eggplant pieces to the air fryer basket in a single, even layer. No slices should overlap, so you may need to air-fry your eggplant in multiple batches.
  2. Air fry eggplant: Cook the breaded eggplant until they turn light brown (approximately 14 minutes), flipping each slice halfway through. You can check for doneness by inserting a knife into one of the pieces. Your eggplant is ready to eat if the blade easily enters and exits the slice.
  3. Serve: If desired, top your air fry breaded eggplant slices with fresh parsley and serve alongside your favorite dipping sauce.

How to Store and Reheat

As it is with any breaded vegetable or meat recipe, this breaded eggplant recipe is best on the day it is made. However, you can easily store leftovers with the storage tips below:

  • Store: Store your leftover breaded eggplant slices by letting them first reach room temperature. Then, transfer them to an airtight container and place them in the refrigerator. Though the pieces may lose their crispiness during storage, they will stay fresh for up to 2 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat your eggplant, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 2 minutes on each side.
  • Freeze: When freezing your air fryer breaded eggplant, let it first reach room temperature. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper, then place your eggplant slices on top in a single layer. Place the tray in the freezer until the pieces are frozen, then transfer them to an airtight container or freezer bag. There is no need to thaw, simply place them in a 350-degree preheated air fryer and cook for 5-7 minutes or until they are warmed through.

How to Serve Air Fryer Roasted Eggplant

When you roast breaded eggplant in the air fryer, you’ll unlock dozens of tasty menu ideas. These Instagram-ready recipes will disappear in seconds, from easy snacks to effortless appetizers.

  • Serve it with a dip or a sauce on the side: Crispy breaded eggplant slices make the ultimate appetizer when served alongside a tasty sauce. Dip them into your favorite marinara sauce or tomato sauce for an Italian-themed side bursting with robust tomato flavors. Or, try out a tangy, Mediterranean menu by serving them alongside my Yogurt Tahini Sauce or Tzatziki Recipe. You can even try them with my fan-favorite Blue Cheese Dip for the perfect game-day snack.
  • Enjoy it as a side dish with your favorite main dishes: I cannot think of a better side dish to serve with dinner dishes like Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken, Chicken Fricassee, or Spaghetti Bolognese.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make delicious air fryer eggplant with breading. These pro tips will give you perfectly golden brown slices every time.

  • Slice evenly: If you want your slices to cook evenly, cutting eggplant into evenly sized pieces is essential. I recommend cutting your veggies into ½-inch slices for this recipe, but if you’d prefer thinner slices, keep in mind that your cook time will decrease. No matter what size you slice your eggplant, keep an eye on your rounds to avoid burning.
  • Salting eggplant: It’s technically not necessary to salt eggplant before cooking, especially if you are buying it from the grocery store when eggplant is in season (May-September.) However, pre-salting your veggies may help remove unwanted liquid and bitterness—especially if you purchase your eggplant out of season.
  • Set up your dredging station before you start: No one likes cooking in a messy kitchen. Avoid the extra hassle by setting up your dredging station before you begin coating your eggplant rounds.
  • Gently push the breadcrumbs: The best part about this simple air fryer recipe is the eggplant slices’ tender, moist insides and crisp exteriors. To get these best results, gently press your breadcrumb mixture into your eggplant slices before placing them in the air fryer basket.
  • Olive oil spray: Though unnecessary, you may lightly coat your breaded eggplant slices with olive oil cooking spray before putting them in the air fryer. This step may help enhance your slices’ crispiness and prevent burning.
  • Avoid overcrowding: The key to getting perfectly crispy eggplant slices is to avoid overcrowding them in the air fryer basket. Proper air circulation is necessary for thorough cooking. Therefore, you may find it helpful to cook your eggplant in batches, depending on the size of your air fryer. 
  • Flip halfway through: I highly recommend flipping or shaking your eggplant slices halfway through cooking. Doing so ensures even browning and crisping on both sides of the veggies.
  • Adjusting dredging ingredients: You may have to change how much of your dredging ingredients you include based on the size of your eggplants. Larger eggplants tend to need more dredging ingredients than specified.
  • Monitor closely: Cooking times may vary depending on your specific air fryer model, the thickness of the sliced eggplant, and the diameter of your slices. Watch your eggplant to keep them from burning or coming out unfinished. Flipping them halfway through the cooking time is a great way to gauge their doneness. This step will allow you to check their texture and color and see whether they need more cooking time.

FAQs

Want to know more about this breaded, crispy air fryer eggplant recipe? I’ve answered all your biggest recipe questions below, from vegan substitutions to ideal cooking time.

Can you make breaded eggplant in the air fryer?

Yes! Quick and easy, cooking breaded eggplant in the air fryer takes half the time as Crispy Oven-Baked Eggplant—while still having all the same savory Italian flavor.

What can I use instead of egg in breading eggplant?

If you want a vegan version of this breaded air fryer eggplant, use aquafaba instead of eggs.

How long to air fry breaded eggplant?

I recommend air-frying breaded eggplant for a total time of 14 minutes, flipping halfway through. However, you may find that your eggplant needs more or less time depending on your air fryer model and the thickness of your slices, so use this estimate as a starting time and watch your eggplant closely.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

Can’t get enough of this easy air fryer eggplant recipe? Do you love hassle-free air fryer dishes? Simple and fast, these other mouthwatering air fryer recipes are just what you need.

If you try this Air Fryer Breaded Eggplant recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fry breaded eggplant slices on a plate with marinara sauce for dippigng on the side.
Print

Breaded Eggplant In Air Fryer Recipe

Making Breaded eggplant in air fryer is not only healthier but also quicker. Indulge in this easy recipe to create irresistibly addictive breaded eggplant, featuring a crispy outer layer and a lusciously soft, tender inside.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 24 minutes
Servings 8 servings
Calories 130kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized globe eggplants ~ 1 pound each; washed and dried
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 ½ cups panko breadcrumbs 3.5 ounces
  • ¾ cup grated Parmesan cheese 3.2 ounces
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups Tomato Basil Sauce optional

Instructions

  • Salt eggplant*: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick slices. Spread them on a paper towel-lined surface. Sprinkle with ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides (you are using ½ teaspoon in total for both sides.) Let it rest for 15 minutes.
  • Pat dry the eggplant slices with a sheet of paper towel to remove the excess moisture.
  • Set up your dredging station: Whisk eggs in a shallow bowl. In a separate shallow bowl, whisk together the panko breadcrumbs, Parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper.
  • Dip each eggplant slice in the eggs (let the excess drip off) then into the panko mixture, making sure that it is coated on all sides. You may have to gently press it down to ensure that it is fully coated.
  • Pre-heat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Place eggplant rounds in an even layer in the fryer basket making sure they are not overlapping. You may have to do it in two batches.
  • Cook until crispy and golden on both sides for approximately 14 minutes making sure to flip each slice halfway through the air-frying process. It should be done when they turn lightly golden brown. You can also check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into one of the eggplant slices. If it goes in and out easily, it should be done.
  • Serve it right away with tomato sauce (or your favorite marinara sauce) on the side, if preffered!

Notes

  • Yields: A globe eggplant that is approximately 1 pound will yield 6-8 slices. With 2 globe eggplants, this recipe will yield 12-16 slices of breaded eggplant.
  • Salting the eggplant: If I am making this recipe during the eggplant season (May-September), I skip the salting as freshly picked storebought globe eggplants do not require to be salted. However, salting would not hurt, especially if you are making this recipe during the winter months.
  • Dredging ingredients may have to be adjusted more or less based on how big the eggplant is.
  • Storage & Reheating: These air fryer breaded eggplant slices are best when served immediately. However, if you have leftovers, you can store them in an airtight container for up to 2 days, then reheat them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F for 2 minutes per side.

Nutrition

Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.004g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 410mg | Potassium: 325mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 171IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Breaded Eggplant In Air Fryer appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/breaded-eggplant-in-air-fryer/feed/ 0
How To Make Vegetable Stock https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/ https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/#comments Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:08:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66223 We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish. It is also a great alternative to chicken broth...

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
We know that it might sound like an extra step, but trust us when we say that once you learn how to make vegetable broth and use it in any of your favorite soup recipes, you will agree that there is no better alternative. It is such an easy (and cheaper) way to add rich and robust flavors to any dish.

It is also a great alternative to chicken broth to make a recipe vegan or vegetarian. Not to mention, just like my Corn Cob Stock, making veggie stock takes much less time than meat stocks so you have no excuse not to try!

Vegetables in a pot to make vegetable stock.

Vegetable Stock Ingredients

The ingredients for vegetable broth are simple, healthy, and all-natural with a ton of add-in options.

For broth vegetables, I recommend using neutral vegetables with savory flavors, such as onions (with the onion skin!), carrots, celery stalks, and fresh garlic cloves.

To give your soup stock recipe extra rich flavor, you’ll also need fresh herbs, like fresh parsley and thyme; salt (both kosher salt and sea salt will work); whole peppercorns, and water.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls.

Optional Add-Ins

When considering what to put in vegetable broth, the options are limitless. You can select dozens of mouthwatering combinations to make your veggie broth recipe as savory, fresh, and delectable as possible. Below is a long list of ingredients you can use:

Other Vegetables You Can Use:

  • Alliums: Alliums—such as shallots, green onions (AKA scallions), leeks, and leek tops—can give this vegan stock a robust, mildly sweet flavor.
  • Mushrooms: Umami-rich mushrooms (and mushroom stems) will give your veg broth recipe an earthy, complex taste.
  • Fresh or dried bay leaves: This simple addition adds bright, herbal notes to any DIY stock.
  • Parsnips: Sweet and mildly spicy, parsnips add a nice sweet kick to the broth.
  • Fennel and fennel tops: If you like mild, anise-like flavors, then fennel is a great addition.
  • Corn cobs: The sweet buttery taste of corn cobs is a welcome addition during the summer months when corn is in season.
  • Tomatoes: If you want to give your DIY broth a touch of sweetness, I recommend adding chopped tomatoes. However, remember to remove the seeds first, as they can give your stock a bitter taste.
  • Apple or pear: Apples and pears are the perfect ingredients to add sweetness and help eliminate bitterness.

Add-Ins With Reservations

These are some of the ingredients to use in small doses when making homemade broth:

  • Carrot tops: When added in small amounts, carrot tops will it earthy, sweet undertones. Too many carrot tops, however, will result in a bitter-tasting broth.
  • Peppers: Are you a fan of heat? Then I recommend adding bell peppers, jalapeńos, or other hot peppers to your broth. However, don’t add too many (especially when using green bell peppers!) to avoid an acidic, bitter liquid.
  • Celery leaves: Use celery leaves for a bright peppery taste, but limit it to just a few ones to avoid making your stock bitter.
  • Soy sauce or tamari: You only need a small amount of soy sauce or tamari to give your homemade veg broth a complex umami taste.

Flavor and Nutrition Boosters

  • Dried kombu: Adding a bit of dried kombu to your simmering broth is an excellent way to give it briny, mushroom-like overtones.
  • Nutritional yeast: I recommend adding a pinch of nutritional yeast to your simmering pot for extra rich flavor.
  • Tomato paste: Give your stock sweet, mild tomato flavors by adding one tablespoon of tomato paste. To help your paste mix into the broth, I recommend removing a half-cup of simmering stock, whisking in the tomato paste, then re-adding it to the pot.
  • Roasted garlic: If you have made some for another dish (such as Baked Garlic Butter), use roasted garlic to incorporate caramelized flavors into your homemade stock.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric (or even Golden Paste): If you’re making an Asian-themed dinner, ginger, and turmeric make brilliant additions to your stock vegetables. Not only do these ingredients add a spicy, bright flavor, but they also help develop a light, appetizing color in your stock.
  • Dried mushrooms: If you are a fan of the rich umami flavors, dried mushrooms is a good addition. However, be sure to soak them for an hour (or so) in hot water before adding to the stock. 
  • Parmesan rind: If you don’t mind a non-vegan addition, parmesan cheese rind is a simple flavor booster that complements any Italian dish. 

How to Make Vegetable Broth

Wondering how to make your own vegetable broth? These simple, beginner-friendly instructions will give you exquisitely flavored, perfectly simmered broth every time.

A collage of photos showing how to make your own vegetable broth.
  1. Place ingredients in the pot: Add the onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley, fresh thyme sprigs, salt, pepper, and other optional add-ins into a large stock pot (affiliate link) or Dutch oven (affiliate link.)
  2. Add water: Pour the water into the pot.
  3. Boil & simmer: Place the lid atop the pot and bring the mixture to a boil over medium-high heat. Once the stock comes to a boil, reduce the heat to medium. Let the mixture simmer for 60-90 minutes, stirring once or twice during this time.
  4. Cool & strain: Let the veggie stock cool for 10-15 minutes. Then, carefully strain the liquid with a fine mesh strainer (affiliate link) placed over a large, heat-proof bowl. Using the back of a spoon, gently press the vegetables for the stock into the strainer to release their juices. Discard the veggies once finished.
Straining broth into jars and a labeled jar.
  1. Store: Transfer the vegan vegetable stock into airtight jars. Let them cool to room temperature and label them before storing them in the fridge or freezer.

How Long to Cook Vegetable Stock?

Once your vegan stock comes to a boil, I recommend letting it simmer for 1 to 1½ hours. Any longer, and the vegetables’ flavors begin to break down.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

The best part of this homemade vegetable stock recipe is how easy it is to store for effortless meal prep. Store it to make a soup the next day, or freeze it for a handy ingredient to use months later.

  • Storage: Pour your veg stock into airtight mason jars (or any airtight container of your choice.) A large heat-proof measuring cup with a sprout (affiliate link) will help streamline this step. Once your jars reach room temperature, transfer them to the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freezing instructions: Transfer your cooled soup stock to freezer-safe, airtight containers—such as these Weck Jars (affiliate link) —being sure to leave a few inches open at the top. Then, store your stock in the freezer for up to 6 months. Adding removable freezer labels (affiliate link) helps me keep track of expiration dates. 
  • Thawing instructions: To thaw your homemade veggie stock, place it in the fridge overnight.
Veg stock stored and labeled in jars.

Vegetables to Avoid Adding to Broth

Though there are countless vegetables to use in vegetable broth, there are a few veggies to avoid. Eliminating the following ingredients will ensure your vegan broth recipe is as smooth and tasty as possible.

  • Starchy vegetables: I recommend avoiding starch-based vegetables, like potatoes (including sweet potatoes, baby potatoes, yellow potatoes, and potato peels) and turnips. These ingredients will make your stock clumpy and cloudy.
  • Zucchini and green beans: Vegetables like zucchini and green beans become bitter when simmered too long and may harsh the savory flavors of your broth.
  • Brassica family veggies: Vegetables from the Brassica family—including cruciferous vegetables, like kale, broccoli, cauliflower, cabbage, mustard greens, and bok choy—will likely turn your veggie broth bitter. However, I often use kale stems (check out this handy guide to properly remove stems from kale) and chard stems as an addition. 
  • Beets and beet skins: These reddish-purple veggies will likely transfer their color into your stock, resulting in off-colored dishes when cooking.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to make the best-tasting vegetable broth. Here are a few pro tips to help you as you make your own vegetable stock.

  • Rinse and chop veggies well: Be sure to remove all harmful debris from your veggies. When rinsing your ingredients, I recommend scrubbing them lightly under cold tap water with a soft vegetable brush. Then, chop your veggies into small pieces to ensure they release maximum flavor into your stock.
  • Choose fresh ingredients: Using fresh vegetables is the best way to give your vegetarian broth the best flavor. Avoid wilted or overripe produce, as these ingredients will give your vegetable soup stock a bitter taste. Organic vegetables are always preferable, but non-organic ones would also work.
  • Mix and match vegetables: To us, the secret to a good vegetable broth is to use a variety of vegetables in your mix. And when doing so, it is important to avoid using a lot of one kind. 
  • Roast or sauté your veggies: Roasting or sautéing your vegetables before adding them to your stock will help release their garden-fresh flavors, resulting in extra complexity and depth. These pre-cooked veggies will give you a brown vegetable stock with a more robust flavor than white stocks. To sauté your vegetables, cook them in a skillet with one tablespoon of olive oil for 15 minutes. To roast them, cook them in a 300-degree F. oven for 30-35 minutes.
  • Begin with cold water: I recommend beginning with cold water when cooking your veg stock. This more significant temperature differential will gradually extract the vegetables’ flavors, resulting in greater depth and a richer taste.
  • Simmer gently: After boiling your vegetable broth, reduce the mixture to a gentle simmer. This lower temperature will ensure that your stock comes out savory—not bitter—and clear.
  • Strain the veggie stock: Once the cooking time is completed, pour the mixture through a fine-mesh strainer to remove the remaining vegetable pieces. Some people also line it with a cheesecloth, but it is optional. Press the veggies against the strainer to extract their juices, then discard the remaining solids. This process will give your stock the most flavor while ensuring a smooth, clear texture.
  • Cool completely before storing: Before storing your DIY vegetable broth, let it reach room temperature. This cooling will ensure your storage containers don’t crack in the cold, reduce unwanted condensation, and prevent bacterial growth.
  • Adding salt: To avoid oversalting it, I prefer to begin with a small amount of salt —only one teaspoon—and add more as the flavors develop. However, if you prefer a saltier taste, you can add more.
Various veggie scraps in a sheet pan.
  • Vegetable Stock with Scraps: It is no secret that making homemade stock from vegetable leftovers is another popular method. Many people save their cooking trimmings and peels (such as carrot peels and onion skins) and store them in a freezer bag for future stock making. We are also fans of that method so we have dedicated a separate article to it, titled “How to make vegetable Stock from Scraps (and frozen scraps)”, where we covered the process in depth.

How to Use Veggie Stock

You can create hundreds of dishes using vegetable stock as a foundation point. Put it to good use with some of the suggestions below:

  • Vegetarian soup recipes: Veggie stock is a must when making these delectable soup dishes. Get your fall fix with a creamy, 30-minute dish like Pumpkin Ginger Soup or Wild Rice Chicken Soup. Or, use your stock for a soup recipe like my Spiced Chickpea Stew or Green Lentil Soup for a dish as delicious as it is filling.
  • Cooking grains or legumes: It doesn’t matter whether you prefer to cook quinoa on the stove, in an Instant Pot, in a rice cooker, or in the microwave. Prepare your quinoa with veggie broth, and you’ll be astounded by your grains’ savory flavor. You can even use vegetable stock for cooking wild rice or in popular wild rice recipes like my Wild Rice Pilaf or Wild Rice Stuffing. Looking for a hearty Mediterranean option? Cooking bulgur with this stock is an easy way to elevate your cooking or make dishes like Bulgur Pilaf. This vegetable broth recipe even makes an excellent base for cooking risotto!
  • Mashed potatoes: Looking for a healthy alternative to buttery mashed potatoes without sacrificing flavor? Instead of using milk or cream, try using veg stock instead! With this easy recipe, your mashed potatoes will come out rich and flavorful in no time.
  • Braising and sautéing vegetables: Add sophisticated depth to your favorite vegetable sides—like my Pan-Seard Mushrooms and Asparagus—by lightly braising them with vegetable stock.
  • Sauces and gravies: This quick vegetable broth provides an ideal base for dozens of savory sauces, like any of your pasta sauces or gravy.
  • Steaming vegetables: When you make your own vegetable broth, you have the perfect ingredient to give steamed vegetables an incomparably rich taste. Use your veg stock instead of water in Steamed Asparagus or any other steamed vegetable for an easy flavor upgrade.
  • Vegetable curries: Nothing beats the earthy, spicy taste of warm curry. Using my veggie stock recipe, you can add succulent flavor to dishes like Cauliflower Curry, Butternut Squash Red Curry Soup, and Curried Brown Rice.

FAQs

It’s a cinch to make vegetable broth from scratch. Here are the answers to some of the frequently asked questions:

What is the difference between vegetable broth and stock?

Vegetable stock generally has less seasoning and is often used as a base for other dishes. By contrast, vegetable broth tends to have more seasoning and can serve as either a recipe ingredient or a “finished dish,” ready to drink straight from a cup.

What not to put in vegetable stock?

I recommend eliminating starchy vegetables (i.e., potatoes), zucchini, green beans, cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, and beet skins from your ingredient list.

What is the most common vegetable mixture used in making stock?

The most common ingredient combination for veg broth is referred to as “mirepoix,” meaning the combination of onions, celery, and carrots.

Can you freeze homemade vegetable stock?

Yes! To freeze your homemade veggie broth, let it first reach room temperature. Transfer the liquid to airtight, freezer-safe containers, leaving 1-2 inches at the top of each container. It should be good for up to 6 months in the freezer.

How long does homemade vegetable stock last in the fridge?

When stored properly in airtight containers, this veg stock will last up to 5 days in the refrigerator.

What to do with the leftover vegetables from making veggie stock?

A great way to eliminate food waste and eliminate your vegetable scraps is to compost them.

What is the difference between white vegetable stock and brown vegetable stock?

White vegetable stock is made by simmering whole vegetables in water whereas the brown version is made by first roasting vegetables in water and then simmering them in water.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetables in a big pot to make vegetable stock.
Print

How to Make Vegetable Stock

Learn how to make vegetable stock at home cheaper than store bought vegetable broth. Homemade veggie stock is such as easy way to elevate any of your soups, stews, sauces and casseroles.
Course Vegan
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 large onions roughly chopped
  • 4 medium size carrots chopped in 2-inch pieces
  • 2 celery stalks chopped
  • 1 whole head of garlic cut in half widthwise
  • 5 sprigs fresh parsley
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 2 teaspoons kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black peppercorns about 8-10 whole peppercorns
  • 10 cups water

Optional Add-ins

  • 1 cup Mushroom or mushroom stems
  • 1-2 bay leaves
  • 1 leek with the top

Instructions

  • Place onion, carrots, celery, garlic, fresh parsley and fresh thyme sprigs, salt and pepper and any of the optional add ins into a large stockpot or a Dutch oven.
  • Pour the water in.
  • Put the lid on and bring to a boil on medium-high heat.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer, stirring once or twice, for about an hour to hour and a half.
  • Let it cool for 10 – 15 minutes and carefully strain using a fine mesh strainer placed over a large heat proof bowl, pressing the juices out of the vegetables with the back of a spoon. Discard the veggies.
  • Transfer the vegetable broth into jars. Cool them to room temperature before storing in the fridge or freezing for later use.

Notes

  • Rinse your vegetables well: It is best to give your vegetables a quick rinse to get any debris before using them in your stock. You can also use a soft brush to gently rub them (such as carrots). This way, there is no need to peel them. Needless to say, avoid using moldy or rotten vegetables.
  • Vegetables to avoid: You can use this basic recipe and add more veggies based on what you have on hand. However, we recommend avoiding cruciferous vegetables such as kale, cabbage, and Brussels sprouts as they can make your broth bitter. Also, starch veggies like potatoes would make your stock cloudy so it is best not to use them.
  • Storage & freezing instructions: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can also freeze it for up to 6 months. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock with scraps: You can make vegetable broth using kitchen scraps or even frozen scrap. The method is similar but there are a few other things to pay attention to. If you want to try that method, check out our detailed post on how to make veggie broth from scraps to learn more.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 4780mg | Potassium: 411mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 177IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 162mg | Iron: 2mg

The post How To Make Vegetable Stock appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/how-to-make-vegetable-stock/feed/ 2
Vegetable Stock from Scraps https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/#respond Wed, 12 Apr 2023 22:06:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=66247 Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes. Add it to sauces for a rich, savory...

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Making homemade vegetable stock from scraps is an easy way to save money, eliminate food waste, and prepare hundreds of delectable dishes. Cheaper than store-bought broths, this simple recipe makes for easy storage and freezing, so you can effortlessly incorporate it into your weekly meal prep. Not to mention, it is a great alternative to chicken stock to use in vegetarian recipes.

Add it to sauces for a rich, savory flavor, or use it as a delicious base for your favorite soups and stews. No matter how you use it, vegetable scrap broth will make your kitchen taste like a five-star restaurant. 

Kitchen scraps placed in a pot to make vegetable broth.

What Veggie Scraps to Use for Stock?

Don’t know what ingredients to add to your veggie scrap stock? Using this master list, you’ll find dozens of ideas, from hearty vegetable trims to savory veggie peels. 

  • The outer layer and skin of alliums: One of the most flavorful additions that you can add to a veggie broth from kitchen scraps is the outer layer of vegetables like onions, shallots, and garlic. In particular, onion skins and onion peels give scrap stock a hearty, robust taste.
  • Green parts of scallions and leeks: The green ends of green onions and leek tops can add mild, grassy undertones to your vegetable broth with scraps.
  • Fennel tops: Full of sweet, licorice flavor, fennel tops make a great addition.
  • Carrots and carrot tops: These carrot bits unlock sumptuous, sweet flavors in your stock. As a bonus, they also add great color!
  • Corn cobs: If you are like us a huge fan of the popular Mexican dishes, Mexican Corn Salad or Mexican Street Corn Soup and make them during the summer months, with this recipe, you can use the leftover corn cobs to lend your own vegetable broth a sweet, buttery taste. And if you have so many corn cobs then you can also make our Corn Broth recipe.
  • Mushroom stems: Don’t throw away your mushroom scraps the next time you make Roasted Portobello Mushrooms or Shiitake Mushroom Soups. Mushroom stems are the perfect ingredient to give your homemade stock an earthy, full-bodied flavor.
Veggie scraps to use for stock are on a sheet pan from the top view.
  • Tomatoes and tomato skins: Some of my favorite leftover vegetable scraps to add are tomatoes and tomato skins. These pantry-classic ingredients add a bright and sweet flavor to any homemade broth.
  • Vegetable peels: Nearly any vegetable peel will work in this flavorful stock recipe, from carrot peels to squash peels. Even pea pods add delicious notes to this flavorful vegetable stock.
  • Herbs and herb stems: After using fresh herbs in a dish be sure to add your leftover stems to your vegetable stock! Fresh parsley and thyme are some of the best things to brighten up the taste of your vegetable scrap stock.
  • Peppers: There’s no need to let the tops of your bell peppers go to waste. Add them in for a light, earthy flavor. However, I recommend using bell peppers in small amounts, as they can give them a bitter taste if used too much.
  • Asparagus ends: Put your leftover asparagus bits (including the woody ends) to good use and add to the saved scraps pile. 

Optional Add-Ins

Want to add even more flavor to your veggie stock from scraps? Here are a few additional ingredients to elevate veggie scrap broth:

  • Onion, carrot, celery: These three ingredients—a mix called “mirepoix”—form a hearty vegetable stock base. They are also the backbone of a good vegetable broth. While scraps are usually enough, (optionally) you can also add an equal amount of each of these vegetables to ensure that your broth from veggie scraps has a rich, well-balanced flavor profile.
  • Garlic: If you prefer a bold, rich flavor, garlic cloves are a great way to add complexity to the stock. You don’t need to peel them, either; simply smash the cloves and add them directly to your vegetable scraps.
  • Bay leaf: I love to add bay leaves as they give the liquid irresistible herby undertones. Even better, you only need one bay leaf per batch of broth.
  • Salt: Salt can be a secret weapon when making veggie stock from scraps. Add a small amount of kosher salt (or sea salt) to bring out the nuanced flavors of your broth veggies.
  • Black peppercorns: Whole peppercorns are a classic ingredient in any stock recipe and this one is no exception.
  • Fresh ginger and turmeric: Ginger and turmeric are my go-to’s when making Asian-inspired dishes. Use a small amount of these ingredients to complement your dish. Keep in mind, however, that turmeric will likely change the color of your broth.

What Vegetable Scraps Are Not Good for Stock?

There are no strict rules regarding which veggie scraps should be avoided in making vegetable stock. With that being said, in an ideal scenario, it would be preferable to exclude certain vegetables or at least use them sparingly. Below are a few of those:

  • Cruciferous vegetables: Avoid adding many vegetables from the Brassica family—such as kale, cabbage, cauliflower, broccoli, chard, and Brussels sprouts, as these veggie scraps may give your broth a bitter flavor.
  • Starchy vegetable trimmings: I don’t recommend adding the skins and trimmings of starchy vegetables, like potatoes or potato skins, to your broth recipe, as they tend to make the stock cloudy.
  • Beets: I avoid beets in my kitchen scraps pile because they carry an intense color and overpoweringly earthy flavor.
  • Eggplant: I recommend avoiding eggplant trimmings in your food scraps to eliminate an unwanted slimy texture and unnecessarily strong flavor.
  • Spicy peppers: It isn’t easy to cook with veggie stock that’s too spicy. That’s why I avoid spicy peppers—such as jalapeños, serranos, and habaneros—when preparing my vegetable scrap stock.
  • Artichokes: Artichoke pieces tend to have a powerful taste that will overwhelm the other, more nuanced flavors of vegetable scrap broth.
  • Rotten or moldy vegetables: The most important rule of thumb is to use vegetables that aren’t rotten or moldy, as these ingredients will give your stock a bitter flavor and even pose a health risk.

How to Save Vegetable Scraps for Stock

Wash the vegetables well before use to keep the scraps as fresh, clean, and tasty as possible. A soft kitchen brush works well to eliminate any unwanted soil and debris. This way, your peels, ends, leaves, stems, and trimmings are ready to use directly after cutting.

Photos showing how to save scraps for stock in plastic bags.
  • In the fridge: You may store your vegetable scraps in an airtight Ziploc bag in the refrigerator and add them to your veggie scrap stock once you collect 4-6 cups. Labeling your bags will help ensure your ingredients don’t go bad before you use them. 
  • In the freezer: Another way to collect vegetable scraps is by putting them in an airtight container or a freezer bag in the freezer. Once you reach 4-6 cups, you can save them for later or make veggie stock immediately.

How to Make Vegetable Broth from Scraps

Making vegetable stock from scraps is the best way to use up vegetable leftovers without hassle. Follow these effortless instructions for savory, rich broth every time.

A collage of images showinghow to make veggie broth from scraps.
  1. Add the ingredients: Place all the veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a large stock pot or Dutch oven. If you’re making vegetable stock from frozen scraps, you don’t need to thaw them first. Just keep in mind that the total time of cooking will be longer. Pour the water over the veggie scraps, put the lid on the pot, and bring the contents to a boil over the stovetop. 
  2. Let it simmer: After it boils, leave the lid ajar, and let it simmer for 1-1½ hours.
  3. Strain: Strain the veggie stock broth by placing a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl. Discard or compost the leftover vegetables.
  4. Cool the stock: If you are using it right away, use it in your dish. Otherwise, pour the stock into mason jars or airtight plastic containers, and let the liquid cool to room temperature.
  5. Store: Once the liquid has cooled, store it in the fridge, or freeze it for later use.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

  • Store: Place broth in airtight plastic containers or mason jars. Once they are fully cooled, place them in the fridge and use them within 5 days.
  • Freeze: To freeze, let the liquid come to room temperature in freezer-safe airtight containers (such as Weck jars). Leave 1-2 inches at the top of each container. Then, store the stock in the freezer for up to 6 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broth in the fridge overnight.
Veggie scrap stock in a jar labeled with the date.

How to Use It In Your Cooking?

There are countless ways to use this flavorful homemade veggie stock from scraps. From creamy risotto to hearty soup recipes, the possibilities are endless when you make your own vegetable stock. 

  • Soups and stews: Veggie scrap stock makes a rich, flavorful base for countless delicious soup and stew recipes. Whether you whip up an umami-packed, one-pot Shiitake Mushroom Soup or a hearty, vegan French Lentil Soup, your kitchen scraps can create mouthwatering flavors in under an hour.
  • Poached vegetables with meat and fish: Who can resist buttery, tender veggies alongside a protein-packed main? Use your vegetable broth from scraps to make these crowd-pleasing menus, and your dinner guests won’t resist a second plate.
  • Risotto: Rich, creamy, and utterly delicious, risotto is one of my favorite Italian dishes. Now you can add incomparable savoriness to every bite by whipping up this classic recipe using this simple recipe as the cooking liquid.
  • Cooking grains: There’s no reason why your grains have to be bland. You can give anything from Jasmine Brown Rice, Black Rice Pilaf to white rice, and even Stovetop Quinoa gourmet taste using vegetable scrap stock.

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips for the best results as you make your own veggie broth from scraps:

  • Don’t use old or moldy vegetables: Even though we’re using scraps, you don’t want to use moldy or rotten vegetables. These unpalatable veggies will give your broth a sour, bitter taste and may introduce unwanted bacteria to your recipe. Be sure, too, to give your veggies a good rinse before adding them to your mix.
  • Mix and match veggies: Don’t be afraid to experiment with new blends of vegetables. Various combinations will result in different flavors, which may better suit a specific recipe or taste preference.
  • Don’t overuse any vegetables: One of the best parts about making broth from veggie scraps is that the flavor improves with a balanced mix of vegetables. Try not to use too much of any one kind of vegetable, as this will give your broth’s favor a monotone, often unsavory taste.
  • Try to compliment your favorite recipes: Nothing tastes better than using a perfectly paired veggie stock to make a recipe. I recommend tailoring which veggie scraps you use to bring out your menu’s natural flavors. For example, when cooking Asian-inspired dishes—like my fan-favorite Ramen Bowl—I love adding ginger to my veggie scrap mix. 
  • Roast or sauté the scraps: Though this extra step takes more prep time, roasting or sautéing veggie scraps before adding them to your broth mix will give your stock a rich, caramelized flavor. To roast your veggies, bake them in the oven at low heat (300 degrees F.) for 20-25 minutes, and toss them halfway through the cooking process. To sauté them, cook them in a pan for 5-7 minutes with a bit of olive oil.
  • Cook it at a gentle simmer: To avoid giving your veggie scrap stock a bitter flavor, bring your mix to a gentle simmer after it reaches a boil. Don’t cook it for more than 1½ hours, and be sure to taste it before adding it to other recipes.
  • Store it in small portions: Store your stock in 1-2 cup portions, which makes it easy to use in future meals (including your weekly meal prep.)
Vegetable scrap broth with veggies after the cooking time is completed.

FAQs:

Have more questions about this homemade vegetable broth with scraps? This simple guide covers everything from making vegetable broth from frozen scraps to alternate cooking methods.

Can I reuse/recycle the veggie scraps after making veggie broth?

I don’t recommend reusing veggie scraps after making homemade broth because you’ve likely already extracted all their flavor and nutrition. Instead, you can discard or put the scraps in a compost bin.

How to make vegetable stock from frozen scraps?

You don’t have to thaw your vegetable pieces when you make veggie stock from frozen scraps. Simply follow the recipe as usual, considering the cook time will be longer.

How to make vegetable stock from scraps in an Instant Pot?

To make veggie scrap broth in a pressure cooker, use the same amount of ingredients written in the recipe and set your Instant Pot to high pressure for 30 minutes. Though, keep in mind that it will take about 20 minutes for your mix to reach high pressure before beginning the cooking process.

How many cups of vegetable scraps should I use for stock?

Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Vegetable stock from scraps in a big pot from the top view.
Print

Vegetable Stock from Scraps Recipe

The foolproof method for making vegetable stock from kitchen scraps. This method is not only delicious but also much cheaper than the vegetable stock you buy at the grocery store. Use it in soups, stews, casserole, sauces, and more!
Course Vegetarian
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 8 cups
Calories 7kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-6 cups of veggie scraps ie peels, trimmings, tops, and bottoms
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 8-10 black peppercorns
  • 8-10 cups of water

Optional Add ins:

  • 2-3 cloves of garlic smashed
  • 3-4 parsley stems

Instructions

  • Place veggie scraps, salt, and peppercorns into a stock pot or a Dutch oven. If using, add garlic and parsley stems.
  • Pour water over the veggie scraps.
  • Bring it to a boil and let is simmer for 1 to 1 ½ hours (partially cover it with the lid.)
  • When done, turn the heat off and let it cool for 20-30 minutes.
  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and strain vegetables. Discard or compost vegetables.
  • Pour the veggie scarp stock into jars (or plastic containers), bring to room temperature, and store in the fridge or freeze for later.

Notes

  • Ratio of kitchen scraps to water: Depending on the size of your pot, I recommend using 4-6 cups of veggie scraps and 8-10 cups of water, to make a whole batch of homemade vegetable scrap broth.
  • Vegetables that are good for scraps: Trimmings and peels of alliums (onions, leeks, shallots), carrot, celery, garlic, tomatoes, and corn cobs are a few to name.
  • Vegetables to avoid: Peels and trimmings of cruciferous vegetables (i.e. kale, cabbage, Brussels sprouts), beets, spicy peppers, and artichokes are a few to name. We also recommend avoiding any moldy or rotten vegetables or scraps.
  • Frozen scraps: You can use this exact recipe with frozen scraps. There is no need to thaw. The only difference would be the time of cooking.
  • Storage & freezing: You can store your stock in an airtight container (such as a Weck jar or a mason jar) in the fridge for up to 5 days. You can freeze it for up to 6 months. We recommend thawing it in the fridge overnight.
  • Vegetable stock using whole veggies: If you prefer making stock using whole vegetables (instead of kitchen scraps), be sure to check out our detailed post on Homemade Vegetable Broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 7kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.01g | Saturated Fat: 0.003g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.003g | Sodium: 773mg | Potassium: 6mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.05mg

The post Vegetable Stock from Scraps appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegetable-stock-from-scraps/feed/ 0
Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/#comments Sat, 25 Mar 2023 18:47:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65568 Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew.  The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea...

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cookbook author and New York Times columnist Alison Roman first published the Alison Roman Chickpea Stew in The New York Times in 2018. The recipe quickly took the internet by storm, gaining popularity among home chefs and food lovers on social media through its own hashtag #TheStew. 

The NYT chickpea stew recipe has many renditions today, so you may also see it referred to online as “Chickpea Turmeric Stew,” “Chickpea Curry Stew,” or “Coconut Curry Chickpea Stew.” Because of its original publication in The New York Times, you may also see it appear as “The New York Times Chickpea Stew” or the “NY Times Chickpea Stew.” Whatever you’d like to call it, Alison Roman’s viral recipe is truly delicious and worth a try!

Alison Roman's chickpea stew in a bowl garnished with yogurt and mint leaves.

Ingredients

The beauty of this vegetarian chickpea stew is that, because of its short ingredient list of pantry staples, it’s budget-friendly and requires little to no grocery shopping if you have a well-stocked kitchen. Here’s what you’ll need to make the Alison Roman stew recipe: 

Ingredients for chickpea stew by Alison Roman are in small bowls from the top view.
  • Olive oil: Garbanzo beans love to bathe in oil, so you’ll need about a ¼ cup. 
  • Aromatics: Onion, fresh ginger, and garlic deepen the stew’s flavors and add a nice aroma. 
  • Spices and seasonings: You’ll need ground turmeric, red pepper flakes (optional), kosher salt, and black pepper. 
  • Canned garbanzo beans: Spiced chickpeas, also known as garbanzo beans, are the star of the show in this recipe. The canned version is easy, inexpensive, and convenient, but you can also cook your own dried chickpeas if you’d prefer. Just ensure that the ones you use in this recipe are cooked.   
  • Full-fat coconut milk: According to Roman, full-fat coconut milk yields the best results for this chickpea coconut stew. You’ll want to avoid lite coconut milk, low-fat coconut milk, cream of coconut, or coconut milk that’s meant for drinking, as these variations will alter the consistency of the stew. 
  • Vegetable stock: You can also use chicken stock (I make mine following Barefoot Contessa’s Chicken Stock recipe) if preferred. 
  • Hearty leafy greens: Use your favorite hearty leafy green, such as kale, collard greens, swiss chard, baby spinach, or mustard greens. However, remember that swiss chard and spinach will wilt and soften much faster than kale or collard greens. 
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh herbs, such as mint, parsley, or cilantro, add the perfect finishing touch and hint of flavor to this recipe. 
  • Garnishes and accompaniments: Finish off your stew with a dollop of greek yogurt (or sour cream), a good drizzle of olive oil, a squeeze of lime juice, and a handful of fresh mint. You can also finish it off with extra chili flakes for a spicy chickpea soup. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

Optional Add-Ins

Don’t be afraid to make this Alison Roman The Stew recipe your own by tossing in additional ingredients to amp up the flavor profile, make it more hearty, or add extra nutrients. Here are some suggestions: 

  • More vegetables: In my opinion, you can’t add too many veggies to a stew! To boost your turmeric chickpea stew with extra nutrition, stir in ½ cup of chopped carrots, celery, sweet potato, and baby bok choy. Roman recommends cooking the carrots, celery, and sweet potatoes along with the aromatics, but you’ll want to add in the bok choy during the last five minutes of cooking. 
  • Add a carb: While this stew is pretty filling on its own, you can make it especially hearty by adding a carb. I personally like to toss in some ramen noodles about three minutes or so before serving. You can also add some quinoa about 10 minutes before serving to give the stew extra body and heartiness. 
  • Make it richer: If you are a fan of turmeric and are like me, have a batch of homemade golden paste in your fridge at all times, use a tablespoon of it instead of using ground turmeric spice.

How to Make Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew?

With just a few minutes of prep time and a little over a half hour of cook time, this creamy, flavorful, and spicy chickpea stew with garlicky coconut milk is ready to enjoy. Plus, it all comes together in one pot! Here’s how to make it: 

A collage of images showing how to sauté onions and crush spiced chickpeas with a wooden spoon.
  1. Cook the onion: Heat the oil over medium heat in a large pot or dutch oven. Add the onion and cook for 5-6 minutes, or until the onion is translucent, making sure to stir occasionally.
  2. Add additional aromatics and spices: Add the ginger, minced garlic cloves, ground turmeric, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes to the pot and cook for 2 minutes, stirring often. 
  3. Fry the garbanzo beans: Pour in the cans of chickpeas (drained and rinsed) and let the chickpeas sizzle and break down, stirring frequently, for 8-10 minutes.
  4. Crush the garbanzo beans: Remove a cup of chickpeas to use for garnish. Using the back of a wooden spoon or a spatula, gently crush the remaining chickpeas against the side of the pot to help them release their starchy insides. Doing so will help make the stew a bit thicker, so do not skip this step.
Images showing how to simmer the spiced chickpea stew with coconut and turmeric.
  1. Add the liquids: Pour in the cans of coconut milk and vegetable broth and season with a pinch of salt and pepper. Stir, making sure to scrape the pot to remove any bits that are stuck to the bottom. 
  2. Simmer: Place the lid on the pot, bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low. Let simmer for 25-30 minutes.
  3. Add the greens: Use your hands to chop the kale or leafy greens of your choosing into bite-size pieces and add them to the pot. Cook for an additional 5 minutes or until the greens are soft. Taste and adjust seasoning if needed. 
  4. Serve: Ladle into bowls and garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans and other toppings of your choosing. Serve with bread on the side, if preferred. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, & Freeze?

This coconut chickpea stew is quick enough to whip up for an easy weeknight meal, but it’s also make-ahead friendly and stores well as part of your weekly meal prep. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the leftover kale and chickpea stew to room temperature before ladling it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below. 
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

What Goes with Alison Roman Chickpea Stew?

Because of its Indian and Caribbean influences, this chickpea stew with coconut milk pairs beautifully with Middle Eastern and Mediterranean-style flatbreads. To round out your meal, you can also pair your stew with a simple green salad or a healthy grain. If you’re wondering what to serve with this chickpea stew recipe, here are a few additional ideas:

  • Serve it with bread: Bread is a no-brainer side to pair with a stew, and we especially love to dip our bread in that delicious leftover broth! I recommend pairing your coconut turmeric soup with a flatbread like Naan, Pita, or Lavash for a Middle Eastern flair. Also, my artisan-style, crusty, No-Knead Bread never met a stew it didn’t like. 
  • Pair it with a green salad: To get in your daily dose of greens, whip up an easy, nutrient-dense salad to enjoy as a side dish with your warm bowl of curry chickpea stew. My favorites are this Kale Quinoa Salad, this simple Spring Mix Salad, and my colorful Harvest Salad. Serve it with a glass of crisp white wine on the side and call it a dinner!
  • Add some cooked grains: If you prefer a hearty, filling stew, I recommend adding some cooked grains to offer texture, substance, fiber, and carbs. My favorites are quinoa and bulgur, and I even have how-to guides on the blog for Cooked Quinoa and Cooked Bulgur. For additional flavor, try serving it with my yummy Bulgur Pilaf
Chickpea stew garnished with fresh mint leaves and yogurt in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Expert Tips

Since this stew recipe is adapted from the original version created by Alison Roman, I learned a few tips and tricks from her while researching the recipe. I’ve included these tips below to help you achieve expert-level results on your first try:

  • Season as you go: Roman adds salt various times throughout the original recipe, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference, so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This coconut ginger chickpea soup begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer a coconut chickpea soup, or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you! 
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it will help thicken the stew.

FAQs

Can you freeze Alison Roman’s chickpea stew?

Yes, you can. After making your garbanzo bean stew, let it cool to room temperature. Ladle it into a freezer-safe airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months.

Is chickpea a carb or protein?

While garbanzo beans are considered a plant-based protein, they are also a good source of fiber, vitamins, and minerals. A 1-cup serving of garbanzo beans contains about 269 calories, of which about 67% are from carbohydrates. The remaining calories come from its protein and fat content.

Other Curry Recipes You Might Also Like

There’s nothing like an aromatic, warming, perfectly spiced bowl of curry to enjoy on a cool day (or even a warm one!), especially if you are a fan of the anti-inflammatory benefits of turmeric spice. If you love Middle Eastern, Indian, and Asian-inspired dishes with bold flavors like this curried chickpea stew, you’ll love these recipes below:

If you try Alison Roman’s Chickpea Stew Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Alison Roman The Stew recipe in a bowl garnished with a dollop of yogurt.
Print

Alison Roman The Stew Recipe

Here is the viral recipe for Alison Roman’s “The Stew” that had gained popularity in the last few years. Essentially a vegan stew that is made with spiced chickpeas, coconut milk, ginger, garlic and turmeric, this easy recipe comes together in a pot and perfect for a Tuesday night.
Course Soup, Stew
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 553kcal

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 1 large yellow onion chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger finely chopped – from a 2-inch piece ginger
  • 4 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 ½ teaspoons ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon crushed red pepper or chili flakes optional
  • 2 cans chickpeas (15-ounces each) drained and rinsed
  • 2 cans full-fat coconut milk (15-ounces each)
  • 2 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 cups kale leaves torn into bite-sized pieces – other greens like Swiss chard and collard greens would also work
  • 1 cup fresh mint leaves or cilantro

For serving (optional):

  • Plain Yogurt
  • Toasted Pita or lavash bread

Instructions

  • Heat oil in a large Dutch oven over medium-high heat. Add the onion and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened 5-6 minutes.
  • Add the ginger, garlic, ground turmeric, and crushed red pepper and cook for 2 more minutes, stirring frequently.
  • Add the garbanzo beans and fry them in oil and spices while stirring frequently until they start to break down for about 8-10 minutes.
  • Using a spatula or a wooden spoon, crush the garbanzo beans slightly to release some of their starches (which will help thicken the stew.) Remove a cup of stewed chickpeas for garnish.
  • Add the coconut milk, vegetable stock, and salt and pepper. Scrape down the bits at the bottom of the pot and give it a good stir.
  • Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn down the heat to medium-low, and let it simmer for 25-30 minutes or until it thickens to your liking.
  • Add kale leaves and cook for 5 more minutes or until kale leaves are nice and soft.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Ladle into bowls. Garnish with the reserved garbanzo beans, red pepper flakes, and a drizzle of olive oil.
  • Serve it with yogurt and pita bread (or lavash) on the side.

Notes

  • Season as you go: In the original recipe, Roman adds salt after each step, which helps her ensure that each ingredient is properly seasoned. However, this is a bit too much salt for my preference (especially if you are using any other salt then Diamond kosher salt), so I cut down on the salt a bit for my version of her recipe. However, I suggest that you taste as you go and adjust the salt to your liking. 
  • Simmer to your preferred thickness: This stew begins with a soup-like consistency and must simmer for about a half hour to take on a thicker, stew-like consistency. You can simmer it for less time if you’d prefer more of a soup or a bit longer if you’re after that perfect stew thickness. It’s up to you!
  • Break those chickpeas! Do not skip the part where you break the garbanzo beans with the back of the spoon, as it helps with thickening the stew.
  • Make ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, follow the above instructions through step 6. You’ll want to add in your greens right before serving, as they tend to become wilted and soggy as the stew sits. 
  • Store: To store, bring the stew to room temperature before placing it into an airtight container (you can also portion it out into several containers). It will keep in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the stew to room temperature and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen stew overnight in the fridge. Reheat per the instructions below.
  • Reheat: You can reheat your leftover stew on the stovetop or, in a pinch, microwave it in 30 seconds intervals until warmed through, making sure to give it a stir after each interval. 

Nutrition

Calories: 553kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 44g | Saturated Fat: 30g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 756mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2790IU | Vitamin C: 30mg | Calcium: 161mg | Iron: 5mg

The post Alison Roman’s “The Stew” Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/alison-roman-the-stew/feed/ 2
Baked Eggplant Parmesan https://foolproofliving.com/baked-eggplant-parmesan/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-eggplant-parmesan/#respond Thu, 16 Mar 2023 18:33:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65406 One bite of this traditional eggplant parmesan recipe, and you’ll be an eggplant lover for life. Whether your mouth waters at the thought of Baked Eggplant Slices or you’re looking for a sophisticated recipe to impress the whole family, there are dozens of classic eggplant recipes to try. From cheesy Eggplant Baked Ziti to photo-ready Eggplant Involtini with Ricotta and robust Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, here at Foolproof Living, we have...

The post Baked Eggplant Parmesan appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
One bite of this traditional eggplant parmesan recipe, and you’ll be an eggplant lover for life. Whether your mouth waters at the thought of Baked Eggplant Slices or you’re looking for a sophisticated recipe to impress the whole family, there are dozens of classic eggplant recipes to try. From cheesy Eggplant Baked Ziti to photo-ready Eggplant Involtini with Ricotta and robust Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, here at Foolproof Living, we have an eggplant recipe for every occasion.

Want to make it even more healthy and quick? Try our Air Fryer Eggplant Parmesan recipe.

Baked eggplant parm topped with basil in a casserole dish from the top view.

Eggplant Parmesan Ingredients

To make this baked eggplant parmesan recipe, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Panko-Crusted Eggplant Slices

Ingredients for crispy slices of eggplant with breadcrumbs.
  • Globe eggplants: You can’t make crispy baked eggplant slices without eggplant! I recommend selecting two medium eggplants (about 1 pound each) for this recipe. Globe eggplants tend to be the most common in American grocery stores but if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, go for it! Still, no matter which eggplants you choose, aim for ones of equal size to ensure even cooking.
  • Eggs: Eggs are not only the binder but also the key to making the breading for eggplant parmesan as golden brown and crispy as possible.
  • Panko breadcrumbs: You can use panko, pre-seasoned breadcrumbs, or homemade breadcrumbs in this baked breaded eggplant parmesan. 
  • Gluten-free options: You may also opt for gluten-free breadcrumbs or gluten-free panko to accommodate dietary restrictions. Alternatively, you can use an equal amount of almond flour instead of panko breadcrumbs for gluten-free eggplant parmesan.
  • Grated parmesan cheese: If you’re a fan of rich, nutty flavor, then you’ll love preparing your roasted eggplant with parmesan cheese. You’ll need a little over a cup of shredded parmesan cheese to make this recipe.
  • Seasoning: To give your baked eggplant parm the savor of a classic Italian dish, I recommend using garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper.

Baked Eggplant Parmigiana

Ingredients for an eggplant, tomato sauce, and cheese dish shown from the top view.
  • Tomato sauce: Like my Panko Chicken Parmesan, I recommend topping this eggplant parm recipe with my go-to homemade basil tomato sauce or your favorite store-bought marinara sauce. My favorite—low-carb and keto-friendly— one is Rao’s Homemade Marinara Sauce.
  • Mozzarella: You can use shredded mozzarella or sliced fresh mozzarella to give this simple eggplant parmesan an irresistibly creamy texture.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh basil leaves and oregano are essential to give this classic bright, garden-fresh flavor. However, dried versions of these herbs would also work.
  • Red pepper flakes: I love adding a touch of heat to my eggplant dish with red pepper flakes. However, you can also make a kid-friendly eggplant recipe by omitting this spicy addition.

How to Prep Eggplant for Eggplant Parmesan

There’s no secret to preparing this oven-baked eggplant parmesan recipe. With minimal prep work and maximal flavor, this easy dinner will delight your tastebuds any day of the week. Here are a few frequently asked questions answered to help you along the way:

Should I Salt Eggplant Before Breading?

Because of advances in genetic engineering, if you are buying your eggplants from a grocery store, there’s no need to salt eggplant before breading it. Most modern-day varieties of eggplant are not as bitter as their ancestors. As a result, they don’t require salting to draw out excess liquid or unwanted flavors.

However, you may salt your eggplants if you purchase them from a farmer’s market or want to remove extra bitterness. We have a full tutorial on sweating eggplant, where you can find several methods to salt and sweat your eggplants.

How to Cut Eggplant for Eggplant Parmesan? Should I Peel my Eggplant?

The best way to cut eggplant for parmesan is in rounds or long, lengthwise slices. For more expert tips on slicing eggplant like a pro, check out my guide on how to cut an eggplant.

It’s up to you whether you skin your eggplants before using them in your breaded baked eggplant parmesan. Eggplant skin is edible (and delicious!), but some find older or larger eggplant skin too tough for their taste.

How to Make Eggplant Parmesan in the Oven

If you’ve followed your grandma’s eggplant parmesan for years, you’ll adore this hassle-free oven-roasted version. Rich and delicious, this easy eggplant parmesan recipe comes together in under an hour and a half from start to finish.

Make the Breaded Eggplant

The first step to preparing this easy recipe for eggplant parmesan is to prepare the breaded eggplant slices. Here are the quick steps:

A person lining a baking sheet with parchment and slicing an eggplant.
  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Then, line two baking sheets with parchment paper and set them aside.
  2. Cut the eggplant: Slice the eggplant into thick rounds (about ½-inch thick each). Set the eggplant slices aside.
  3. Prep the dredging station: Whisk the eggs in a shallow bowl. Mix the panko bread crumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper in another bowl.
A person showing how to make an oven baked eggplant parmesan recipe.
  1. Coat eggplant: Dip each slice of eggplant in the beaten eggs, letting the excess drip off, and then into the panko mixture. Coat each slice on all sides to give your eggplant flavor, gently pushing the pieces into the breadcrumb mixture when necessary.
  2. Layer the large sheet pan: Transfer the eggplant onto the prepared baking sheets in a single layer of eggplant slices. Lightly spray them with olive oil spray.
  3. Bake: Place the sheet pans in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes. Then, flip each piece of eggplant, rotate the baking sheets, and bake until lightly brown and tender (10-12 minutes). Alternatively, you can cook breaded eggplant in your air fryer following our Air Fryer Breaded Eggplant recipe.
  4. Cool: Remove the eggplant from the oven and set it aside to cool for 5-8 minutes. Leave the oven heated to 400 degrees F.

Layer the Eggplant Parmesan

Layering eggplant parmesan is the key to giving this vegetarian Italian classic its decadent flavor and gorgeous presentation. Throw it in the oven, and voila! Crispy eggplant parmesan baked to perfection. Here are the steps:

A person layering tomato sauce with eggplant and cheese in a casserole dish.
  1. Assemble the eggplant parm: Spread ½ cup of tomato sauce along the bottom of a large casserole dish (I used a 9-inch by 13-inch baking dish). Arrange the now-slightly cooled parmesan-baked eggplant slices on top of the sauce in an even layer. Spread the top of the eggplant with a cup of tomato sauce, half of the shredded mozzarella cheese, half of the parmesan cheese, and half of the fresh basil.
Crispy eggplant slices layered in a dish with tomato sauce and cheese.
  1. Repeat layering: Add another layer of eggplant slices, then top it with the remaining tomato sauce, mozzarella cheese, and parmesan cheese. 
  2. Bake: Place the eggplant parmesan in the oven and bake until the cheese melts and the top is golden brown (20-25 minutes).
  3. Serve: Let the oven-baked eggplant parmesan cool on a wire rack. Then, garnish the dish with fresh oregano and the remaining basil. When serving, you may also sprinkle the eggplant with parmesan cheese and a pinch of red pepper flakes, if preferred.
Easy baked eggplant parmesan in a casserole dish from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Reheat, and Freeze?

This is the best baked eggplant parmesan recipe for easy meal prep. Enjoy tasty eats whether you prepare this eggplant parmesan as a freezer meal or a same-day dinner.

  • Make ahead: There are two ways to prepare this eggplant parmesan beforehand. The first option is to bake the dish the day before you want to serve it, let it cool, and cover it with aluminum foil or stretch film. Then, store the eggplant parm casserole in the fridge until ready to reheat. Otherwise, you can assemble the recipe the day before, cover it, and remove it from the fridge one hour before baking.
  • Store: First, let your eggplant parm bake come to room temperature. Then, either cover the leftovers tightly with plastic wrap or transfer them to an airtight container (you can store them as a whole or in individual portions). Your eggplant parm can stay in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat this recipe for eggplant parmesan, preheat your oven to 350 degrees F and cook the dish for 10-15 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freeze: Freezing oven-fried eggplant parmesan is a trouble-free way to meal prep in advance. Simply assemble the casserole, but don’t bake it. Then, wrap the dish tightly with aluminum foil and freeze it for up to 2 months. Thaw the eggplant parmesan completely when ready to eat, then bake as usual.

What to Serve with this Oven-Roasted Eggplant Parm?

Countless mouthwatering sides go with this easy, healthy eggplant parmesan recipe. Fill your menu with these five-star pairings, from savory beef to hearty quinoa salad ideas.

  • Bread: There’s nothing better than dipping an oven-warm slice of bread in this easy eggplant parmigiana. My Olive Bread is a crusty, no-knead recipe with just five ingredients. Or, serve up Garlic Ciabatta Bread for a buttery Italian take on classic bread recipes.
  • Side dishes (for a vegetarian meal): Crisp and healthy, my Classic Caesar Salad and go-to Salad with Spring Mix make excellent pairs with eggplant parm casserole. Short on time? You can also whip up Oven-Roasted Asparagus or Air-Fried Green Beans in just 15 minutes. For a heartier vegetarian side, my Quinoa Tabouli will fill your table with herby, Mediterranean flavors. 
  • Meat dishes: No combination is as satisfying as this easy eggplant parmesan casserole recipe and a protein-packed main. Meat lovers will adore your classic eggplant parm alongside an elegant Pot Roast, savory Beef Tenderloin, or juicy Turkey Zucchini Meatballs.
A layered casserole with eggplant, cheese, and tomato sauce from the side view.

FAQs

Have more questions about this Italian eggplant parmesan recipe? Whether you’re wondering about veggie prep or even “What is eggplant parmigiana?” this guide has everything you need.

What is eggplant parmesan?

Eggplant alla parmigiana (Melanzane alla parmigiana, in Italian) is a traditional Italian dish made by layering fried eggplant, parmesan cheese, and tomato sauce. Though native to Italy, classic eggplant parmesan is famous in America due to versions created by famous chefs and websites like Martha Stewart, Mary Makes It Easy, AllRecipes, Simply Recipes, and Betty Crocker. Healthy and simple, these U.S. versions often bake eggplant slices instead of frying them.

What does eggplant parmesan taste like?

Homemade eggplant parmesan tastes very similar to chicken parmesan. Cheesy, tender, and tomato-rich, this recipe uses many of the same ingredients as chicken parm. Also, because baked eggplant has a very mild taste, it doesn’t interfere with the overall flavor of this basic recipe.

What temp. to bake eggplant parm?

I recommend baking your quick and easy eggplant parmesan at 400 degrees F for 20-25 minutes to give it a golden brown topping, gooey cheesiness, and warm insides.

How long to bake eggplant parm at 400 degrees F?

It takes 20-25 minutes to bake crispy eggplant parmesan. However, if you bake eggplant parm at 350 degrees F, your casserole will need 40-45 minutes in the oven. Or, set your timer to 30-35 minutes to bake eggplant parm at 375 degrees F.

Do you peel eggplant for eggplant parmesan?

It is up to you whether you choose to peel your veggies when preparing eggplant for eggplant parmesan. Eggplant skin is safe to eat, but some people prefer to remove it to avoid unwanted toughness.

How do you make eggplant parm not soggy?

Some think not salting eggplant during prep will make their oven-fried eggplant parmesan soggy. However, farmers have engineered most modern-day eggplant varieties to eliminate this liquid, so salting them isn’t necessary. If you’re using old-fashioned eggplants (like those from a farmer’s market), you may salt your eggplant and let it sit in a colander to eliminate any excess moisture.

Do you cover eggplant parmesan when you bake it?

I don’t cover my eggplant parm in the oven. This direct exposure results in a rich, golden-brown topping and a hint of crispiness even though you’re baking the eggplant instead of frying it.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

Packed with antioxidants, fiber, and potassium, eggplants are one of my favorite healthy ingredients. Now you can satisfy your cravings guilt-free with these crowd-pleasing recipes.

If you try this recipe for Baked Eggplant Parmesan, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Simple Eggplant Parmesan in a casserole dish shown from the top view.
Print

Baked Eggplant Parmesan Recipe

This Baked Eggplant Parmesan is a classic Italian dish layered with crispy baked eggplant slices, rich and tangy tomato basil sauce, and lots of mozzarella and parmesan cheese. Serve it as a crowd-pleasing dinner party recipe or for a family-friendly weeknight meal, or make it in advance as part of your weekly meal prep.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 6
Calories 467kcal

Ingredients

For the Baked Eggplant:

  • 2 medium-sized globe eggplant rinsed and dried ~1 pound each*
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 ½ cups panko breadcrumbs
  • ¾ cup shredded parmesan cheese
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Eggplant Parmesan:

  • 2 cups Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce or store-bought marinara sauce
  • 1 lb mozzarella cheese shredded – approximately 4 cups
  • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more for serving
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano roughly chopped – optional
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Prep your equipment: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper. Set them aside.
  • Cut the eggplant: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick slices. Set them aside.
  • Set up your dredging station: Place two shallow dishes side by side. Crack and whisk eggs in the first one. Mix panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper in the second one.
  • Prep the eggplant: Dip each eggplant slice in eggs (letting the excess drip off) and then into the panko mixture, making sure that it is coated on all sides. You may have to gently push it down to ensure that the slices are fully coated.
  • Transfer to the baking sheet: Transfer onto the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. Repeat with remaining eggplant slices. Lightly spray them with cooking spray.
  • Bake: Bake for 15 minutes; flip each eggplant round and rotate baking sheets, and bake for another 10-12 minutes or until lightly browned on top and soft to the touch.
  • Cool: Set it aside to cool for 5-8 minutes. Do not turn the oven off.
  • Assemble the eggplant parmesan: In a large casserole dish (I used a 9×13 inch baking dish), spread ½ cup tomato sauce at the bottom. Arrange baked crispy eggplant slices on top in an even layer. Spread it with 1 cup of tomato sauce, half of the shredded mozzarella cheese, half of the parmesan cheese, and half of the fresh basil.
  • Add additional layers: Add another layer of baked eggplant and spread it with the remaining tomato sauce, mozzarella cheese, and parmesan cheese.
  • Bake: Bake for 20-25 minutes or until the cheese has fully melted and the top has turned lightly golden brown.
  • Cool, garnish, and serve: Let it cool on a wire rack. Garnish it with fresh oregano and the remaining basil. If desired, sprinkle with a pinch of red pepper flakes and more parmesan cheese when serving.

Video

Notes

  • Sweating eggplants: If I am buying eggplants from a local grocery store I do not sweat/salt eggplants. The globe eggplants that are widely available in the US markets have their bitterness bred out thanks to modern farming techniques. With that being said, it does not hurt to salt them. I wrote a whole article on when and how to salt eggplants if you want to learn more. If you end up salting your eggplant slices, be sure to dry each slice with a few sheets of paper towels before breading.
  • Amount of egg and panko mixture used: Depending on the size of your eggplants, you may have to use a bit more (or less) egg and panko mixture for coating the eggplant slices. 
  • Taste for seasoning before serving: We intentionally left out salt from the recipe as we use parmesan cheese and tomato sauce that is already salted. However, it is best to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning according to your taste buds.
  • Make ahead: To make ahead, you have two options. The first one is to bake the dish the day before you want to serve it, let it cool, and cover it with aluminum foil. Then, store it in the fridge until ready to reheat. Alternatively, you can assemble the recipe the day before, cover it, and remove it from the fridge one hour before baking.
  • Store: First, let your leftovers come to room temperature. Then, either cover the leftovers tightly with plastic wrap or transfer them to an airtight container (you can store them as a whole or in individual portions). Your eggplant parmesan can stay in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, preheat your oven to 350 degrees F and cook the dish for 10-15 minutes or until heated through.
  • Freeze: To freeze, assemble the casserole, but don’t bake it. Wrap the dish tightly with aluminum foil and freeze it for up to 2 months. Thaw the eggplant parmesan completely when ready to eat, then bake as usual.

Nutrition

Calories: 467kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 132mg | Sodium: 1129mg | Potassium: 647mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1120IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 642mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Baked Eggplant Parmesan appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-eggplant-parmesan/feed/ 0
Shiitake Mushroom Soup https://foolproofliving.com/shiitake-mushroom-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/shiitake-mushroom-soup/#comments Fri, 10 Mar 2023 22:50:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=65367 If you are a fan of quick vegetable-packed soups like this cream of shiitake mushroom soup, you have come to the right place. Try this light and creamy Sweet Potato Carrot Soup to get your daily value of vitamins and nutrients in a low-fat, gluten-free, vegan way. Or, check out this Carrot and Ginger Soup for a cup of heartwarming goodness with a nice spicy kick. And finally, give this...

The post Shiitake Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
If you are a fan of quick vegetable-packed soups like this cream of shiitake mushroom soup, you have come to the right place. Try this light and creamy Sweet Potato Carrot Soup to get your daily value of vitamins and nutrients in a low-fat, gluten-free, vegan way. Or, check out this Carrot and Ginger Soup for a cup of heartwarming goodness with a nice spicy kick. And finally, give this Chestnut Cream Soup a try for winter comfort food at its finest.

A creamy soup made with mushrooms in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

As the name suggests, the main ingredient of this soup is fresh mushrooms but other than that all you need is a handful of basic pantry ingredients:

Ingredients for a fresh shiitake mushroom soup in bowls from the top view.
  • Fresh shiitake mushrooms
  • Butter: I used unsalted butter, but salted butter would also work.
  • Chopped onion
  • Garlic cloves
  • Cooking liquid: Water and vegetable broth or veggie scrap stock
  • Spices and seasonings: Salt, pepper, nutmeg
  • Heavy cream or half and half – optional
  • Freshly squeezed lemon Juice
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme or parsley

Substitutions and Optional Add-ins

If you don’t have all the exact ingredients on hand or if a few of them aren’t compatible with your dietary restrictions, rest assured that you can still enjoy these delicious shiitake mushrooms in soup with a few simple swaps. Feel free to get creative with the toppings, too! There are many fun variations on this dish to serve every palette. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Type of oil: This recipe calls for you to saute the onion in butter. You can also use olive oil. Using a plant-based oil will also help if you want your shiitake mushroom soup to be vegan. 
  • Mushrooms: Fresh shiitake mushrooms are used in this recipe for their bold flavor, but you can use many varieties of mushrooms for this recipe.
    • Baby Bella, Cremini mushrooms, and white mushrooms would all be delicious. You can even make a portobello mushroom soup with this recipe. 
    • Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms would also be a delicious base for this soup! The slightly softened and caramelized shiitakes would work perfectly, delivering an even more flavorful shiitake mushroom broth which then yields a more flavorful soup.
  • Liquid: This recipe calls for vegetable broth, but you could also use a Homemade Chicken Stock or store-bought chicken broth. 
  • Cream: This light and fresh mushroom shiitake soup call for half and half, and it uses a small amount as a drizzle at the end just for flavoring. It is totally optional, and the soup would still be delicious (and creamy without the use of the cream.) However, if you prefer more of a traditional cream of mushroom soup, here are a few other options:
    • If you are looking for an even richer texture, you can use heavy cream. Feel free to double the amount for an extra creamy mushroom soup.
    • If you want to make a vegan cream of mushroom soup, substitute half and half for coconut milk or coconut cream. The end result will have a slightly sweeter flavor in the soup but still, be delicious.
  • Dried shiitake mushrooms: This recipe is designed for fresh shiitake mushrooms, but if you want to use dried mushrooms in soup, there are two approaches I recommend. The first option is to soak the dried mushrooms for 8 hours or overnight. There are many methods for Cooking with Dried Shiitake Mushrooms. You can also grind dried mushrooms in a spice grinder, as I do in this delicious Vegan Chili recipe. ¼ ounces of dried, ground mushrooms will work for this recipe. If you go in that route, I would recommend that you use it in combination with fresh shiitake mushrooms for a hearty and creamy soup.
  • Asian style adaptations: Many shiitake mushroom soup recipes are rich in Asian flavors. My recipe is a great base for experimentation. If you want to explore different flavor profiles with your soup, here are some options.
    • You can add ½ teaspoon of fresh ginger with the sauteeing onions at the start of the recipe. 
    • Use sesame oil instead of olive oil.
    • A spoonful or two of miso paste and soy sauce stirred into the mushroom broth before you blend it would also deepen the umami flavor of the mushrooms and make a delicious shiitake mushroom miso soup. With that being said, if you are adding the miso or soy sauce, wait to add any additional salt until the end and then salt to your taste. 
    • Green onions (aka scallions) would make a lovely and delicious garnish. 
  • Tofu: If you want to add extra protein and vitamins to your soup, silken tofu is a good option. Tofu is low-fat and low-calorie, and it is also a good source of protein, vitamins and minerals. Silken tofu is very soft and can be easily pureed into soups. It will add an extra creamy texture and thickness to your soup. Your family will be asking, what is your delicious secret ingredient?
  • Garnishes: There are many ways to make your soup feel and look more decadent when you serve it. Reserve slices of fresh mushroom to add on top of your soup. Fresh thyme or parsley can add a pop of color and a taste of freshness as well. Croutons can add a nice crunch. You might even enjoy an extra drizzle of cream around the edges of your soup for richness and a visually impressive presentation. 

How to Make a Shiitake Mushroom Soup Recipe? 

Making this recipe for shiitake mushroom soup is easier than you think, and it comes together in less than 30 minutes. Here are the steps to making it:

A person showing how to wash mushrooms from the top view.
  1. Clean and prep your mushrooms: You can clean your mushrooms by wiping them off with a damp paper towel. You can also rinse them in a salad spinner and quickly dry them. If you are new to cleaning mushrooms, check out our guide on How to Clean Shiitake Mushrooms for a quick tutorial. Once clean, remove the stems and slice the mushrooms. 
A series of images showing how to sauté onions and mushrooms in a pot.
  1. Saute onions in butter: In a large pot, saute the onions and thyme in butter. It should take 6-7 minutes until the onions are translucent. 
  2. Add the mushrooms: Cook shiitake mushrooms until they soften, about 5 minutes. This is optional but if you want, you can reserve a few tablespoons of mushrooms for garnish later. Add the garlic and saute for another 30 seconds.
  3. Add the liquids and seasonings: Stir in the broth, water, salt, pepper, and nutmeg. 
  4. Bring the soup to a boil: Once boiling, cover the soup and turn it down to medium-low and allow it to simmer for 15 minutes, stirring once or twice.
A person using a blender to blend a soup from the top view.
  1. Puree the soup: Off the heat, carefully puree the soup using an immersion blender or food processor until it is smooth to your liking.
  2. Add the half and half: Return the soup to the stove and set it to medium heat. If you are using the half and half, stir that in and bring it to a quick boil. Finish the soup with a squeeze of lemon juice.
  3. Garnish and serve: Ladle the soup into bowls. Garnish with the reserved slices of mushroom, fresh thyme, parsley, or croutons. 

How to Store, Heat, Freeze, and Thaw Leftovers? 

On the off chance that you don’t finish all this delicious shiitake soup at once, here are some tips on how to store leftovers. 

  • Storage: After the soup comes to room temperature, store it in an airtight container for 4-5 days in the fridge. 
  • Heat it in the microwave: Place the leftover soup in a bowl and heat in the microwave in 30 second increments stirring in between intervals until warmed thoroughly.
  • Reheat on the stove: Pour the soup into a saucepan. Add in a few tablespoons of water if it is too thick. Warm, over medium heat, stirring often until hot.
  • Freezing: Soup can be frozen in an airtight container for up to 2 months. If you plan on freezing, I recommend that you skip adding the half and half. Rather, reserve the portion you plan to freeze and add the cream right before serving after it is thawed.
  • Thawing: The best way to thaw the soup is to leave it overnight in your fridge. Follow the reheating instructions to heat it up.

What to Serve It With?

I think we can all agree that the best side dish for a bowl of hot soup is a piece of delicious bread. You can use your favorite store-bought bread or visit a local bakery, or better yet make your own. I think we can all agree that nothing beats the smell of freshly baked bread. Below are a few of our favorite recipes that would pair beautifully with this mushroom soup:

  • No Knead Artisan Bread: This delicious crusty bread comes together with only four ingredients with only 15 minutes of hands-on time.
  • Homemade Brioche Buns: These brioche rolls are perfectly soft and buttery. Not to mention, they are perfect for dipping into soup.
  • Almond Flour Bread: This quick, gluten-free, almond flour bread is great if you are following a paleo and low carb diet.

FAQs

Can you make mushroom soup with shiitake mushrooms?

Yes, you can! Shiitake mushrooms are a wonderful choice for making soup and deliver a rich and creamy mushroom soup just like one that you would make with more popular button mushrooms and baby bella mushrooms.

Is shiitake mushroom soup good for you?

Yes, shiitake mushrooms are considered a healthy food with diverse health benefits. They are high in fiber, vitamin B, and minerals. In addition, they are delicious and help create flavorful, umami-rich dishes. With fresh shiitake mushrooms being the key ingredient, this soup is a great way to include them in your diet.

Where to buy shiitake mushrooms?

Nowadays, most grocery stores carry shiitake mushrooms in their refrigerator section in small containers wrapped with stretch film. You can also find them in your local Asian market as it is widely used in Asian cooking (mostly in stir fry dishes.)

Other Mushroom Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Shiitake Mushroom Soup recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A soup made from shiitake mushrooms in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Shiitake Mushroom Soup Recipe

This Shiitake Mushroom Soup is creamy, silky, and packed with rich umami flavor. Made in one pot and ready in 30 minutes, this delicious soup is the perfect weeknight meal! Serve it with your favorite crusty bread for a warming meal on cold winter nights or any time of the year.
Course Soup
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter or olive oil
  • 1 small onion chopped ~ ¾ cup
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme or handful parsley chopped plus more as garnish- optional
  • 1 lb. shiitake mushrooms cleaned and sliced*
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 ½ cups water
  • Pinch of nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup half and half optional
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice more to taste

Instructions

  • Saute the onions: Heat butter in a large pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Add onion and thyme and cook for 6-7 minutes until translucent.
  • Cook the mushrooms: Add in the mushrooms and cook, stirring frequently, for 5 minutes or until they release some of their juices and are softened. If preferred, reserve a few pieces of sliced mushrooms to use as garnish. Add garlic and cook for 30 more seconds.
  • Add the liquids and seasonings: Pour in the vegetable broth and water. Stir in the nutmeg, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the lid on, bring to a boil, turn the heat down to medium-low, and simmer for 15 minutes. Be sure to keep an eye on it and give it a stir halfway through the cooking process.
  • Puree: Off the heat, carefully puree the soup using an immersion blender until smooth. Alternatively, you can puree it in a food processor or blender. Just be very careful as the soup is very hot.
  • Add final ingredients: Return it to the stove and turn the heat to medium. If using, stir in half and half. Bring it to one last boil. Finish it off with lemon juice.
  • Serve: Ladle soup into bowls. Garnish with fresh thyme and croutons if you wish. Serve while still hot.

Notes

  • Cleaning shiitake mushrooms: If you are new to cleaning mushrooms, check out our guide on How to Clean Shiitake Mushrooms for a quick tutorial.
  • Storage: After the soup comes to room temperature, store it in an airtight container for 4-5 days in the fridge.
  • Reheat in the microwave: Place the leftover soup in a bowl and heat in the microwave in 30 second increments, stirring in between intervals until warmed thoroughly.
  • Reheat on the stove: Pour the soup into a saucepan. Add in a few tablespoons of water if it is too thick. Warm, over medium heat, stirring often until hot.
  • Freeze: Soup can be frozen in an airtight container for up to 2 months. If you plan on freezing, I recommend that you skip adding the half and half. Rather, reserve the portion you plan to freeze and add the cream right before serving after it is thawed.
  • Thaw: The best way to thaw the soup is to leave it overnight in your fridge. Follow the reheating instructions to heat it up.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 796mg | Potassium: 442mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 645IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 52mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Shiitake Mushroom Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/shiitake-mushroom-soup/feed/ 2
Brioche French Toast Casserole https://foolproofliving.com/brioche-french-toast-with-berries-and-caramel-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/brioche-french-toast-with-berries-and-caramel-sauce/#comments Fri, 24 Feb 2023 19:04:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=4263 The buttery richness of brioche makes it perfect for sweet and savory recipes alike. If you’re a fan of indulgent breakfast recipes like this french toast casserole with brioche, then you’ll love my Brioche Waffles. Or, try my Brioche Hamburger Buns for a savory option that’s ideal for burgers, sliders, sandwiches, or dinner rolls!  Ingredients Besides a loaf of brioche bread, which is the star of the show in this...

The post Brioche French Toast Casserole appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The buttery richness of brioche makes it perfect for sweet and savory recipes alike. If you’re a fan of indulgent breakfast recipes like this french toast casserole with brioche, then you’ll love my Brioche Waffles. Or, try my Brioche Hamburger Buns for a savory option that’s ideal for burgers, sliders, sandwiches, or dinner rolls! 

A brioche breakfast casserole topped with berries in a dish from the top view.

Ingredients

Besides a loaf of brioche bread, which is the star of the show in this easy recipe, you’ll need a few basic ingredients that you likely already have on hand. Simply gather:

Ingredients for a casserole made with brioche bread shown from the top view.
  • Brioche loaf: You’ll need one loaf of day-old brioche bread, which you should be able to cut into about eight 1-inch slices. Day-old bread is ideal for this brioche breakfast casserole, as its dry texture evenly soaks up the milk mixture and prevents the casserole from getting soggy. I make my own brioche, but store-bought would also work for this recipe.
  • Unsalted butter
  • Whole milk
  • Heavy cream (or half and half)
  • Eggs
  • Vanilla extract 
  • Coconut sugar
  • Ground cinnamon
  • Ground nutmeg 
  • Kosher salt 
  • Sliced strawberries (optional)
  • Sliced almonds or other nuts (optional) 

Substitutions, Optional Toppings, & Add-Ins

If you don’t have all the ingredients on hand or if a few of them aren’t compatible with your dietary restrictions, rest assured that you can still enjoy this delicious french toast brioche bake with a few simple swaps. Feel free to get creative with the toppings, too! Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Type of bread: I love to use brioche for french toast because it offers a sweet, buttery richness and a fluffy texture. If you can’t find brioche at your local grocery store or don’t have the ingredients to make it, you can also make a french toast casserole with challah bread. Either buy it from the store or make your own Challah Bread for a great substitute that still provides that fluffy, rich flavor and texture. 
  • Plant-based milk: If you follow a dairy-free diet, I recommend swapping full-fat coconut milk for the whole milk in this french toast brioche casserole. The fat content in the coconut milk will help you achieve that rich, decadent texture, but keep in mind that it will slightly alter the flavor. You can also use almond milk, which will result in a thinner, less rich texture.
  • Heavy cream: If you don’t have heavy cream on hand or wish to cut down on the fat and calories, you can use an equal amount of half and half instead. For a dairy-free option, you can completely omit the cream and substitute an equal amount of dairy-free milk of your choice. Keep in mind that doing so will alter the texture and flavor of the recipe (not to say it won’t still taste delicious!). 
  • Sugar: I prefer to use coconut sugar in this recipe since it’s unrefined, but you can also use brown sugar for a similar flavor. For another refined-sugar-free option, try using maple syrup instead. If you do choose to substitute maple syrup, just use ½ cup less milk than the recipe calls for. 
  • Toppings: My favorite way to serve this easy french toast bake with brioche is to top it with fresh sliced strawberries or fresh berries, sliced almonds, and a dusting of powdered sugar. For an extra sweet and indulgent baked french toast casserole topping, whip up a cinnamon Streusel Topping to sprinkle on top of the casserole before baking it in the oven. 
  • Chocolate brioche french toast: If you’re one of my chocolate-loving friends, you know that you can never go wrong with adding chocolate to a sweet breakfast recipe. You can incorporate some chocolate chips into your french brioche toast or simply sprinkle some on top before baking. Use as much chocolate as your heart desires! 

How to Make French Toast Casserole with Brioche Bread?

This french toast casserole recipe with brioche bread only requires 10 minutes of hands-on time, which is as easy as whipping up a milk and egg mixture to pour over the bread. You’ll need a little bit of patience for the resting and cook time, but it’s worth it (trust me). Here’s how to make french toast with brioche bread: 

Four images showing how to prepare a casserole with cubed brioche bread.
  1. Slice the bread and prep your baking dish: Cut your brioche slices into 1-inch cubes. Grease a 9×13-inch baking pan with the melted butter. 
  2. Place the bread cubes in the pan: Spread the small pieces of bread in an even layer in the prepared baking dish and set aside. 
  3. Make the milk and egg mixture: Add the whole milk, heavy cream, eggs, vanilla extract, coconut sugar, cinnamon, nutmeg, and a pinch of salt to a large bowl. Whisk until fully combined. 
  4. Pour the mixture over the bread: Slowly pour the custard mixture over the brioche cubes until they are evenly covered. Gently press on the bread pieces to ensure they have soaked up the liquid. 
Images showing a casserole made with French toast and topped with berries.
  1. Cover and rest: Cover the dish with plastic wrap and let it rest in the refrigerator for at least 2 hours or overnight (for up to 8 hours). 
  2. Preheat the oven: Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F (176 degrees C). 
  3. Add the toppings: Remove the plastic wrap and top the casserole with sliced strawberries and almonds, if desired. 
  4. Bake: Bake the brioche bread breakfast casserole for 45-50 minutes or until it appears lightly golden brown. 
  5. Let cool and serve: Let your baked brioche french toast casserole cool for about 10-15 minutes. Serve. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Reheat Leftovers?

Since this brioche breakfast casserole requires some resting time, you can make it ahead. All you’ll have to do is pop it in the oven to reheat it before you’re ready to serve! You can also easily store leftovers to reheat and enjoy throughout the week. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead brioche french toast casserole: You can certainly prep it right before going to bed and then pop it in the oven the next morning. However, you can make it a few days (no more than 2 days) ahead as well. It goes without saying that, like any other baked bread recipe, this easy breakfast casserole with brioche is best on the day it’s made. To make ahead, follow the recipe instructions through step 5. Once it has rested for at least 2 hours, remove the plastic wrap, add your toppings of choice, and bake it for only 30-35 minutes (instead of the full 45-50). Let it cool to room temperature, cover it with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and place it in the fridge. The next day, bake it for another 15-20 minutes, let it cool slightly, and serve. 
  • Store: Let your leftover brioche egg casserole cool to room temperature, tightly cover it or place it in an airtight container, and store it in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can also separate your leftovers into smaller, individual airtight containers so you can reheat individual servings. 
  • Reheat: Reheat your leftover casserole in a 350-degree F oven for 15 minutes or until heated through. 

How to Serve?

Just like regular french toast, this easy brioche french toast casserole is delicious when served with a variety of sweet toppings. From a simple dusting of powdered sugar to a heaping pile of whipped cream and fresh fruit, you can make it as decadent as you’d like! It’s the perfect dish to serve for special occasions, weekend mornings, or just because. Here are my serving recommendations: 

  • Add a scoop of ice cream: Who doesn’t like dessert for breakfast? For a truly indulgent treat, top your brioche french toast bake recipe with some homemade Vanilla Ice Cream
  • Dust on some powdered sugar: If you like to keep things simple and subtly sweet, you can add a dusting of powdered sugar on top. You can also top your brioche french toast casserole with fruit, such as fresh blueberries or strawberries, and sliced almonds.
  • Serve it with a mound of whipped cream: To amp up the creaminess of this brioche toast recipe, top it off with a heaping mound of Whipped Maple Cream. The maple flavor pairs beautifully with the rich brioche french toast recipe.
A breakfast casserole with brioche topped with berries and almonds.

Expert Tips

The key to perfect oven-baked brioche french toast is achieving a moist, rich texture on the inside and a slightly crisp, golden brown exterior. With some trial and error, I’ve learned a few simple tips and tricks that I’d like to share with you to help you achieve expert results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know: 

  • Use day-old bread: Stale bread might not sound too appetizing, but it’s actually crucial to use day-old bread to keep your baked french toast brioche from getting soggy. The idea is that the dry bread will evenly soak up all the liquid while still holding its shape. If you only have fresh bread available, you can dry it out in a low-heat oven for a few minutes. I recommend 300 degrees F for about 15 minutes. 
  • Make sure the cubes aren’t too thin: Make sure to cut your bread slices into cubes no thinner than about an inch. Keeping your cubes on the thicker side will ensure they come out moist and rich instead of soggy. 
  • Alternative method: For a classic french toast option, you can cut your brioche slices in half diagonally to form two triangles per slice. Dip each triangular slice into the milk mixture (making sure to soak both sides), line them up at the bottom of the pan, pour the remaining liquid on top, and bake as instructed above. Let it cool a bit before serving. 

FAQs

Why is my french toast casserole soggy?

Your french toast recipe with brioche bread is likely to be soggy if it’s underbaked, so make sure to give it more baking time if it doesn’t appear lightly golden brown on top. Your casserole could also be soggy if you’re using too much liquid. The amount of liquid in this egg casserole with brioche bread works for a full loaf of brioche, so you may need to use less milk if your loaf is small or if you’re not using a full loaf.

Is brioche or challah better for french toast?

I personally think that brioche bread makes the best brioche french toast casserole because it’s rich and decadent, but challah bread also provides a similar richness that makes for a delicious challah french toast casserole. Feel free to use whichever you prefer!

What is the difference between brioche french toast and regular french toast?

Brioche is made with eggs and butter and is richer than regular bread, so french toast casserole using brioche bread is typically more decadent and indulgent than french toast with regular bread.

Other Brioche-Based Recipes You Can Make

I love brioche bread because not only is it delicious, but it’s also super versatile. From sweet to savory recipes, a simple loaf of brioche goes a long way. If you’re as much of a fan as I am, you’ll love these other brioche-based recipes: 

If you try this Overnight Brioche French Toast Casserole recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

French toast casserole made with brioche from the top view as soon as it comes out of the oven.
Print

Brioche French Toast Casserole Recipe

This Brioche French Toast Casserole is made with thick-sliced and cubed buttery brioche bread coated in a creamy milk and egg mixture and topped with fresh fruit and nuts. With just a few simple ingredients, it's the perfect breakfast or brunch dish to serve for special occasions, such as Mother's Day, Easter, or Christmas, or for a decadent weekend treat!
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Resting time 2 hours
Total Time 3 hours
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 538kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 loaf brioche 8 1-inch slices (day-old bread)
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter melted and cooled
  • 1 ½ cups whole milk
  • ½ cup heavy cream or half and half
  • 6 large eggs
  • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
  • ½ cup coconut sugar or brown sugar, plus more for sprinkling on top
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • Pinch kosher salt

Optional Toppings

  • 1 cup strawberries halved
  • ½ cup sliced almonds or any other nuts

Instructions

  • Slice brioche slices into small 1-inch cubes. Brush a 9X13 casserole dish with melted butter.
  • Spread the cubed brioche bread on a single layer. Set it aside.
  • In another large mixing bowl, whisk together whole milk, heavy cream, eggs, vanilla extract, coconut sugar, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and salt until fully combined.
  • Spread it over the bread. Gently press to ensure that brioche cubes are fully soaked with the liquid mixture.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least two hours or overnight (for up to 8 hours).
  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (176 C).
  • Remove the plastic wrap. If desired, top it off with halved strawberries and sprinkle it with almond slices.
  • Bake in the preheated oven for 45-50 minutes until the top layer is lightly golden brown.
  • Let it cool for 10-15 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Use day-old bread: Stale bread might not sound too appetizing, but it’s actually crucial to use day-old bread to keep this oven-baked french toast brioche from getting soggy. If you only have fresh bread available, you can place it on a sheet pan and dry it out in a low-heat oven for a few minutes. I recommend 300 degrees F for about 15 minutes. 
  • Store-bought brioche: Please be aware that some store-bought brioche is sweetened with more sugar than my homemade version. Therefore, if you are using a store-bought brioche loaf, I recommend giving it a taste and reducing the amount of sugar used. Depending on the sweetness level of the particular brand you are using, I recommend starting with half the amount of sugar.
  • Alternative method: For more of a classic french toast option, you can cut your brioche slices in half diagonally to form two triangles per slice. Dip each triangular slice into the milk mixture (making sure to soak both sides), line them up at the bottom of the pan, pour the remaining liquid on top, and bake as instructed in the recipe card.
  • Store: Let the leftovers cool to room temperature, tightly cover or place them in an airtight container, and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days. You can also separate your leftovers into smaller, individual airtight containers so you can reheat individual servings.
  • Reheat: Reheat your leftover casserole in a 350-degree F oven for 15 minutes or until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 538kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 318mg | Sodium: 385mg | Potassium: 278mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 1208IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 177mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Brioche French Toast Casserole appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/brioche-french-toast-with-berries-and-caramel-sauce/feed/ 21
Mexican Street Corn Soup https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-soup/#comments Wed, 15 Feb 2023 14:54:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64729 There are two classic versions of Mexican street corn. The first is called esquites. Think of it as a Mexican Street Corn Salad served in a bowl or cup. Elote is the second version, and it can be served both on the cob or off the cob. Having been a fan of this street food, I love coming up with different ways to enjoy it, like this Mexican Street Corn...

The post Mexican Street Corn Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There are two classic versions of Mexican street corn. The first is called esquites. Think of it as a Mexican Street Corn Salad served in a bowl or cup. Elote is the second version, and it can be served both on the cob or off the cob. Having been a fan of this street food, I love coming up with different ways to enjoy it, like this Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad or this Air Fryer Mexican Corn, which is great if you’re short on time. 

The perfect balance of sweet and savory, this Mexican sweet corn soup (aka Sopa de Elote) is the soup form of this authentic Mexican recipe. It’s also a lovely way to enjoy the summer flavors of corn to make the colder months more enjoyable.

A Mexican-inspired soup with corn in a bowl with a spoon from the top view.

Ingredients Mexican Street Corn Soup

The ingredients list for this elote soup recipe has two folds:

Ingredients for a soup made with corn and potatoes in bowls shown from the top view.
  • For The soup base, gather:
    • Corn Stock, Vegetable broth or homemade chicken stock
    • Canned corn
    • Yukon gold potatoes
    • Jalapenos
    • Garlic cloves
    • Onion
    • Butter or olive oil
    • Cilantro
    • Lime juice
    • You will need also need chili powder, cumin, kosher salt, and pepper for the spices.  
  • Optional toppings: You’re welcome to top your street corn soup with any of your favorite toppings. Some of my favorites are sour cream (or Mexican crema), cubed avocado, Mexican Red Pickled Onions, tortilla chips, fresh cilantro, crumbled cotija cheese, fresh lime juice, and optional lime zest.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

What’s great about this Mexican corn soup recipe is that there are accommodations for all different dietary restrictions. Everyone will love this comforting meal, whether you are following a vegetarian, vegan, gluten-free, or dairy-free diet.

  • Corn: No need to wait for corn season because all types of corn can work! Canned, frozen, or fresh corn kernels work perfectly. If you prefer to make this Mexican soup with corn on the cob, you will need 6-8 ears. First, cut the corn off the cob and then saute it with the onion and peppers first to give it flavor. You can also use leftover grilled corn, which would give the recipe a nice smoky flavor.
  • Peppers: Poblano peppers are a good choice if you want something that still has a kick but is less spicy than jalapenos. If you aren’t a fan of spice, you can also use a bell pepper or a can of green chiles.
  • Dairy-free: For those with an allergy or aversion to dairy, use olive oil instead of butter. 
  • Cooking liquid: This recipe can be made vegetarian or vegan by using vegetable stock instead of chicken. 
  • Protein: Feel free to add shredded chicken for protein. You can make this yourself, but if you’re short on time, a rotisserie chicken from the grocery store will work well and even add a nice roasted flavor! 
  • Cream cheese & heavy cream: For a more decadent, traditional Mexican corn soup, use 2 ounces of cream cheese or ½ to 1 cup of heavy whipping cream. If you go in that route, your soup will have the texture of a hearty chowder. For a dairy-free alternative, you can add a can of full-fat coconut milk that will yield a slightly sweet and creamy Mexican corn soup.

How to Make Mexican Corn Soup

Follow these simple steps to make this one-pot Mexican creamed corn soup with ease:

A person sautéing onion, garlic, and spices in a pot from the top view.
  1. Heat a large pot over medium-high heat: Start by heating the butter (or olive oil). Add chili powder and ground cumin and cook until fragrant for about 1 minute.
  2. Saute the vegetables: Add the onion and jalapeno, and stir frequently for 4-5 minutes until the vegetables are softened. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds until fragrant. 
  3. Add the rest: Add in the corn, cubed potatoes, vegetable broth, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  4. Cover it up: Put the lid on and bring it to a boil. Lower the heat to medium and simmer for 15 minutes or until the potatoes are fully cooked. Insert a knife into one of the cubes of potato to check doneness.
A person pureeing corn and potato soup shown from the top view.
  1. Puree the liquid: Off the heat and carefully remove about 3 cups of the soup into a large heat-proof bowl. Using an immersion blender, purée until it is smooth. This is a crucial step for getting that creamy texture. Pour the pureed soup back into the pot, turn the heat to medium, and bring it to a quick boil. 
A person adding toppings to an Elote corn chowder shown from the top view.
  1. Finish it up: Turn the heat off, stir in the chopped cilantro (optional), and add in lime zest and juice. Season to taste. 
  2. Serve it up: Ladle the Mexican corn soup into wide soup bowls. Top with your favorite toppings and serve with lime wedges on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

The good thing about this hearty soup is that it gets better as it sits. So, go ahead and make a batch! Enjoy some right away, or freeze some for later. Here is how I do it:

  • To store leftovers: Let soup cool to room temperature. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Freezing instructions: This soup is great for making ahead of time because it can last in the freezer for up to 2 months in an airtight container. You can even portion it out in single servings for quick meals. 
  • To reheat: Remove from the freezer and let it thaw overnight in the fridge. Heat on the stovetop until warm or in the microwave at one-minute intervals. Make sure to stir in between intervals to heat evenly. If it’s too thick, you can add a little water or broth to loosen it up.

What to Serve It With?

Soups are great when served as a main course but are just as good when served with other things. Here are some ideas you’ll be sure to love.

  • With cornbread: Soups are for dipping! This sweet, slightly spicy Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread is the ultimate pairing for your elote corn chowder. Make a batch and pop them in the oven while you have the soup cooking on the stove. My Savory Cornbread Muffins are another delicious dipping option. 
  • Appetizer or with the main course: Who doesn’t love soup as the first course of a meal? Continue with the Mexican theme and serve your Mexican corn soup with Flank Steak Tacos or Beef Brisket Tacos.

Expert Tips 

  • Mexican Sweet Corn Chowder vs. Corn Soup: Chowder is thicker and more creamy, whereas soup tends to have a lighter, more brothy texture. For this elote corn soup, I pureed a portion of the soup to make it creamer. Alternatively, if you are after more of a corn chowder consistency, you can puree more soup or add 1 cup of heavy cream and two ounces of cream cheese to the soup.
  • Use a blender or food processor: If you do not have an immersion blender, you can use a food processor or a regular blender to puree the soup. Though be very careful as it is hot.

FAQs

What is Mexican Street Corn?

Mexican Street Corn, also known as elote, is a popular street food. The authentic recipe spreads roasted or grilled corn on the cob with a mixture made of mayonnaise, sour cream, chili, cotija cheese, lime juice and zest, and fresh cilantro. It can also be served in a cup by mixing the shucked corn with the mayo-sour cream mixture.

What is Mexican Street Corn Soup made of?

This Mexican corn soup recipe is made of onions, jalapeno (or poblano) peppers, potatoes, corn kernels, vegetable broth (or chicken broth), chili powder, fresh lime juice, and fresh cilantro.

Is Mexican Street Corn chowder the same as summer corn chowder?

They are similar with slight differences. Mexican corn chowder has spices and toppings that give it that distinct Mexican flavor, whereas summer corn chowder uses fresh summer herbs and vegetables.

Similar Soup Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Mexican Street Corn Soup recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of soup topped with sour cream and avocado shown from the top view.
Print

Mexican Street Corn Soup Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Soup is a family-friendly comfort food recipe that's packed with sweet corn, veggies, and potatoes and topped with classic Mexican toppings like cilantro and cotija cheese. You can make this creamy corn soup in the summer to take advantage of peak season corn, or make it year-round with canned or frozen corn!
Course Soup
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 405kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter or olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder or ancho chili powder – plus more for sprinkling on the soup
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 medium size onion chopped–1 cup
  • 2 large jalapenos chopped– ½ cup or 1 poblano pepper
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 medium-sized Yukon gold potatoes peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes – ¾ lbs.
  • 2 cans corn* 15.5 oz each, drained and rinsed
  • 4 cups vegetable broth or chicken stock
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon lime zest optional
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice preferably freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped–optional

Optional Toppings:

  • 4 tablespoons sour cream
  • 1 cubed avocado ripe
  • 4 tablespoons Mexican Red Pickled Onions
  • ½ cup Tortilla chips
  • ½ cup cotija cheese
  • Lime wedges

Instructions

  • Cook the spices: Start by heating butter in a large pot (like a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat. Add chili powder and ground cumin and cook until fragrant for about 1 minute.
  • Saute the aromatics: Add onion and jalapeno and saute, frequently stirring, until vegetables are soft, about 4-5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 more seconds.
  • Add the potatoes, corn, and broth: Toss the cubed potatoes, corn, and vegetable broth into the pot and season with salt and black pepper.
  • Simmer: Cover and bring it to a boil. Turn the heat down to medium and simmer for 15 minutes or until the potatoes are fully cooked. Insert a knife into a potato to check doneness. You should be able to cut through them with ease.
  • Puree: Off the heat and carefully remove about 3 cups of the liquid base (both the liquid and veggies) into a large heat-proof bowl. Use an immersion blender to puree until smooth.
  • Bring back to a boil: Pour the liquid back into the pot. Turn the heat to medium and bring it to a quick boil.
  • Stir in additional ingredients: Turn off the heat and stir in cilantro (optional), lime zest, and fresh lime juice. Give it a taste and add more seasoning if necessary.
  • Serve: Ladle the Mexican corn soup into bowls. Finish it off with your favorite toppings and a sprinkle of chile powder. Serve with lime wedges on the side, and dig in!

Video

Notes

  • Corn: Canned, frozen, or fresh corn kernels work perfectly. If you prefer to make this Mexican soup with corn on the cob, you will need 6-8 fresh ears of corn. First, cut the corn off the cob and then saute it with the onion and peppers to give it flavor. 
  • Stock: If you are making this soup during the summer months when corn is in season, I highly recommend making a quick Corn Stock using the corn cobs and using it in the soup. This soup is truly a delight when made with corn stock.
  • Chowder vs. soup: The recipe, as written, has more of a soup consistency. However, if you are after a thicker, chowder-like soup, I recommend pureeing more soup, perhaps 4-5 cups instead of 3 cups. Alternatively, you can add a cup of heavy cream and 2 ounces of cream cheese right when you add the pureed soup. Just be sure to bring it to a boil so the cream cheese will melt and the soup will thicken.
  • To store leftovers: After it comes to room temperature, store the leftover soup in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Freezing instructions: This soup is great for making ahead of time because it can last in the freezer for up to 2 months in an airtight container. You can even portion it out in single servings for quick meals. 
  • To reheat: Remove from the freezer and let it thaw in the fridge overnight. Heat on the stovetop until warm or in the microwave at one-minute intervals. Be sure to stir in between intervals to heat evenly. If it’s too thick, add a splash of water or vegetable broth.

Nutrition

Calories: 405kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 46mg | Sodium: 1833mg | Potassium: 804mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1741IU | Vitamin C: 36mg | Calcium: 167mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Mexican Street Corn Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-soup/feed/ 2
Beet Salad with Goat Cheese https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Wed, 08 Feb 2023 16:24:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11948 Goat cheese is the perfect addition to this beets salad because it provides a mild, tangy flavor and a creamy, rich texture. Not only is this cheese a perfect complement to salad recipes, but it’s also a star ingredient in sweet and savory recipes alike. If you agree, you’ll love my other Goat Cheese Recipes.  The recipe inspiration doesn’t stop there! If you love to surprise your family and friends...

The post Beet Salad with Goat Cheese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Goat cheese is the perfect addition to this beets salad because it provides a mild, tangy flavor and a creamy, rich texture. Not only is this cheese a perfect complement to salad recipes, but it’s also a star ingredient in sweet and savory recipes alike. If you agree, you’ll love my other Goat Cheese Recipes

The recipe inspiration doesn’t stop there! If you love to surprise your family and friends with 5-star salads like this roasted beet salad with goat cheese, then you need to try my other fancy salad recipes. My favorites are this Goat Cheese Salad, the famous Kardashian Salad, and the Original Caesar Salad

A close-up of a salad with cheese, walnuts, and beets with a fork on the side.

Ingredients

The beet salad ingredients are all common pantry or fridge staples, so you likely already have many of them on hand. If not, you only need a quick trip to the grocery store!

To make things easy, we broke the ingredients into three sets: one for the beets, another for the dressing, and a final set for the salad itself. 

Ingredients for roasting beets in bowls from the top view.
  • For the oven-cooked beets, gather four medium-sized whole beets, olive oil, salt, and pepper. 
Ingredients for salad dressing for beetroot salad in bowls from the top view.
  • To make the dressing for beet goat cheese salad, you’ll need maple syrup, Dijon mustard, minced garlic, balsamic vinegar, extra virgin olive oil, kosher salt, and black pepper. 
Ingredients for a salad with beets, cheese, and nuts from the top view.
  • For the beet salad with goat cheese and walnuts, gather a shallot, baby arugula, spring mix, chopped walnuts, and crumbled goat’s cheese. 

Helpful Notes and Substitutions

The beauty of beet salad recipes is that they’re typically substitution-friendly, so don’t stress if you don’t have all the ingredients. You can also make swaps for the nuts, cheese, greens, and other ingredients to suit your preferences. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Beets: I chose classic red beets for this roasted beet and goat cheese salad with balsamic dressing, as I love their vibrant color and sweet flavor. However, you could also use golden beets or pink Chioggia beets instead. Pink Chioggia beets are especially fun because they have a beautiful pink and white pattern on the inside. 
  • Sweetener for the goat cheese and beet salad dressing: The recipe calls for maple syrup as the sweetener for the salad dressing, but you can also use honey for a similar flavor. Alternatively, if you’d like to omit a sweetener, you can add chopped apples or pears to your roasted beet goat cheese salad for some natural sweetness. 
  • Vinegar: I used balsamic vinegar because I like the tanginess and acidity it adds, but you can also use red wine vinegar instead. If you’re in a pinch and need a super simple salad dressing, try my Lemon Vinaigrette
  • Nuts: Plain, chopped walnuts give the goat cheese beet salad a crunchy texture and a nutty flavor, but you could take it a step further and make some yummy Honey Glazed Walnuts for extra sweetness. If walnuts aren’t your thing, you could also make a beet goat cheese pistachio salad or add some pecans instead. 
  • Salad greens: I love the combination of peppery arugula and spring mix, but feel free to use any earthy, leafy green. You could use only fresh arugula or spring mix instead of combining the two, or use baby spinach to make a spinach beet goat cheese salad. 
  • Onion: I prefer to use a shallot in my dressing for beet and goat cheese salad because it has a sweet, mild flavor, but you could also use a red onion for a more sharp flavor. 
  • Cheese: If you’re not a big fan of goat’s cheese, you can rest assured that other cheeses would pair nicely with this fresh beet salad recipe. I recommend using feta cheese, but any type of soft cheese would work. 

How to Make Beet Salad? 

With just a little bit of prep and some baking time, you can have this stunning, restaurant-quality beetroot salad with goat’s cheese and walnuts on the table and ready to enjoy. 

Just as we broke the ingredients into three sections, we’re also breaking the instructions into three sections:

How to Roast Beets for Salad

To prepare beets for salad, we roasted them in the oven to bring out their sweetness and make them easier to eat. However, there are various other ways you can roast your beets. If you’re in a rush, you can roast beets in the air fryer. You can also use your pressure cooker to make Instant Pot Beets or fire up the grill to make Grilled Beets (a grilled beet salad would be great for summer). 

Cooking beets for a salad couldn’t be easier. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.  
A person wrapping beets in foil to prepare for roasting in the oven.
  1. Prep the beets for baking: Cut a sheet of aluminum foil into four 8-10 inch squares. Place a beet in the center of the square, drizzle it with ½ tablespoon of olive oil, and sprinkle it with a few pinches of salt and pepper. 
  2. Cover with foil: Tightly wrap the foil around the beet and repeat with the remaining ones. 
  3. Bake: Place the foil-wrapped beets in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Bake for 25-30 minutes or until tender (a knife should slide in and out easily). 
A person preparing beets for salad by slicing them and placing in a bowl.
  1. Cool: Remove the beets from the oven, unwrap them, and let them cool for about 10 minutes on the counter. Carefully peel off the skins (use a vegetable peeler if needed) and slice them into wedges. 

Make the Dressing for Beet Salad

In my opinion, this is the best salad dressing for beets. It’s sweet, tangy, and garlicky! Here’s how to make it:

A person shaking salad dressing ingredients in a mason jar.
  1. Make the dressing: To a mason jar, add the maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Tightly secure the lid on the jar and shake to combine the ingredients. You can also combine the ingredients in a small bowl with a whisk. Taste and add another pinch of salt or pepper as needed. 

Assemble the Salad

Once you roast the beets and make the dressing, the roasted beets and goat cheese salad comes together in a flash. Simply:

A person tossing greens in dressing and adding beets and cheese to the salad.
  1. Assemble the salad: Add the greens and shallot to a large salad bowl. 
  2. Add the dressing: Drizzle the vinaigrette for beet salad over the greens and toss to combine. 
  3. Add the beets and nuts: Toss in the cooked beet wedges and chopped walnuts. 
  4. Garnish and serve: Top the sliced beet salad with the crumbled cheese and serve in a large bowl or on salad plates. 

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

Since roasting the beets is the most time-consuming part of the recipe, you can roast the beets and prepare some of the other components ahead of time. When you’re ready to serve, all you’ll have to do is assemble the salad! Here are some tips:

  • Make ahead: You can follow the instructions above to roast the beets and make the dressing ahead of time. For best results, I recommend storing the beets and the dressing in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to two days before serving. When you’re ready to serve, simply assemble the roasted beets salad with goat cheese. 
  • Store: Store your leftover salad in an airtight container or in a large bowl covered with plastic wrap. It will stay fresh in the fridge for a day or two. I don’t recommend storing it any longer than that, as the greens will wilt and become limp. 
A salad with cheese, nuts, and beets in a bowl from the top view.

What to Serve with Beet Salad

This fancy beet salad makes for a great light lunch or dinner, but it’s also the perfect side dish to accompany soups and main dishes. Below, I’ve put together a few of my favorite pairings to take the guesswork out of your meal planning. If you’re wondering what goes with beet salad, here’s what I recommend: 

  • Serve it with soup: Soup and salad is a classic pairing that’s always so light and satisfying. The flavor profile of this roasted beet salad recipe beautifully complements my Butternut Squash Soup and this Sweet Potato Soup
  • Make it a Thanksgiving beet salad: Why not add a new salad recipe to your Thanksgiving spread? A golden beet salad with goat cheese would perfectly capture those warm Thanksgiving colors (simply swap the red beets for golden beets). You can serve your salad alongside a classic Thanksgiving side dish like Garlic Rosemary Mashed Potatoes, Sweet Potato Souffle, or Butter Garlic Green Beans
  • Pair a restaurant-quality main course with your fine dining beet salad: Instead of serving this salad cold, make it a warm beet salad with goat cheese to pair with classic, restaurant-style comfort food. Make this Baked Ziti with Meat Sauce or my Pasta Bolognese Recipe if you’re in the mood for Italian, or serve your warm winter beet salad with a decadent Reverse Seared Beef Tenderloin. These options are all great for your next dinner party!

FAQs

What goes well with beets in a salad?

Beets are a wonderful addition to a salad because they add a pop of bright color and a hint of sweet flavor. Beets pair especially well with earthy greens and nuts, and you can even make a homemade salad dressing for beetroot by combining olive oil, balsamic vinegar, maple syrup, mustard, and garlic.

What cheese goes with beets?

Most soft cheeses pair nicely with beets. We used soft goat cheese for this easy beet salad recipe because we like the tangy flavor the cheese provides, but you can also use feta cheese, gorgonzola, or brie instead.

Other Must-Try Salad Recipes

If you’d like to incorporate more greens into your diet, salads are a great way to do so. They don’t have to be boring, either! Here on the blog, we always pack our salads with yummy toppings and drizzle them with delicious homemade dressings. If you’re in need of a new salad recipe, look no further than the links below: 

If you try this Roasted Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and Walnuts or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Beet Salad with Goat Cheese and walnuts with utensils on the side.
Print

Beet Salad with Goat Cheese Recipe

This Beet Salad with Goat Cheese is a restaurant-quality dish that's perfect for any occasion. With roasted beets, crunchy walnuts, tangy goat cheese, and a homemade dressing, this salad is a sure crowd-pleaser. Serve it warm or cold with soup, sides, or your favorite entree.
Course Salad
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 414kcal

Ingredients

For The Beets

  • 4 medium size beets
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • Salt & pepper

For The Dressing

  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup
  • 1 tablespoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad

  • 1 small shallot chopped
  • 6 cups arugula and spring mix 80 gr – arugula + 100 gr spring mix
  • ½ cup walnuts chopped
  • 4 oz. goat cheese crumbled

Instructions

To roast beets for salad:

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Cut four 8-10-inch square aluminum foils. Place a beet in the middle, drizzle with ½ tablespoon olive oil, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  • Cover it tightly with aluminum foil. Repeat the same process with the rest of the beets.
  • Place covered beets on the prepared baking sheet and bake for 25-30 minutes or until they are easily pierced with the tip of a knife.
  • Unwrap the beets and let them cool for 10 minutes on the kitchen counter. Gently remove the skins and cut them into wedges.

To make the dressing:

  • Place maple syrup, Dijon mustard, garlic, balsamic vinegar, olive oil, salt, and pepper in a mason jar. Put the lid on and give it a vigorous shake to combine.

To assemble the salad:

  • Place the salad greens and the chopped shallot into a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and gently toss to ensure all salad greens are evenly coated with the vinaigrette.
  • Add in cooked beets and walnuts and toss to combine.
  • Garnish with crumbled goat cheese and serve.

Notes

  • Make ahead: You can follow the instructions above to roast the beets and make the dressing ahead of time. For best results, I recommend storing the beets and the dressing in separate airtight containers in the fridge for up to two days before serving. When you’re ready to serve, simply assemble the salad.
  • Store: Store your leftover salad in an airtight container or in a large bowl covered with plastic wrap. It will stay fresh in the fridge for a day or two. I don’t recommend storing it any longer than that, as the greens will wilt and become limp.
  • Air Fryer BeetsIf you have an air fryer, you can cook the beets in the air fryer in about 15 minutes.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 414kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 322mg | Potassium: 734mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 752IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Beet Salad with Goat Cheese appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-beet-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 42
Quick Brioche Waffles https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/ https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/#comments Sat, 04 Feb 2023 15:41:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10362 Who doesn’t love to start a slow weekend morning with a warm, sweet, and decadent breakfast? If you’re looking for more indulge-worthy breakfast recipes, try my Overnight Belgian Waffles and this Gluten Free Waffle Recipe with Almond Flour. If you have some extra brioche on hand, use it to make this delicious Brioche French Toast Casserole.  Ingredients We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this recipe, making it...

The post Quick Brioche Waffles appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Who doesn’t love to start a slow weekend morning with a warm, sweet, and decadent breakfast? If you’re looking for more indulge-worthy breakfast recipes, try my Overnight Belgian Waffles and this Gluten Free Waffle Recipe with Almond Flour. If you have some extra brioche on hand, use it to make this delicious Brioche French Toast Casserole

Brioche waffles layered with fruit from the front view.

Ingredients

We’re keeping the ingredient list short and simple for this recipe, making it easy to whip up these quick brioche waffles whenever the mood strikes. Top them off with fresh fruit and maple syrup for the perfect Sunday morning breakfast. Here’s what you’ll need:

  • For this brioche waffle recipe, gather a loaf of brioche bread, whole milk, eggs, salt, vanilla extract, and maple syrup (optional). 
  • As optional toppings, use maple syrup, chopped seasonal fruit, and optional confectioner’s sugar. 

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

If you don’t have all the ingredients on hand, you may not have to take a trip to the store. You can easily substitute for the bread and a few other ingredients, so feel free to be resourceful and make it your own. Here are my recommendations: 

  • Bread: The soft, fluffy texture and lightness of French brioche makes for a mouth-watering recipe, but don’t stress if your local store doesn’t carry it or if you don’t have the ingredients to make it at home. A great substitute is Challah bread, which is similar in texture and flavor. If you’d like to make Challah from scratch, try this Challah Bread Recipe
  • Milk: While I love the richness that whole milk gives this recipe, you can also use skim milk for an option that is lower in fat and calories. 
  • Sweetener: I personally find it sufficient to drizzle maple syrup over my waffles to give them some sweetness, but you can also add additional sweetener to your milk and egg mixture. I recommend adding a bit of coconut sugar, maple syrup, regular sugar, or brown sugar into the milk mixture as you’re whisking in the rest of the ingredients. 

How to Make Brioche Waffles 

This fast brioche recipe comes together in about 25 minutes, meaning you can spend less time cooking and cleaning and more time indulging. Here’s how to make them:  

  1. Slice the bread: Cut your brioche loaf into approximately 1 ½ inch slices. Set them aside. 
  2. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 200 degrees F. You can keep your cooked brioche bread waffles in the oven to keep warm while you cook the rest of the waffles. 
  3. Preheat the waffle iron: Preheat your waffle iron according to the manufacturer’s instructions. 
  4. Make the milk mixture: Add the milk, eggs, vanilla extract, salt, and (optional) maple syrup to a bowl and whisk until combined. Dip each slice of brioche into the mixture for 2-3 seconds per side. Transfer them to a baking sheet. 
  5. Cook the waffles: Spray the waffle iron with vegetable oil spray and cook each piece of brioche according to your iron’s instructions. Make sure to spray the iron before adding another slice. 
  6. Transfer to the oven: Transfer each cooked waffle onto a baking sheet and keep them in the warmed oven as you cook the rest of the waffles. Continue until all your slices are cooked. 
  7. Serve: Top each waffle with chopped fresh fruit and a drizzle of maple syrup. For additional sweetness, dust the waffles with confectioner’s sugar. 
A slice of brioche bread waffle topped off with fruit from the top view.

How to Store, Freeze, and Reheat 

The great thing about this fast brioche recipe is that you can make extra waffles to store and enjoy for breakfast throughout the week. All you have to do is reheat them, add your toppings of choice, and enjoy! Here are a few storage tips: 

  • Store: If you think you’ll consume the extra waffles within a few days, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll keep in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Freeze: I like to freeze my extras, so I have a quick waffle to enjoy whenever I have a busy morning. To freeze, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container (ensure it’s airtight to prevent freezer burn). You can store them in the freezer for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: To reheat the waffles from the fridge or the freezer, pop them in the toaster or toaster oven until they’re warm.

How to Serve

This simple recipe pairs beautifully with a variety of toppings, allowing you and your family to customize the flavors to your liking. Top it off with fresh fruit and a dusting of cinnamon for a lighter option, or go crazy with the toppings to make it more indulgent. 

For a classic, subtly sweet waffle topping, add a dollop of this Whipped Maple Cream. Or, to truly indulge a sweet tooth, generously spread some Healthy Chocolate Frosting on your brioche waffles recipe. If a fruity flavor profile with natural flavoring is more your speed, add a drizzle of Pureed Blueberries

FAQs

What is the difference between a Belgian waffle and a regular waffle?

Belgian waffles and regular “American” waffles mainly differ in size and texture. Belgian waffles tend to be thick and fluffy, as they’re usually made with a yeasted dough that puffs up when cooked, while regular waffles are thin and dense. Belgian waffles are also sometimes coated with Belgian pearl sugar (sometimes referred to as Liege waffles), giving them a crispy exterior with a nice crunch.

Can you freeze brioche waffles?

Yes, you can! To freeze brioche bread waffles, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container. Store them in the freezer for up to a month.

Other Quick Breakfast Recipes You Might Like

They say breakfast is the most important meal of the day, so why not make it delicious? Whether you’re in the mood for something savory or sweet, you can find lots of breakfast inspiration here on the blog. Check out the links below for some ideas:

If you try this Waffle Brioche recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Brioche waffle topped off with fresh fruit on a plate with a fork on the side.
Print

Brioche Waffles Recipe

These quick brioche waffles are a great alternative to waffles made with batter, especially when you are short on time. It is made by lightly dipping slices of brioche in an egg and milk mixture and cooking them in a waffle iron. Simply make a batch eat it right away, or freeze it for later.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 Slices
Calories 236kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 loaf Brioche bread
  • ¾ cup whole milk
  • 3 large eggs
  • Pinch salt
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup optional
  • vegetable spray
  • ½ cup seasonal fruit chopped
  • Confectioners’ sugar (optional)

Instructions

  • Slice Brioche into 1½ inch thick slices. Set aside.
  • Pre-heat your oven to 200 degrees.
  • Pre-heat your waffle iron.
  • Whisk together the milk, eggs, salt, vanilla extract, and maple syrup (if using). Dip each slice into the mixture for 2-3 seconds on both sides and then transfer it to a baking sheet.
  • Spray the waffle iron with vegetable spray. Cook each slice in your waffle iron according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Make sure to spray again after each slice to prevent bread from sticking.
  • Transfer cooked waffles onto a rimmed baking sheet and keep them warm in the oven as you cook the rest of the slices.
  • To serve: Top them off with chopped fruit. Drizzle them with maple syrup. If preferred, sprinkle it with some confectioners’ sugar.

Video

Notes

  • Store: If you think you’ll consume the extra waffles within a few days, let them cool to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. They’ll keep in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Freeze: I like to freeze my extra waffles, so I have one ready to go whenever I’m craving a quick, yummy breakfast. To freeze, allow them to come to room temperature before placing them in a freezer-safe, airtight container (make sure it’s airtight to prevent freezer burn). You can store them in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Reheat: To reheat the waffles from the fridge or the freezer, simply pop them in the toaster or toaster oven until they’re warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 236kcal | Carbohydrates: 25g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 228mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 535IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Quick Brioche Waffles appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quick-brioche-waffles/feed/ 14
Green Pasta Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/green-pasta-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/green-pasta-sauce/#respond Fri, 27 Jan 2023 19:59:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64156 I always reach for a tried-and-true pasta recipe when I’m in the mood for something quick, easy, and comforting. If you prefer light, delicious vegetarian pasta recipes like this one, be sure to check out Gigi Hadid Vodka Pasta, Ricotta Lemon Pasta, Garlic Butter Pasta, and Pea and Mushroom Pasta.  Ingredients This green pasta recipe requires a few simple ingredients that you likely already have on hand. The nutty parmesan...

The post Green Pasta Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
I always reach for a tried-and-true pasta recipe when I’m in the mood for something quick, easy, and comforting. If you prefer light, delicious vegetarian pasta recipes like this one, be sure to check out Gigi Hadid Vodka Pasta, Ricotta Lemon Pasta, Garlic Butter Pasta, and Pea and Mushroom Pasta

Green noodle pasta in a bowl with a fork from the top view.

Ingredients

This green pasta recipe requires a few simple ingredients that you likely already have on hand. The nutty parmesan pairs beautifully with the earthy spinach, and a hint of lemon and garlic brightens the dish. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for pasta verde in bowls from the top view.
  • For the pasta: Any type of pasta would work for this recipe. I used linguine, but any other long or short pasta would also work. 
  • To make the Italian green pasta sauce: Gather fresh baby spinach, parmesan cheese, garlic, kosher salt, black pepper, lemon juice, and olive oil.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

This green Italian sauce for pasta is so basic that it’s very forgiving when it comes to substitutions. Whether you’d prefer a dairy-free option or like an extra creamy sauce, this recipe will still work for you. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Pasta: I prefer green linguine, but feel free to use your pasta of choice. You can make green fettuccine pasta, a green spaghetti sauce, or green pasta noodles. If you’re following a gluten-free diet, you can use chickpea pasta or your favorite gluten-free pasta instead. For best results, follow the package directions for cooking the pasta. If you’d like a carb-free option, try these tasty Zucchini Noodles.
  • Cream cheese: For an extra rich green creamy pasta, add two ounces of room-temperature cream cheese into the food processor with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Vegan green pasta sauce: You can substitute an equal amount of nutritional yeast for the parmesan cheese for a vegan pasta sauce! Its cheesy, umami flavor is a great substitute for parmesan and pairs well with the earthy flavor of your fresh greens. Just keep in mind that you may need to add more salt to your vegan sauce for pasta if you’re using nutritional yeast. 
  • Frozen spinach: If you don’t have fresh spinach on hand, you can substitute frozen spinach for this healthy pasta sauce. Make sure to thaw and squeeze out any excess juices and liquid before sauteing it. 
  • Kale sauce: Kale is a great substitute for this spinach garlic pasta sauce. However, I recommend blanching your kale (for about five minutes in the boiling pasta water) before sauteing it with the rest of the ingredients. Since kale leaves tend to be heartier than spinach leaves, blanching them first will shorten the sauteing time.
  • Optional mix-ins: For an Italian green sauce for pasta (aka pasta verde), you can substitute a cup of your greens for a cup of fresh herbs like oregano, parsley, or fresh basil leaves. 
  • Toppings: Toppings are a great way to customize your green noodle pasta to your liking. Toss in a handful of toasted pine nuts for a delicious crunch, just as we did in my Catalan Style Spinach recipe, or sprinkle your spinach parmesan pasta sauce with some red pepper flakes for a kick of spice.

How to Make Green Pasta Sauce?

I think we can all agree that homemade healthy pasta sauce is always the better option compared to its store-bought version. Fresh, flavorful, and ready in less than 30 minutes, this spinach-based pasta sauce will leave your taste buds wanting more. Here’s how to make it:  

A person showing how to cook pasta, saute garlic, and make a sauce with spinach.
  1. Cook the pasta: Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Add in the pasta and follow the package instructions to cook until it’s al dente. Once cooked, drain the pasta and save half a cup of the pasta water. Return the pasta to the pot and set aside. 
  2. Saute the garlic: As your pasta cooks, heat the olive oil in a large pan over medium heat and add the garlic. Saute for 1 minute, stirring constantly. 
  3. Add in your leafy greens: Add the spinach, salt, and pepper to the pan of sauteed garlic. Cook, tossing regularly until the spinach has wilted. At first, it will look like it is a lot of spinach, but as it cooks, it will go down to nothing.
  4. Transfer to a food processor: Transfer your cooked spinach into a food processor or blender and add in the parmesan cheese, lemon juice, and the reserved pasta water. 
Two images showing how to combine a spinach-based sauce with pasta.
  1. Blend: Process the spinach sauce for pasta until fully pureed, taste, and add additional seasoning as desired. During the blending process, you may have to stop and scrape the sides of the bowl.
  2. Combine with the pasta: Pour the blended spinach pasta sauce over the cooked pasta, using tongs to toss and combine gently. Serve your green spinach pasta with extra parmesan cheese on top.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, and Reheat?

Make this creamy green pasta sauce in no time for a quick, on-demand weeknight meal, or make it ahead of time as part of your meal prep for the week. Here are some storage and reheating tips:

  • Make ahead: You can make this creamy spinach pasta sauce up to two days in advance as part of your meal prep. If you’d like to make the sauce before cooking your pasta, you can substitute vegetable stock or water for the pasta water used in the recipe. Be sure to keep it in the fridge in an airtight container.
  • Store: To store, let the pasta with green sauce come to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the sauce on the stovetop over low heat until warm. You can also reheat it in the microwave at 30-second intervals, stirring after each interval until warm. For both methods, you may need to add a little water to keep the sauce from drying out. 
Green pasta noodles in a bowl with a fork from the side view.

How to Serve?

While you can top a bowl of pasta with this simple healthy pasta sauce for a light lunch or dinner, you can also serve it as a side dish to accompany a number of your favorite entrees. Here are my serving recommendations:

FAQs

What is green pasta sauce called?

“What is the name of green pasta sauce?” is a common question featured in crossword puzzles! Green pasta sauce, sometimes called green noodle sauce, is often referred to as pesto sauce, which is traditionally made with basil, cheese, garlic, pine nuts, and oil. Our simple, made-from-scratch recipe is a creamy spinach sauce for pasta, which is a lighter alternative to pesto. 

What is a green pasta sauce made of?

Green noodle recipes have many possible variations, but our healthy sauce for pasta is made with spinach, parmesan cheese, lemon juice, garlic, and olive oil.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

If you love this easy healthy pasta sauce and are looking for more healthy pasta sauce recipes, we have plenty of other tasty dishes you will love! Browse the links below for inspiration: 

If you try this Green Pasta Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Super green pasta in a bowl with a fork on the side from the side view.
Print

Green Pasta Sauce Recipe

This Green Pasta Sauce is a nutritious, lighter alternative to pesto that you can make in under 30 minutes. Packed with nutty parmesan cheese, vibrant spinach, and hints of lemon and garlic, this sauce is the perfect accompaniment to your favorite type of pasta. Enjoy this pasta dish alone as a light lunch or dinner, or serve it as a side to a number of main dishes.
Course Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 557kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound spaghetti linguine, or any other pasta shape you have on hand
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 10 oz. fresh baby spinach leaves
  • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more for garnish – 50 gr.
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest optional

Instructions

  • Cook the pasta: Fill a large pot with water and add a few tablespoons of salt. Bring to a boil, add pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Reserve 1/2 cup of pasta water and drain the rest. Return the pasta to the pot and set it aside.
  • Saute the garlic: Meanwhile, heat olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add garlic and saute for 1 minute while stirring constantly.
  • Add the spinach: Add the spinach leaves, salt, and pepper to the skillet. Cook, tossing often until the spinach is wilted and has lost most of its volume.
  • Transfer to a food processor: Transfer the now-cooked spinach to the bowl of a food processor*. Add in the parmesan cheese, lemon juice, and the reserved pasta water.
  • Blend: Process until fully pureed, stopping and scraping the sides as necessary. Give it a taste and add more seasoning, if desired.
  • Combine with the pasta: Pour the spinach pasta sauce over the cooked pasta, and use tongs to give it a gentle toss to combine.
  • Serve: Serve warm with extra parmesan cheese on top and lemon zest, if preferred.

Notes

  • Cream cheese: We wanted a green pasta sauce that is more on the healthier side, but if you are after an extra rich, creamy pasta, you can add two ounces of room-temperature cream cheese (or ricotta cheese) into the food processor with the rest of the ingredients.
  • Make ahead: You can make this green spinach pasta sauce up to two days in advance as part of your meal prep. If you’d like to make the sauce before cooking your pasta, you can substitute vegetable stock or water for the pasta water used in the recipe. Be sure to keep it in the fridge in an airtight container.
  • Store: To store, let it come to room temperature before placing it in an airtight container. It will keep in the fridge for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat it on the stovetop over low heat until warm. You can also reheat it in the microwave at 30-second intervals, stirring after each interval until warm. For both methods, you may need to add a little water to keep the sauce from drying out. 
  • Food processor: If you do not have a food processor, you can use a blender.

Nutrition

Calories: 557kcal | Carbohydrates: 90g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 573mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 6756IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 211mg | Iron: 4mg

The post Green Pasta Sauce appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/green-pasta-sauce/feed/ 0
Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/#comments Tue, 24 Jan 2023 19:05:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3022 Wondering what to make with that jar of steel cut oats that is hiding in the dark corners of your pantry? Well, you have come to the right place! In addition to this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe, we have crockpot steel cut oats and pressure cooker steel cut oatmeal to help you use this versatile ingredient with only a few minutes of hands-on time. New to cooking steel-cut oats?...

The post Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Wondering what to make with that jar of steel cut oats that is hiding in the dark corners of your pantry? Well, you have come to the right place! In addition to this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe, we have crockpot steel cut oats and pressure cooker steel cut oatmeal to help you use this versatile ingredient with only a few minutes of hands-on time.

New to cooking steel-cut oats? Learn why I choose steel-cut oats over any other type of oats for my morning breakfast in this Rolled vs. Steel Cut Oats article.

A bowl of oats topped with an egg, mushrooms, and spinach from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this tasty, savory oatmeal recipe, you will need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for an oatmeal recipe with spinach and mushrooms from the top view.
  • Steel-cut oats: Gather vegetable stock, steel cut oats (aka Irish Oats) and kosher salt. 
  • Vegetable toppings: For the savory vegetable topping, you will need olive oil, ground cumin, ground paprika, Baby Bella mushrooms, baby spinach, a fresh garlic clove, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. 
  • Optional toppings: While they are optional, you can also top it off with fried eggs, hard-boiled eggs, soft-boiled eggs, or even poached eggs for some extra protein. I think savory oatmeal with an egg on top is a tasty, high-protein meal that happens to be one of my favorite steel cut oats dinner recipes. However, if you prefer this recipe to be vegan, you can omit it.

Substitutions & Variations

  • Quick cooking steel cut oats: Steel-cut oats do take a while to cook, so to shorten the cooking time we are soaking them overnight. However, if you can find quick cooking steel cut oats (such as Bob’s Red Mills brand – affiliate link) in your grocery store, you can skip the overnight soaking and make this creamy savory steel cut oatmeal recipe in the morning in just about 5-7 minutes. Simply, skip steps one and two of the recipe and simply follow the directions on the package to boil the quick oats with the vegetable stock (or water.) 
  • Oil: Replace the olive oil with unsalted butter, avocado oil, or coconut oil. 
  • Cooking liquid: Water or chicken broth can be used in place of vegetable stock. Use homemade chicken stock to make my savory oats, but a storebought version would also work.
  • Kale: Amongst all types of kale, my favorite ones to use are curly kale or lacinato kale as a substitution for baby spinach in this savory breakfast recipe. 
  • Fresh herbs: Alternatively, in place of greens, you can also use fresh herbs such as parsley and basil.
  • Optional mix-ins: With endless mix-in options, this steel cut oatmeal will never get boring. Add shredded cheddar cheese, parmesan cheese, nutritional yeast, sun-dried tomatoes, pine nuts, chia seeds, peppers, or fresh avocado to your bowl of savory oatmeal. 

How to Make This Recipe?

Making this savory steel cut oats dish could not be easier. Here are the steps:

A person showing how to make Irish oats on the stove from the top view.
  1. Soak the steel cut oats: Bring the vegetable stock to a boil in a small saucepan. Turn the heat off and stir in the oats and salt. Cover it with a tight-fitting lid and let the oats sit overnight. 
A person showing how to sauté mushrooms and spinach from the top view.
  1. Make the toppings: Start by heating the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Stir in the ground cumin and paprika and cook for about a minute. Add the sliced Baby Bella mushrooms and cook for about 4-5 minutes or until they are softened and have released some of their juices. Stir in the spinach and cook until it wilts. Add the minced garlic (if using) and season it with salt and pepper. Set it aside while you finish making the steel cut oatmeal. 
  2. Prepare the additional toppings (optional): If you are planning to make your savory oats with egg on top, this is the best time to cook them. I like to fry mine with a bit of butter, but you can cook your eggs any way you like.
A person stirring oats in a pot from the top view.
  1. Prepare the steel-cut oatmeal: Place the pot of steel cut oats and broth back on the stove and stir it frequently while heating over medium-high heat. The steel cut oatmeal will get thicker and creamier as it cooks. If it is too thick, feel free to add ¼ cup of water (or vegetable broth) to make it the perfect consistency. Be sure to taste the oatmeal and add more seasonings if necessary. 
A bowl of oats topped with an egg and veggies from the top view.
  1. Assemble the savory steel cut oats: Scoop the steel-cut oatmeal into a bowl and top it with the mushroom spinach topping. If you are using eggs, add one (or more) on top of the warm oats. Sprinkle with a pinch of salt, pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using.

How to Store Leftovers?

Go ahead and put this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe on your weekly meal prep list because it can easily be made ahead and put together in a pinch when you are short on time. This is how I make ahead, store and reheat:

  • Make ahead: You can prep the steel cut oatmeal and savory toppings and store them in separate air-tight containers in the fridge for up to 4 days. When you are ready to serve, you can reheat (following the instructions below) each component and assemble it as directed. 
  • Storing leftovers: If possible, I recommend storing the savory oatmeal and vegetable toppings in separate airtight containers. Ensure the oats and toppings are at room temperature, not hot, and then place them in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: To reheat the cooked oats, microwave in 30-second increments, stirring after heating, until they are warm. You can also heat it on the stovetop in a small pot. Simply heat it over medium heat and stir frequently until the oats are warm, which will take about 3-5 minutes. You may need to add an extra splash of vegetable stock, coconut milk, or water to thin out the oats a little bit. 

Variations- Other Topping Ideas

I love to serve my family a big bowl of savory steel cut oatmeal because it offers numerous health benefits and, with a little bit of creativity, they can customize it to their liking. Simply take the basic recipe below and change it up with just a few additions and ingredient swaps. Get creative with whatever vegetables, spices, and herbs you have in your pantry and fridge. Think of this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe as a blank canvas!

Here are a few of my other favorite ways to make this savory steel cut oatmeal recipe:

  • Utilize your leftovers: Try using leftover sauteed veggies or roasted veggies as your savory oatmeal toppings. Baked shiitake mushrooms, sauteed asparagus, or roasted butternut squash make fantastic toppings for this dish. Using leftovers will also save you time since your toppings are already prepared! 
  • Create Indian steel cut oats: Indian-inspired steel cut oats make for an incredible breakfast, lunch, or dinner. Mix a teaspoon of my golden paste into the cooked steel cut oats, then top it with some roasted chickpeas for an amazing Indian-cuisine inspired bowl of steel-cut oats. Alternatively, if you do not have the golden paste, you can use a touch of curry powder to make this recipe one of the best savory breakfasts you can make in minutes.
  • Asian savory steel cut oatmeal: Make the steel cut oatmeal topping with shiitake mushrooms, baby spinach, and sesame oil. Add a splash of soy sauce and garnish the oatmeal with edamame or steamed broccoli
  • Mediterranean steel cut oats: Make a Mediterranean bowl of steel cut oats simply by topping it with my Turkish White Bean Salad. And, if you want to take it a step further and make this savory dish umami-rich, you can mix vegetable broth (or water) with a tablespoon of tomato paste. 
  • Mexican steel cut oats: Add a little ground cumin, coriander, and red chili powder to make a flavorful, Mexican-style steel-cut oats breakfast. Taking inspiration from my Mexican Quinoa recipe, you can make a warm topping by sauteing some onions, tomatoes, bell pepper, jalapenos, and black beans to use as a topping. Some fresh avocado, a squeeze of lime juice, or a few tablespoons of pickled Mexican red onion are also great oatmeal toppings.
A bowl with grains, eggs, and veggies with a fork from the top view.

Other Ways of Cooking Savory Steel Cut Oats

I like to make overnight steel-cut oats as it is a very hands-off recipe. However, you can make steel cut oats in different ways. Here are a few other methods you may want to try:

Stove Top

Bring your vegetable broth to a boil, then add the steel-cut oats. Let the oats simmer over medium-low heat for about 30 minutes. The liquid will be completely absorbed, and the oats will be tender and soft. Be sure to keep a close eye on it and stir it a few times during cooking.

Slow Cooker

To cook steel cut oats in the crockpot, add vegetable stock, steel-cut oats, and salt to a slow cooker. Cover and cook over low heat for 4-5 hours. If you need to know more about this cooking method, check out my detailed recipe for crockpot steel cut oatmeal.

Instant Pot

Stir the vegetable stock, steel-cut oats, and salt in the bowl of your pressure cooker. Cover, seal and cook on high pressure for 4 minutes. Let the pressure release naturally for 10 minutes, open the lid, give it a stir, and ladle it into bowls. For more information on cooking oats in a pressure cooker, check out my Instant Pot Steel Cut Oats recipe.

FAQs

Can I use rolled oats instead of steel cut oats in this recipe?

You can use this recipe to make savory oatmeal with rolled oats with a few adjustments. Simply bring the vegetable broth to a boil and then add 1 cup of rolled oats. Simmer the rolled oats for 5-7 minutes or until creamy, stirring frequently while cooking. While that is cooking, make the savory oatmeal toppings and assemble the savory oatmeal as directed in the instructions.

Can I use quick cooking steel cut oats in this recipe?

Yes, you can use quick cooking steel cut oats. However, since they cook much faster there is no need to let the quick-cooking oats sit overnight. Simply follow these preparation instructions on the packaging to cook them.

Are steel cut oats good for weight loss?

Studies have shown that steel-cut oats may be good for weight loss mainly because, as a whole, grain oats are packed with fiber. Therefore, including oats in your daily diet may contribute to the feeling of fullness, which in turn helps you with consuming fewer calories.

Other Oatmeal Breakfasts You Might Like

If you are a fan of recipes with steel cut oats, chances are you often enjoy a bowl of oatmeal in the morning. Below are a few more oatmeal recipes you might like:

If you try this Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal recipe, please take a minute to leave a comment or even a picture below. It is great to hear how much you love the recipes on my site and will help others who may be planning to make the recipe. And, if you took any pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories. Enjoy!

Savory steel cut oatmeal topped off with veggies and a fried egg on top.
Print

Savory Steel Cut Oats Recipe

This Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal is packed with fresh veggies and fragrant spices for a hearty, filling meal that will fuel your day. Customize it with add-ins and toppings to accommodate your family's preferences and serve it for an easy breakfast, lunch, or dinner.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American Vegetarian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Overnight Soak 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 20 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 417kcal

Ingredients

For The Steel Cut Oats

  • 2 cups vegetable stock or water plus a bit more if needed
  • 1 cup steel cut oats
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Topping:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil or unsalted butter
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground paprika
  • 8 ounces baby bella mushrooms sliced / or any other one of your favorite mushrooms
  • 5 oz. fresh baby spinach leaves
  • 1 clove garlic minced or ½ teaspoon garlic powder – optional
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 large eggs – fried or soft boiled – optional
  • 1/8 teaspoon Red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • To soak steel cut oats: Place vegetable stock (or water) in a medium saucepan with a lid. Bring it to a boil. Off the heat, stir in the steel-cut oats and salt. Cover it with the lid and let it sit on the kitchen counter overnight.
  • To make the veggie topping: In the morning, before cooking the steel-cut oatmeal, prepare the topping. To do so, heat oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add spices and cook them for a minute or so.
  • Add the sliced mushrooms and cook, stirring often, until they are fully cooked, for about 6-8 minutes.
  • Add the baby spinach and cook until wilted, for 3-4 minutes.
  • If using, add the garlic and saute for 30 seconds. Finish it off with salt and pepper and set it aside.
  • To prepare the savory steel-cut oatmeal: Put the saucepan back on the stove and heat it over medium heat. Stir it frequently using a wooden spoon to prevent it from sticking to the bottom of the pan. As it cooks, the excess liquid will evaporate, and the steel-cut oatmeal will form a thicker and creamier texture. If it gets too thick, feel free to add ¼ cup of water (or vegetable broth) to thin it out. This process happens in 3-4 minutes, so do not leave site of it.
  • Taste steel-cut oatmeal for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • When ready to serve, ladle steel-cut oatmeal into a bowl. Top it off with cooked mushrooms and spinach. If using, add a fried egg on top.
  • Finish it off with salt and pepper and red pepper flakes. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Serving size: This recipe yields about 2 to 2 1/4 cups of cooked steel cut oatmeal. I listed it as 2 servings (as shown in the photos), but if you keep the portions smaller, it could be served to 4 people. 
  • Steel cut oats: If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to purchase gluten-free certified steel cut oats.
  • Make-Ahead Instructions: You can prep the steel cut oatmeal and the toppings and store them in separate air-tight containers in the fridge for up to 4 days. When you are ready to serve, you can reheat each component and assemble it as directed. 
  • Storing Leftovers: I recommend storing the savory oatmeal and vegetable toppings in separate airtight containers if you can. Bring them to room temperature and store them in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: To reheat, microwave the steel-cut oatmeal in 30-second increments, stirring after heating, until they are warm. You can also heat it on the stovetop in a small pot. Simply heat it over medium heat and stir frequently until the oats are warm, which will take about 3-5 minutes. You may need to add an extra splash of vegetable stock, coconut milk, or water to thin out the oats a little bit.
  • Nutrition Information: The calorie and nutrition information below does not include the optional egg on top.

Nutrition

Calories: 417kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 18g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 647mg | Potassium: 931mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 6934IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 6mg

The post Savory Steel Cut Oatmeal appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-savory-steel-cut-oats/feed/ 12
Yogurt and Molasses Bread with Walnuts and Dried Figs https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-and-molasses-bread-with-walnuts-and-dried-figs/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-and-molasses-bread-with-walnuts-and-dried-figs/#comments Sat, 14 Jan 2023 17:12:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2019 There’s nothing better than the smell of freshly baked bread wafting through your home. Although it may seem challenging or complicated, homemade bread is often easier to make than it seems! You’ll also love this Nut and Seed Loaf or my Buckwheat Bread Recipe if you need more inspiration for other easy bread recipes.  Ingredients This recipe (adapted from the original recipe, Mark Bittman Yogurt Bread) requires only a few...

The post Yogurt and Molasses Bread with Walnuts and Dried Figs appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
There’s nothing better than the smell of freshly baked bread wafting through your home. Although it may seem challenging or complicated, homemade bread is often easier to make than it seems! You’ll also love this Nut and Seed Loaf or my Buckwheat Bread Recipe if you need more inspiration for other easy bread recipes. 

Yogurt Molasses Bread sliced and photographed from the front view.

Ingredients

This recipe (adapted from the original recipe, Mark Bittman Yogurt Bread) requires only a few basic ingredients that you likely have stocked in your pantry and fridge. Besides classic bread ingredients like flour and baking soda, we’re adding molasses, dried fruits, and walnuts for the perfect balance of sweet and savory. 

Ingredients for the recipe are individually portioned into bowls.

For this quick bread recipe, you’ll need whole wheat flour (or white whole wheat flour), cornmeal, kosher salt, baking soda, plain whole milk yogurt (or buttermilk), unsulphured molasses (I like Grandma’s Molasses – affiliate link), chopped dried fruit (any kind you prefer, such as cranberries, figs, or raisins), and chopped walnuts. 

How to Make It?

This moist loaf comes together with only 15 minutes of hands-on time and an hour of cook time, making it a no-fuss option whenever you’re craving a slice of warm, homemade bread. Here’s how to make it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. Grease a non-stick, 9×5 or 8.5×4.5 inch loaf pan with vegetable oil spray (such as olive oil), or line it with parchment paper. 
How to make yogurt bread with molasses shown in a collage of images.
  1. Combine the dry ingredients: Add the whole wheat flour, cornmeal, salt, and baking soda to a medium bowl and mix until well combined. 
  2. Whisk the wet ingredients: In a separate large mixing bowl, whisk together the wet ingredients until combined. 
  3. Combine ingredients together: Add the flour mixture into the bowl with the wet mixture and stir until just combined, making sure to scrape the bottom of the bowl. The dough will be very thick.
  4. Add the dried fruit and nuts: Gently fold in the chopped fruits and nuts until they are evenly distributed throughout the dough. This is a rather dense dough so don’t be alarmed.
Person showing the before and after of the bread during the baking process.
  1. Pour into a loaf pan: Transfer batter to the prepared loaf pan and use a spatula to even it out. 
  2. Bake loaf: Bake in the center of the oven for about 55-60 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the middle comes out clean. Let it rest for 5 minutes, then remove it from the pan and let it cool completely on a wire rack. 
  3. Serve: Slice with a serrated knife and serve with your favorite spreads or toppings. 

How to Serve?

This yogurt and molasses bread is so hearty and filling that it makes for the perfect quick breakfast or afternoon snack that will keep you feeling energized. Add a pat of butter and enjoy it with a hot cup of coffee or tea, or use your favorite spreads to amp up the flavor. Here are some suggestions:  

  • Pop it in the toaster: I personally think that this quick bread is best when served warm, so I like to pop it in the toaster before serving. The toaster warms it evenly and gives it a nice crust! 
  • Use your favorite spread: Lots of different butters, cheeses, and jams pair beautifully with this bread. Spread on some salted or unsalted butter to keep things simple (make sure to toast the bread, so the butter melts), or serve it with cream cheese, homemade ricotta cheese, no butter chocolate frosting, or mascarpone cheese. If you want to add some sweetness, spread on your favorite jam. I personally love to pair this bread with blackberry jam!

How to Store and Freeze

If you don’t think you can consume the loaf within about a week, you can store it in the freezer to enjoy later. Better yet, make a double recipe and store one loaf in the freezer to have homemade bread available whenever you’re craving it. Here are some storage tips: 

  • Store: Let the bread cool to room temperature and store it in an airtight container in the fridge. It’ll keep in the fridge for about a week. 
  • Freeze: Before freezing, let the bread cool to room temperature and slice it (it’s difficult to slice once it’s frozen). Wrap it in plastic wrap and store it in a freezer-safe container for up to two months. 
Molasses bread with yogurt is sliced from the top view.

Expert Tips

Even though this molasses whole wheat bread recipe is pretty easy and straightforward, I wanted to provide you with a few tips to help you get the best results. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Don’t overmix the dough: Once you combine the dry ingredients with the wet ingredients, it’s important to mix until the dough is just combined. Overmixing tends to affect the texture of your bread, making the resulting bread tough, dense, or chewy. While manually mixing will help you avoid overmixing, a stand mixer and a dough hook will also work as long as you watch it closely and stop mixing once the dough comes together. 
  • Aerate the flour for proper measurement: The best way to measure flour for this whole wheat recipe is to spoon it into your measuring cup and level it off with a butter knife. This will help aerate the flour, which ensures proper measurement and gives the bread a nice texture. 
  • It is a dense dough: After you add the fruit, you will end up with a dense dough. You might think that it needs more liquid but please trust the recipe. It does not need more liquid.
  • Let it cool completely before slicing: I know you will be tempted to cut into your bread as soon as it comes out of the oven (I was, too), but it’s important to wait a little bit to let the loaf cool completely before cutting into it. The bread actually continues to cook and release steam as it cools, so cutting into it too soon interrupts this process and leaves you with a dense texture that’s usually a bit sticky.

FAQs

What does yogurt do in baking bread?

Adding yogurt to bread recipes makes for tender, moist, and fluffy bread. It’s also a great substitute or replacement for fats and liquid, such as oil and butter, in healthy bread recipes. 

Which molasses is best?

I used unsulphured molasses in this molasses wheat bread recipe, as it’s made from sugar cane, usually doesn’t contain additives or preservatives, and has a sweet, “pure” taste. Blackstrap molasses, another common type of molasses, is thicker, darker, and more bitter than unsulphured. 

Other Quick Bread Recipes You Might Like

Once you start making bread at home, you won’t want to buy it from the store! Whether you serve it to your family or give it away to friends and neighbors, it’s always nice to have a homemade loaf that’s ready to enjoy. If you’re looking to expand your collection of quick bread recipes, look no further than the links below: 

If you try this Yogurt Molasses Bread recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from Mark Bittman’s Quick Whole Wheat and Molasses Bread recipe in his cookbook, How To Cook Everything (affiliate link.)

Yogurt molasses bread sliced on a cutting board.
Print

Yogurt Molasses Bread Recipe

With just the right amount of sweetness this yogurt walnut and dried fig bread make a delicious breakfast bread or snack cake to serve with your afternoon tea. If you are a fan of making your own bread, this whole wheat flour and cornmeal based Yogurt Molasses bread recipe is one that you should definitely try.
Course Bread
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 8 slices
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/2 cups whole wheat flour 13.75 oz.
  • 1/2 cup fine cornmeal 3 oz.
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 2/3 cups plain whole milk yogurt 14 oz. – at room temperature
  • 1/2 cup unsulphured blackstrap molasses 4.5 oz.
  • 1/2 cup dried fruit chopped
  • 1 cup walnuts chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 325 Degrees F. Spray a non-stick 9X5 or 8.5 X4.5 baking dish with vegetable spray.
  • Mix whole wheat flour, cornmeal, salt, and baking soda in a large bowl. Set it aside.
  • Whisk together yogurt and molasses in a separate bowl until fully combined.
  • Stir the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and stir just until combined. It will be a very thick batter.
  • Mix in the chopped fruit and walnuts and stir them in just until they are evenly distributed.
  • Place the batter into the prepared pan and distribute it evenly in the pan using a spatula.
  • Bake until a toothpick inserted in the middle comes out clean for about 55-60 minutes. Let it rest for 5 minutes. Remove from the pan and transfer onto a wire rack to cool completely.
  • Slice and serve.

Notes

  • It is a dense dough: After you add the fruit, you will end up with a dense dough, and it may feel like you need more liquid, but trust the recipe.
  • Let it cool completely before slicing: I know you will be tempted to cut into your bread as soon as it comes out of the oven (I was, too), but it’s important to wait a little bit to let the loaf cool completely before cutting into it. Bread actually continues to cook and release steam as it cools, so cutting into it too soon interrupts this process and leaves you with a dense texture that’s usually a bit sticky. 
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature before placing in an airtight container in the fridge. The sliced bread will keep fresh for up to a week.
  • Freezing: This whole wheat bread is great for freezing. Though I recommend freezing it after slicing. Simply place the sliced bread in an airtight container, and get the air out as much as possible before freezing. 
  • Thawing: No need to thaw! Just warm it up in a toaster (or toaster oven) for a delicious breakfast toast.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 410mg | Potassium: 607mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 45IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 131mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Yogurt and Molasses Bread with Walnuts and Dried Figs appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-and-molasses-bread-with-walnuts-and-dried-figs/feed/ 12
Overnight Oats with Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/ https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/#comments Fri, 13 Jan 2023 16:50:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63759 I love to make a big batch of healthy overnight oats with Greek yogurt at the beginning of the week, especially when I know I have busy weekdays ahead. It’s convenient, filling, yummy, and prevents me from skipping the most important meal of the day!  If you’re looking to incorporate similar recipes into your breakfast routine, you have to try this Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe, my Almond Milk Oatmeal,...

The post Overnight Oats with Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I love to make a big batch of healthy overnight oats with Greek yogurt at the beginning of the week, especially when I know I have busy weekdays ahead. It’s convenient, filling, yummy, and prevents me from skipping the most important meal of the day! 

If you’re looking to incorporate similar recipes into your breakfast routine, you have to try this Overnight Steel Cut Oats Recipe, my Almond Milk Oatmeal, and Muesli Overnight Oats

Oatmeal combined with yogurt in a bowl with fruit from the top view.

Ingredients

This simple yogurt and oats recipe requires four basic ingredients that you likely already have on hand or can easily pick up at the grocery store. To amp up the flavor, add as many additional ingredients or toppings as you’d like. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a greek yogurt and oatmeal recipe in bowls from the top view.
  • To make creamy overnight oats with yogurt, gather Greek Vanilla Yogurt, old-fashioned rolled oats, honey (or maple syrup), cinnamon, and water.
  • As optional toppings, use fresh fruit (such as fresh berries), chopped nuts or nut butter (such as almond butter, peanut butter, or sunflower seed butter), and even homemade granola

Ingredient Substitutions

This easy overnight oats with yogurt recipe is very forgiving when it comes to substitutions. Feel free to customize it to your liking to accommodate the ingredients you have on hand or your dietary restrictions or preferences. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Yogurt: While plain Greek yogurt gives this oatmeal with yogurt recipe a creamy texture and a perfect consistency, feel free to use plain yogurt or your favorite yogurt instead. I love to make vanilla yogurt at home, so I can control the sweetness, but you can also purchase vanilla yogurt from your local store. You can even make overnight oats with strawberry yogurt or your favorite fruit-flavored yogurts. If you wish to make the recipe vegan and dairy-free, simply substitute your favorite vegan yogurt. Just remember that vegan yogurt is typically thinner in consistency than regular yogurt, so your yogurt with oats recipe may not be super creamy if you use vegan yogurt (but it’ll still taste great). 
  • Oats: In my opinion, amongst all types, the best oats for yogurt overnight oats are old-fashioned rolled oats. My personal favorite is the organic brand One Degree (affiliate link), which offers old-fashioned oats and gluten-free oats. You can also use quick oats to make instant oatmeal with Greek yogurt. Not sure about how rolled oats are different than quick oats? Check out our comprehensive guide on quick oats vs. rolled oats. Or, to really pack in some extra superfoods, substitute equal parts of Homemade Muesli for the oats. 
  • Water vs. milk: Some cold oatmeal cereal recipes use milk, but I thought water would suffice since we’re also using yogurt. If you want to use milk to make this refrigerator oatmeal recipe extra rich and creamy, you can use cow’s milk or non-dairy milk, such as almond milk, coconut milk, or even cashew milk
  • Sweetener: While I love the flavor and sweetness of honey, you can use whatever type of sweetener you prefer or have on hand. I recommend maple syrup, coconut sugar, or brown sugar, as they all pair well with this overnight yogurt oatmeal. 
  • Spices: If ground cinnamon just isn’t enough, you can amp up the flavor with all your favorite “sweet” spices. Ground nutmeg, cardamom, ginger, and cloves would all pair beautifully with your oatmeal and yogurt breakfast. 

Optional Toppings and Add-Ins

You can easily customize this recipe’s flavor profile and sweetness by adding your toppings of choice. Feel free to get creative, but here are some of my favorites: 

  • Fruit: Fresh fruit is a classic breakfast topping, and Greek yogurt with strawberries and oats pairs so well. I also love to top mine with a ripe mashed banana, raspberries, or blueberries. You can always use thawed frozen fruit if berries or your favorite fruits aren’t in season. 
  • Additional sweeteners: If you have leftover Cranberry Maple Sauce sitting around from holiday baking, use it to sweeten up this recipe! Other fruit sauces and jams, like Blueberry Sauce or Homemade Applesauce, are also great natural sweeteners to flavor your oats with Greek yogurt. 
  • Nuts: To add some crunch to your simple overnight oats with yogurt, use chopped nuts, such as almonds, cashews, pecans, or walnuts. For a high-protein breakfast that’s the perfect pre or post-workout fuel, add a tablespoon or two of nut butter, such as peanut butter or almond butter. To make your Greek yogurt with oats recipe extra decadent, try topping it off with chocolate chips (which pair great with peanut butter). 
  • Granola: You can also top your oat and yogurt breakfast with my Chunky Granola Recipe or this Quinoa Crunch for additional texture, flavor, and a boost of nutrients. 
  • Superfoods: If you’re looking for a great way to incorporate an extra dose of health benefits into your daily diet, add a pinch of superfoods, such as chia seeds, hemp seeds, or ground flax seeds, into your yummy breakfast. 

How to Make Overnight Oats with Yogurt

In only five minutes, you can whip up this basic vanilla overnight oats recipe with yogurt to have it ready to go first thing in the morning. If you’d like to make your own vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt to use in this recipe, follow the first two steps below. If you purchased vanilla yogurt from the store, you can skip to step three. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Make the vanilla yogurt: Place plain, whole milk yogurt (regular or Greek), honey, and vanilla extract in a bowl. Whisk to combine. 
  2. Taste and adjust: Give it a taste and add more honey or vanilla if needed. 
A person showing how to make overnight oats with yogurt from the top view.
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the vanilla yogurt, honey, and water to a large mixing bowl. Whisk until well combined. 
  2. Stir in the oats: Add in the oats and ground cinnamon (if using) and give it a stir until the mixture is well combined. 
A person showing how to make a recipe with oatmeal and yogurt.
  1. Rest: Cover the bowl with a lid or plastic wrap and place it in the fridge for at least 6 hours. 
  2. Stir: In the morning, take the vanilla yogurt overnight oats out of the fridge and give them a good stir to reincorporate the ingredients. 
  3. Serve or store: If you’re ready to serve, place your desired amount of oats in a bowl and garnish with your toppings of choice and a drizzle of honey. If you wish to store your Greek yogurt and oats recipe, divide it into jars and store it in the fridge. 

How to Serve Overnight Yogurt Oats?

It’s no secret that starting your day with Greek yogurt is an excellent habit because of its many health benefits, such as its high calcium and protein content. Once your overnight oatmeal with yogurt is ready in the morning, you can enjoy it as-is or store it in jars as part of your weekly meal prep. Here are some tips:

  • Make breakfast in a jar with yogurt: For a truly grab-and-go, single-serving breakfast, make overnight oats in a mason jar! Mix up a big batch of this recipe (multiply the recipe as many times as you’d like), let it sit overnight, and divide it into 16 oz mason jars (or another one of your favorite containers) in the morning. To make things even easier, you can add your favorite toppings, such as fruit, into each 16-ounce jar. You can also layer the oats with granola, as you would in my Yogurt Parfait recipe. However, I recommend adding the granola to the jars right before you’re ready to serve, as granola tends to get soggy as it sits.
  • Serve it in a bowl: For a quick way to serve your easy breakfast recipe, whip up a batch of Greek oats and add your desired amount to a bowl in the morning. Don’t forget to add the toppings!
A bowl of oats topped with fruit and nuts from the side view.

How to Store

This overnight oats yogurt recipe is super meal prep friendly, especially if you store the recipe in mason jars. If you store it in an airtight container, such as a mason jar, in the fridge, it will stay fresh for up to four days.

FAQs

Can you put uncooked oats in yogurt?

Yes, you can! Overnight oats are a no-cook raw oats and yogurt recipe. There’s no need to cook the oats beforehand, as adding yogurt to oatmeal and letting it sit overnight allows the oats to soak up the liquid and become soft and easy to digest.

How long do overnight oats with yougurt need to sit?

Raw oats in yogurt need to sit for at least six hours in order to fully soak up the liquid and become soft. For best results, giving them an overnight soak is preferable.

Can I heat up overnight oats with yogurt?

I don’t recommend heating it up, as overnight oat recipes taste better cold. However, if you prefer to serve it warm, the best way to do so is to microwave it in 30-second intervals, making sure to stir after each interval until it reaches your desired temperature.

How long do overnight oatmeal with yogurt last?

Overnight oats with vanilla yogurt will last for up to four days if stored in an airtight jar or container in the fridge.

Can you freeze overnight oats with yogurt?

Yes, technically, you can freeze refrigerator oatmeal with yogurt. However, I don’t recommend freezing this recipe, as the taste and texture are best when refrigerated. Instead of freezing, I recommend making smaller, individual servings if you think you cannot consume an entire recipe within about four days.

Can I make this recipe using steel cut oats?

I don’t recommend substituting steel-cut oats, as I found that they don’t soften up as well as regular oats. If you want to make overnight steel-cut oats with yogurt, you can make my Overnight Steel Cut Oats recipe and add in vanilla yogurt once the oats are cooked.

Other Breakfast Porridge Recipes

Make-ahead breakfasts like this refrigerator yogurt oatmeal are a perfect option for busy mornings, as they’re quick, filling, nutritious, and tasty. If you’re looking for more easy, healthy breakfast ideas, browse the links below for inspiration: 

If you try this Overnight Oats in Yogurt recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Refrigerator oats with yogurt in a bowl with fruit from the top view.
Print

Overnight Oats with Yogurt Recipe

This Overnight Oats with Yogurt recipe is a quick, nutritious, and high-protein breakfast that's easy to add to your weekly meal plan. Simply combine the ingredients, let them soak overnight, and enjoy in the morning! Plus, this basic recipe pairs perfectly with a variety of different toppings, making it easily customizable to suit your preferences.
Course Breakfast
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 5 minutes
Servings 2
Calories 203kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Vanilla Yogurt or Greek Vanilla Yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons honey or maple syrup more to taste
  • 1 cup water or milk of your choice
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • 1 ½ cups old-fashioned rolled oats

Optional Toppings:

  • ½ cup fresh fruit such as fresh berries
  • A handful of nuts or a few tablespoons of nut butter
  • Granola

Instructions

  • Combine the ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, whisk together vanilla yogurt, honey, and water until well combined.
  • Stir in the oats: Stir in the rolled oats and ground cinnamon (if using) and mix until fully incorporated.
  • Cover and rest: Cover with plastic wrap or a tight-fitting lid and place in the refrigerator for at least 6 hours or overnight.
  • Stir: In the morning, give it a quick stir.
  • Garnish and serve: Divide the overnight yogurt oats into bowls (or jars) and, if preferred, garnish them with your favorite toppings and a drizzle of honey.

Video

Notes

  • Yogurt: You can make your own vanilla yogurt or buy any of your favorite yogurt brands from the grocery store to make this recipe. You can also use your favorite fruit flavored yogurt in this recipe. 
  • Oats: You can make this recipe with instant oats, but I do not recommend using steel-cut oats as they do not soften properly even after a whole night in the fridge.
  • Store: Store in an airtight container or jar in the fridge for up to four days.
  • Meal prep: If you are making the refrigerator oatmeal as a part of your weekly meal prep, you can easily multiply this recipe. As a general rule, my go-to overnight oats ratio with yogurt and water is 1 ½ cups rolled oats, 1 cup yogurt, and 1 cup water (or any milk of your choice.)
  • Calorie info: Calorie information below does not include the optional toppings.

Nutrition

Calories: 203kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 91mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 41g | Vitamin A: 233IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 222mg | Iron: 0.4mg

The post Overnight Oats with Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/overnight-oats-with-yogurt/feed/ 4
Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/#respond Tue, 27 Dec 2022 17:00:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63453 A party wouldn’t be a party without at least one easy appetizer, and here on the blog, we love to share recipes for party foods that are just as fun to eat as they are delicious. If you’re gearing up to host a party and are in need of some recipe inspiration, look no further than my collection of recipes for New Year’s Appetizers and Game Day Recipes.  Ingredients As...

The post Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
A party wouldn’t be a party without at least one easy appetizer, and here on the blog, we love to share recipes for party foods that are just as fun to eat as they are delicious. If you’re gearing up to host a party and are in need of some recipe inspiration, look no further than my collection of recipes for New Year’s Appetizers and Game Day Recipes

Crispy cheese sticks served on a plate with tomato sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

As the name suggests, the only ingredient you need for this air fryer frozen cheese sticks recipe is a box of your favorite frozen mozzarella sticks! If you love to dunk your mozzarella sticks, feel free to also include your favorite dipping sauce on your shopping list.

Frozen breaded cheese sticks on a plate from the top view.

If you’ve purchased frozen mozzarella sticks before, you’ve probably noticed that stores often carry various brands in the frozen foods section. I personally love the Trader Joe’s mozzarella sticks, but many store brands also make this frozen snack, such as Kroger, Costco, Publix, Member’s Mark (Sam’s Club’s brand), and Market Pantry (Target’s brand). Other popular brands you might find at your local grocery store include Morning Star, Snapps, Feel Good Foods, Nathan’s, Crav’n, Petite Cuisine, and Farm Rich mozzarella sticks. 

I have tried many of these brands in the past and have gotten similar results, so as long as you get the basic mozzarella cheese sticks, they are pretty much the same.

Another well-known brand that makes frozen, cheesy snacks is Bosco Sticks. However, it’s important to note that Bosco Sticks are actually breadsticks, not battered or bread crumb mozzarella sticks. If you purchased Bosco Sticks, I recommend following the package instructions for cooking rather than following these air fryer instructions for mozzarella sticks. 

How to Air Fry Frozen Cheese Sticks

It only takes 10 minutes and an air fryer to transform frozen, store-bought mozzarella sticks into a classic, delicious snack that no one can resist. If you’re wondering how to cook frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, I have all the answers right here.

So, to cook frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, simply:

  1. Preheat the air fryer: Set your air fryer to 360 degrees F (183 degrees C).
Two images showing how to make frozen mozzarella sticks in air fryer.
  1. Place frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer: Arrange the mozzarella sticks in the preheated air fryer basket (be careful, it’s hot!), making sure they remain in a single layer. 
  2. Air fry frozen mozzarella sticks: Air fry the cheese sticks for 4 minutes. Carefully flip them over and cook for another 1-2 minutes or until they are crispy golden brown and still holding their shape. A few may open up slightly. 
  3. Remove from the air fryer and serve: Remove the mozz sticks from the air fryer and arrange them on a serving plate. Serve with your dipping sauce of choice, if desired. 

Serving Suggestions

If you’re a sauce fanatic, these air fried cheese sticks are the ideal tasty snack to dunk into a variety of dipping sauces. From your favorite marinara sauce to zesty BBQ sauce and ranch, you’ll find that they pair beautifully with whatever tasty dips you choose. If you’re not a sauce lover, or if your kids prefer them plain, you can rest assured that they taste great as-is. 

If you’re in need of a sauce recipe to pair as a side dish with your frozen mozzarella sticks recipe, try my Basil and Tomato Sauce or this yummy and easy Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers

If your air fryer cheese sticks need to be revived a little bit, you can easily pop them back in the air fryer to reheat them. You can also store your leftovers to enjoy the next day. Here are a few tips:

  • Store: Store your fried mozzarella sticks in an airtight container with a lid in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • Reheat: To reheat mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, set your air fryer to 360 degrees F and cook the mozzarella sticks for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through. Keep a close eye on them as they reheat, as they may split open as the cheese melts if you heat them for too long. 

Expert Tips

While this is a pretty straightforward recipe, I’ve put together a few additional tips to help you achieve a crispy, perfectly gooey texture without much trial and error.

  • No need to thaw: The best part of cooking frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer is that you can cook them straight from the freezer without needing to thaw them first. Just make sure to watch carefully as they fry because the cook time might differ slightly based on the air fryer brand you are using. Mine is the Instant Pot brand (affiliate link), which is a large air fryer (5.7 Q), and I find that 6-8 minutes of cook time is the sweet spot. The best way to know is to use this recipe as a starting point, test it with a few frozen cheese sticks, and adjust the time accordingly.
  • Make sure to flip them while cooking: Flipping your frozen air fryer mozzarella sticks halfway through ensures that they cook evenly, and it will also help you gauge their doneness. If they’re starting to split open or leak melty cheese during the halfway-through mark, they might be done. Use your judgment- they’ll taste great either way! 
  • No need to spray the basket with cooking spray: The gooey mozzarella sticks likely won’t stick to your air fryer, even without oil, so don’t feel like you need to spray the basket with oil spray or brush with olive oil. 
  • Air fry mozzarella sticks right before serving: Breaded mozzarella sticks in air fryer are fantastic when piping hot but not so great when cold. For best results, make sure to cook them right before you intend to serve them. 
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When arranging them in the basket, make sure they remain in an even layer so they cook evenly. My air fryer basket fits 12 sticks in a single layer, but if you have a smaller air fryer basket, you may need to cook them in smaller batches.

FAQs

Can I cook frozen mozzarella sticks in an air fryer?

Yes, you can. I find that the best way to cook frozen mozzarella sticks is in the air fryer because it’s much quicker than cooking them in a conventional oven. However, since they cook so quickly, check your mozzarella sticks for doneness halfway through the cooking process (the air fryer time for frozen mozzarella sticks is 6-8 minutes).

How long and what temperature do you cook mozzarella sticks in the air fryer?

I’ve found that the best temperature for cooking frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer is 360 degrees F, as a hotter air fryer temp for mozzarella sticks may make the sticks split open. Twelve frozen mozzarella sticks should cook in a 360-degree air fryer for a total time of 6-8 mins.

How to make sure cheese doesn’t ooze out of the mozzarella sticks?

One way to prevent your mozzarella sticks from splitting open and oozing gooey cheese during the cooking process is to cook them at a lower temperature, such as 360 degrees F. Since they cook so quickly, it also helps to keep an eye on them. I recommend flipping them halfway through cooking (after around 4 minutes) to gauge their doneness.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

Show that trusty air fryer some love and learn a few new air fryer recipes! This little appliance can do everything from party snacks like air fryer pizza rolls to healthier options like air-fried veggies. If you loved this simple, 10-minute Frozen Cheese Sticks in Air Fryer recipe, you’re sure to enjoy these other quick and easy air fryer recipes:

If you try this Frozen Mozzarella Cheese Sticks in Air Fryer recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A person pulling apart an air fried cheese stick from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks Recipe

These Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks are a no-fuss, 10-minute appetizer that's the perfect party finger food. Serve these cheesy, crispy mozzarella sticks with your favorite dipping sauce for a Game Day party, a New Year's Eve celebration, or anytime you need a quick, crowd-favorite snack.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 9 minutes
Servings 12 cheese sticks
Calories 80kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 frozen mozzarella sticks

Optional:

  • Dipping sauce

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 360 degrees F. (183 C).
  • Place cheese sticks in the air fryer: Carefully place frozen mozzarella sticks in the preheated air fryer basket in a single layer.
  • Cook: Air fry frozen cheese sticks for 4 minutes. Flip them, and air fry them for another 2-3 minutes or until they are golden brown and crispy. Ideally, you want to ensure they hold their shape, but a few might open up.
  • Remove and serve: Carefully remove them from the air fryer onto a plate and serve with your choice of dipping sauce on the side.

Notes

  • Optional dipping sauce: If you’re in need of a sauce recipe to pair as a side dish with your frozen mozzarella sticks recipe, try my Basil and Tomato Sauce or this yummy and easy Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing. Alternatively, you can serve it with your favorite store-bought marinara sauce.
  • Gauging doneness: Do not skip the step where you flip them halfway through, as this step is important to gauge doneness. At that stage, if you see them opening up too fast, you might have to shorten the timing. 
  • Cook time: The results may differ depending on the air fryer you are using. For best results, use this recipe as a starting point, test it with a few frozen mozzarella sticks, and adjust the time accordingly.
  • Store: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • Reheat: To reheat mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, set it to 360 degrees F and cook the cheese sticks for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through. Keep a close eye on them as they reheat, as they may split open if you heat them for too long.
  • The calorie information below is for one cheese stick, and it is intended as a general reference. The calorie and nutrition information may differ based on the brand of mozzarella sticks you are using.

Nutrition

Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 220mg | Vitamin A: 4IU | Calcium: 20mg

The post Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/feed/ 0
Baked Goat Cheese Salad https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/#comments Thu, 22 Dec 2022 22:13:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=534 Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t get enough goat cheese recipes like this, you’ll adore my other goat cheese-inspired dishes, such as Goat Cheese and Spinach Stuffed Chicken and Goat Cheese Quiche. Ingredients To make this recipe for goat cheese salad, you’ll need two sets of ingredients: How to Make Warm Goat Cheese Salad No one...

The post Baked Goat Cheese Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Creamy, earthy, and fresh, this warmed goat cheese salad is a restaurant-quality dish that comes together easily. If you can’t get enough goat cheese recipes like this, you’ll adore my other goat cheese-inspired dishes, such as Goat Cheese and Spinach Stuffed Chicken and Goat Cheese Quiche.

Green salad topped off with warm goat cheese rounds from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this recipe for goat cheese salad, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe in small portions from the top view.
  • Goat cheese disks (or balls): For the goat cheese croutons, gather fresh thyme, parsley, panko breadcrumbs, garlic powder, an egg, Dijon mustard, kosher salt, black pepper, and an 8-oz. log of fresh goat cheese.
  • For the Salad and the vinaigrette: For the salad and warm goat cheese salad dressing, gather mixed salad greens, olive oil, red wine vinegar, Dijon mustard, shallot, kosher salt, and black pepper.

How to Slice Goat Cheese with Dental Floss?

If you’ve ever tried to cut goat cheese with a knife, you know how difficult it can be. Instead, I recommend using dental floss or kitchen twine to cut perfect, mess-free slices every time. Just be sure to use unflavored dental floss to avoid giving it an unwanted taste. Also, it is best to do this while it is still cold, as goat cheese that is at room temperature will be hard to slice.

Person showing how to slice a log of goat cheese with dental floss.
  1. Line up dental floss: Slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Remember that this recipe calls for eight equal pieces of an 8-oz. goat cheese log.
  2. Lift and twist: Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log.

How to Make Warm Goat Cheese Salad

No one can resist baked goat cheese recipes as easy as this one. Equal parts effortless and tasty, this salad recipe comes together in just 30 minutes (plus the resting time.)

  1. Prepare the baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
Dipping station for baked chevre balls with small bowls.
  1. Prep the dipping station: Place the fresh herbs on a small, shallow plate, and mix them until thoroughly combined. Then, combine panko crumbs and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and black pepper in a separate small bowl. Set all three mixtures aside.
person making goat cheese medallions dipped in herbs, egg and panko breadcrumbs.
  1. Make the cheese balls: Roll each of your eight goat cheese medallions into a small disk (or ball). Then, roll each one into the herb mixture, evenly coating their exteriors. Then, roll the balls into the egg-mustard mixture and let the excess liquid drip. Finally, roll the balls into the panko mixture. Gently press the bread crumbs into the balls to ensure an even coating.
  2. Freeze the goat cheese: Transfer the breadcrumb-coated goat cheese to the prepared baking sheet, and place it in the freezer for 30 minutes. 
a collage of images showing how to make baked goat cheese salad.
  1. Mix the salad dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, salt, and black pepper.
  2. Make the baked chevre: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Once heated, transfer the tray of goat cheese balls from the freezer to the oven, and bake for 8-10 minutes.
  3. Mix the salad: Place the salad greens in a large bowl, drizzle them with the prepared dressing, and toss until evenly mixed.
  4. Serve: Divide the salad among four salad plates. Place two baked goat cheese rounds on top of each salad.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

Making this recipe ahead of time is the easiest way to make busy weeknights a breeze. With such simple prep and storage, it’s no wonder why warm goat cheese salad is a fan-favorite side.

  • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • Store: To store your baked goat cheese salad, transfer your leftovers into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.
Salad placed on two small plates and served with wine on the side.

Expert Tips

This restaurant-quality salad is as easy to make as it is delicious to eat. With these foolproof pointers, you can make it without hassle or stress—just like a master chef!

  • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
  • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
  • Broil until golden brown: To give your goat cheese rounds extra crispiness, broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.

What Goes Well With Goat Cheese Salad?

Almost any of my foolproof main dishes would make a delectable pair with this warm goat cheese appetizer. Below are a few of my favorites to serve alongside this five-star side.

  • Roast Beef Tenderloin: Tender beef and toasted goat cheese is a match made in heaven. Serve it as a side salad for a photo-ready spread for any special occasion.
  • Turkey Tenderloin: Pair this goat cheese salad recipe with juicy turkey tenderloin, and you’ll have a mouthwatering menu ready for anything, from a Friendsgiving potluck to a weeknight meal.
  • Cream of Chestnut Soup: If you’d rather have a vegetarian meal, serve it with soup on the side. This French Cuisine-inspired chestnut soup would pair beautifully with this simple chevre salad for a delicious and visually impressive lunch or dinner.

FAQs

How long do you bake goat’s cheese for?

I recommend baking goat’s cheese for 10-12 minutes at 400 degrees F.

Can you bake goat cheese?

Yes! Baking goat cheese is a great idea because it is hard enough to hold its shape in the oven when baked on its own. However, you could also mix this traditional cheese with other cheeses, like Parmesan, cheddar cheese, and cream cheese, to make delicious recipes like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip.

Should I serve this salad warm or cold?

The best goat cheese for this salad comes straight from the oven, as the cheese balls will be the creamiest at this point. However, you can also serve this salad cold if you prefer your goat cheese to have a firmer texture.

What is the best cheese for salads?

Because of their rich and robust flavors, the best cheeses for salads include feta cheese, goat cheese, blue cheese, and Parmesan cheese.

Other Restaurant Quality Salad Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Baked goat cheese salad on a small plate with a fork on the side.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Salad Recipe

This Baked Goat Cheese Salad is a French-bistro style salad that is ideal as a light lunch or a side salad with the main dish. Served warm, most of the components of this recipe can be made ahead and then it can be assembled right before serving.
Course Salad
Cuisine American/French
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 175kcal

Ingredients

For The Baked Goat Cheese Rounds

  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme chopped
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 log goat cheese 8oz. – sliced into 8 pieces

For The Salad & Salad Dressing

  • 3 tablespoons extra-virgin olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon dijon mustard
  • 1 small shallot chopped (about 2 tablespoons)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 6 cup mixed salad greens 7 oz.

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh herbs on a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Divide goat cheese into 8 equal portions. You can use a knife, but I find that it is easier to use dental floss or kitchen twine. To do so, slide a piece of dental floss under the goat cheese log and line it up to where you want to make your first slice. Holding the ends of the dental floss with either hand, pull the string straight up and cross them in the center to cut through the cheese log. Roll each piece into a small disk (or a ball).
  • Roll each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), followed by the panko mixture pressing gently to ensure that it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, make the salad dressing by whisking together olive oil, red wine vinegar, shallot, and salt and pepper.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes.
  • To assemble the salad, place salad greens in a salad bowl and drizzle them with the dressing. Give it a big toss.
  • Divide the salad amongst four salad plates and top each plate with two baked goat cheese balls.

Notes

  • Let excess egg drip: Only one egg is necessary to coat all eight of your goat cheese balls—as long as you let the excess egg mixture drip after rolling each ball in it. However, if you need more dipping mixture, you may add another egg.
  • Bake right before serving: I recommend baking your goat cheese balls just before serving them. This way, the insides of your rounds will be creamy and warm. If you wait too long before serving, the goat cheese will solidify and lose its creaminess.
  • Broil until golden brown: If you want, you can broil them for one minute or until golden brown. Just be sure to keep an eye on them so that they don’t burn.
  • Make ahead: You can make this salad recipe up to one week in advance. Simply roll the goat cheese balls, coat them in the herb, egg, and breadcrumb mixtures, and arrange them on a sheet pan. Then, cover them with plastic wrap and place them in the freezer for about 30 minutes. Once frozen, place goat cheese rounds in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag. Remove as much air as possible, then place the bag back in the freezer. Remove the balls just before serving, and bake them in a 400-degree F. oven for 10-12 minutes.
  • Store: To store the leftovers, transfer them into an airtight container in the fridge. I recommend warming the goat cheese balls (not the salad greens!) just before eating your leftovers. However, you can also enjoy your salad cold.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 175kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 574mg | Potassium: 200mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 998IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Baked Goat Cheese Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese-salad/feed/ 1
Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/ https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/#comments Thu, 15 Dec 2022 22:08:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11704 If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board, or to perfect light dessert to serve after dinner, these mascarpone stuffed dates are just what you need. They are easy, quick, and addictively delicious! Need more appetizer inspiration? Be sure to also check out our Bread Dipping Oil, Cheese Apple Appetizer, and Hot Goat Cheese Dip. Ingredients To make...

The post Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board, or to perfect light dessert to serve after dinner, these mascarpone stuffed dates are just what you need. They are easy, quick, and addictively delicious!

Need more appetizer inspiration? Be sure to also check out our Bread Dipping Oil, Cheese Apple Appetizer, and Hot Goat Cheese Dip.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on a plate topped off with pomegranate seeds and nuts.

Ingredients

To make this stuffed dates recipe, you will need dates, mascarpone cheese, chopped nuts (I used a combination of walnuts and pistachios), pomegranate seeds, and honey.

When buying dates, look for fresh, plump, and large Medjool dates that are usually sold in the refrigerated section of your grocery store. You can buy pitted dates or remove the pits yourself.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in small bowls from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins:

  • Cheese: You can substitute mascarpone with any spreadable soft cheese. My favorite ones are goat cheese and cream cheese. Alternatively, you can stir in ½ teaspoon of vanilla extract in the cheese to make it even more flavorful.
  • Nuts: You can use any nuts here. I like to stuff my dates with walnuts and salty pistachios, but almonds, hazelnuts, cashews, and pecans would also be lovely. If you have the time, roast your nuts in a skillet for a few minutes for extra flavor.
  • Fruit: Pomegranate arils are wonderful to add a pop of color, but you can also use candied and chopped oranges or dried cranberries.
  • Honey: You can use maple syrup or agave nectar. Or, if you want to make it sugar-free, omit using any sweeteners.
  • Flaky Sea Salt: This is optional, but if you want to take it up a notch, you can sprinkle each mascarpone-filled date with a little flaky sea salt (such as Maldon salt (affiliate link))

How To Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps to making this finger dessert. However, I recommend getting all your ingredients ready before starting so that you can quickly put them together.

Person showing how to stuff dates with mascarpone cheese in a collage of images.
  1. Remove pits: Using a paring knife, slice dates lengthwise, being careful not to cut them all the way through. Remove the pits and set them aside.
  2. Stuff with cheese: Using a small spoon, stuff each pitted date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese. 
person showing how to stuff dates with walnuts and pistachios.
  1. Garnish: Dip the filled dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so that they will stick to the cheese.
  2. Sprinkle: Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts or pistachios. Set them onto a plate.
  3. Drizzle: Drizzle the mascarpone-stuffed dates with a tablespoon of honey. Serve!

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this sweet stuffed dates recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it also stores well. Here’s how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with cheese, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh for up to 3 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container in the fridge. They make the perfect snack or afternoon pick-me-up.

Expert Tips:

This easy recipe is pretty self-explanatory, but here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try.

  • Room temperature: If you make these ahead of time, I recommend bringing them out 30 minutes before serving, as they taste best when they are served at room temperature.
  • Piping bag: You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. And if you decide to make a larger amount, I recommend using piping or a pastry bag (or a Ziploc bag) instead of using a spoon. Simply fill your bag with mascarpone and fill each date one by one.
  • Mascarpone filling: I find that a light drizzle of honey is all you need to sweeten the already sweet dates. However, if you prefer yours sweeter, you can mix honey with mascarpone and use that honey mascarpone mixture as your filling.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this stuffed dates dessert recipe was made by first drizzling dates with a tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil and then warming them up in a 350-degree preheated oven for 10 minutes. If you prefer to serve them warm, you can follow those steps. However, after literally making this recipe for over 10 years, I feel like the room-temperature stuffed dates are just as good.
Stuffed dates with mascarpone and walnuts on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What cheese pairs with dates?

Any mild-flavored soft and spreadable cheeses would pair well with dates. Goat cheese, mascarpone, and cream cheese are a few to name.

What can you stuff inside dates?

You can stuff dates with nuts, nut butters, soft cheese, and chocolate.

Can you put dates in the oven?

Yes, you can. Simply pop them in a preheated 350 F oven for 10 minutes to warm them up.

Other Party Appetizers You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mascarpone Stuffed Date recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Mascarpone Stuffed Dates Recipe

These Mascarpone Stuffed Medjool Dates are topped off with walnuts and pomegranate seeds and drizzled with honey. This easy recipe takes less than 20 minutes to put them all together. These are the perfect little "finger" desserts to impress your guests or even to satisfy your own sweet tooth.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 12 Dates
Calories 134kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 Medjool Dates
  • ½ cup Mascarpone cheese
  • 4 tablespoons pomegranate seeds
  • 3 tablespoons walnuts or pistachios (or both) chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons honey
  • ¼ teaspoon flaky seas such as Maldon salt, optional

Instructions

  • Cut each date lengthwise making sure to not to cut them all the way through. Remove and discard pits.
  • Fill each date with a teaspoon mascarpone cheese. Dip the stuffed dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so they will stick to the cheese.
  • Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts and/or pistachios. Set them on a plate.
  • Drizzle them with honey and if using, sprinkle them with some flaky sea salt. Serve!

Notes

  • I recommend prepping all the ingredients before starting to assemble. I usually put each ingredient in a small bowl so that I can put them together quickly.
  • You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. If making a larger batch, you can fill a piping bag with mascarpone to help you stuff dates faster.
  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with mascarpone, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this recipe warmed the dates in the oven before stuffing them. In this updated version, I decided to skip that step as I think it is an extra step that is not necessary. However, if you prefer that version, feel free to follow the steps below:
    • Preheat the oven to 350 °F. Place dates on a small baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.
    • Bake for 10-12 minutes in the oven. Let cool on the counter for 5 minutes. Fill each date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese.
    • Top the dates with honey, pomegranate seeds, and walnuts. Sprinkle them with flaky sea salt. Serve!
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 12Dates | Calories: 134kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 191mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/feed/ 14
Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/#respond Wed, 07 Dec 2022 16:43:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62683 I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes the perfect thick, creamy, and healthy base for countless delicious dips and dressings. No wonder why my Yogurt Salad Dressing is one of the most popular recipes on the blog! If you like healthy dip recipes with Greek yogurt, you’ll love my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip, Blue Cheese Dressing Without...

The post Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

I always keep a tub of Greek yogurt stocked in my fridge, but not only for breakfast! Greek yogurt makes the perfect thick, creamy, and healthy base for countless delicious dips and dressings. No wonder why my Yogurt Salad Dressing is one of the most popular recipes on the blog!

If you like healthy dip recipes with Greek yogurt, you’ll love my Greek Yogurt Fruit Dip, Blue Cheese Dressing Without Sour Cream, Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Turkish Aubergine Dip

A dip with a greek yogurt base served with veggies from the top view.

Ingredients

You don’t need a lot of fancy ingredients to make this homemade Greek yogurt ranch dip recipe. In fact, you likely already have the ingredients stocked in your fridge and spice cabinet. We’re using a combination of garlic and onion powder to achieve that classic ranch flavor, and adding a hint of lemon juice ramps up the tang. 

Ingredients for homemade greek yogurt ranch in bowls from the top view.

To make this Greek yogurt dip, you’ll need plain Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt, lemon juice, and freshly chopped chives (or chopped green onion). 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you don’t have all the ingredients, don’t run to the store just yet. This yogurt veggie dip is very forgiving when it comes to substitutions, so feel free to swap similar ingredients to make it your own. Here are a few suggestions: 

  • Yogurt: I prefer to use low-fat or non-fat Greek yogurt to make a guilt-free and low calorie dip for veggies. You can also make a plain yogurt dip by swapping the Greek yogurt for low-fat or non-fat plain yogurt, but keep in mind that it will have a thinner (but just as tasty) consistency. I sometimes use plain yogurt in my Yogurt Dill Sauce for a lower-calorie version, which turns out great. 
  • Ranch seasoning: Our homemade ranch seasoning with Greek yogurt combines garlic powder, onion powder, and salt. You can stick to this recipe to keep it super basic or throw in some dried herbs (or fresh herbs) to amp up the flavor. I recommend adding ¼ teaspoon each of dried chives, dried dill, and dried parsley per cup of ranch Greek yogurt dip. 
  • 2-ingredient option: While the homemade ranch seasoning is a healthy, preservative-free, and low-sodium alternative to traditional ranch seasoning, you can still use a premade seasoning mix, such as a Hidden Valley ranch packet, if you’re in a pinch. To make a Hidden Valley ranch dip with Greek yogurt, I recommend using 2 teaspoons of seasoning per cup of yogurt. 
  • Chives: Chives add a mild, onion-like flavor that complements this healthy ranch dip, but they can be hard to find at the grocery store. If you can’t find fresh chives, you can use freshly chopped green onions or fresh dill instead.
  • Add a drizzle of olive oil: For a special presentation, add a drizzle of olive oil to top off your healthy veggie dip. 

How to Make Ranch Dip with Greek Yogurt

You’ll never need to buy ranch dressing from the store once you learn how quick and easy it is to whip it up at home. Plus, this low fat veggie dip is healthy, inexpensive, and (in my opinion) tastier than any store-bought dip. To make this Greek yogurt dip, simply: 

A person making ranch yogurt dip in a bowl from the top view.
  1. Add ingredients to a bowl: In a small bowl, add Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and lemon juice. 
  2. Combine and serve: Use a whisk to mix the ingredients until smooth and fully combined. Garnish your easy Greek yogurt dip with freshly chopped chives or green onions, and serve. 

How to Serve

You can serve this homemade ranch dip with Greek yogurt anywhere you’d normally serve ranch dip. It’s the perfect accompaniment to a colorful veggie tray for a healthy snack, but it’s just as delicious when paired with fun, handheld party foods. Feel free to get creative, but here are some serving suggestions: 

  • Serve it with your favorite veggies: Ranch dip and fresh veggies? A match made in heaven! Whip up a large bowl of this vegetable dip as a healthy dip for carrots, cucumbers, celery sticks, and peppers. This recipe also makes the perfect Greek yogurt chip dip for all your favorite potato chips.
  • Make it a part of your cheese board: Serve it as a part of your meat and cheese board, along with pita bread or crackers.
  • Pair it with party foods: From chicken wings to burgers, this low-calorie ranch dip is the ideal accompaniment to all your favorite Game Day Foods. If you’re looking for recipe ideas, these Slow Roasted Chicken Wings are always a hit at parties, and this Spinach Cheese Quesadilla is a true crowd-pleaser. You also can’t go wrong with serving it as a dipping sauce for fries (especially if you have kids). 
A person dipping a cucumber into a veggie dip from the side view.

How to Store?

If you have leftover ranch yogurt dip or wish to make it ahead of time, you can easily store it in an airtight glass or plastic container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. 

Just make sure to give it a stir before serving, as the ingredients tend to separate as they sit. If your yogurt dip for vegetables appears too watery after stirring, you can add a tablespoon or two of Greek yogurt to return it to a creamy consistency.

FAQs

What is the difference between yogurt and Greek yogurt?

The main difference between regular yogurt and Greek yogurt is its consistency. Greek yogurt is strained to remove the liquid remains of milk (also known as whey), which gives it a thick consistency. Regular yogurt contains whey and has a thinner consistency.

Can I substitute yogurt for sour cream in ranch dressing?

Yes, you can. Yogurt is a great substitute for sour cream in Greek yogurt-based dips because it provides a similar creaminess but is lower in calories and total fat. You can make a delicious, homemade Greek ranch dip by combining Greek yogurt with a half teaspoon of onion powder, a tablespoon of garlic powder, and a little sea salt and lemon juice.

How can I turn this Greek yogurt dip into a salad dressing?

To turn it into a homemade Greek yogurt ranch dressing, you can add 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 tablespoons of lemon juice. If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Other Greek Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

Greek yogurt is a staple ingredient in many of my recipes because it’s healthy, delicious, and versatile. From sweet to savory recipes, Greek yogurt does it all! If you’re a yogurt fanatic like me, or if you’re trying to finish off that tub of yogurt in your fridge, you need to try these easy recipes:

If you try this Veggie Dip with Greek Yogurt recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A dip with yogurt and spices in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip Recipe

This Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip is made with a few simple, healthy ingredients for a "skinny" version of the classic, store-bought ranch dressing. Serve this creamy, zesty dip with veggies for a healthy snack, or bring it to your next Game Day party as a dip for chips, wings, or any of your favorite party foods.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Plain Greek Yogurt*
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon onion powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon chives or chopped green onion

Instructions

  • Add ingredients to a bowl: Place Greek yogurt, garlic powder, onion powder, kosher salt and lemon juice in a bowl.
  • Combine: Whisk until fully combined. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • Serve: Transfer into a bowl and garnish with chives (or scallions). Serve.

Notes

  • Yogurt: This healthy Greek yogurt ranch recipe would work with any type of plain Greek yogurt, including full-fat, low-fat, or non-fat varieties. You can also use plain yogurt, but be aware that it will have a thinner consistency. 
  • Storage: You can store leftovers of this yogurt dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3-4 days. Be sure to stir it before serving. If it is too thin, you can stir in a tablespoon of Greek yogurt to thicken it.
  • Make it a salad dressing: You can turn this dip into a yogurt ranch salad dressing by adding 2 tablespoons of olive oil and 2 (additional) tablespoons of lemon juice.  If need be, you can thin it out (to make it pourable) by whisking in a few tablespoons of water. Be sure to taste it for seasoning and adjust as necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 1261mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 142IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 277mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Greek Yogurt Ranch Dip appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-ranch-dip/feed/ 0
Broccoli Feta Soup https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/ https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/#comments Tue, 29 Nov 2022 20:41:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11028 This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli and Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.

The post Broccoli Feta Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Nothing says fall and winter more than soup season. And this hearty and creamy broccoli feta soup recipe is surely a winner. So, make a big batch, enjoy leftovers throughout the week, or freeze them for longer storage.

And if you enjoy this dish, be sure to check out our Sweet Potato Soup, Turkish Lentil Soup, French Lentil Soup, Pumpkin Ginger Soup, and Carrot Ginger Soup recipes.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with croutons.

Ingredients You Will Need

The ingredient list for this healthy broccoli soup consists of olive oil, onions, celery, garlic cloves, Kosher salt, cracked pepper, large Yukon gold potato, vegetable broth, broccoli crowns, fresh parsley, and feta cheese.

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Chicken Stock: Swap out vegetable broth for Homemade Chicken Broth if you are okay with it not being a vegetarian soup.
  • Fresh Herbs: Compliment the broccoli and feta with a small handful of fresh mint or fresh dill instead of parsley.
  • Make it more green and nutritious by adding a cup of baby spinach in the last 10 minutes before pureeing the soup.
  • Cheese: Top it with your favorite cheese, like mozzarella, cheddar, or freshly grated Parmesan cheese.
  • Seasoning: Finish with a sprinkle of red pepper flakes, sumac, a squeeze of lemon juice, or a drizzle of olive oil or heavy cream.
  • Vegan: Omit the feta cheese or swap it out for vegan feta.

How to Make This Broccoli and Feta Soup?

Broccoli feta cheese soup comes together in less than 30 minutes after a quick and gentle simmer on the stove. Puree right in the same pot, or use a countertop blender to blend in batches. Here’s how to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make cream of broccoli soup.
  1. Saute aromatics: Warm olive oil over medium heat in a Dutch oven or large pot. Add onion and celery, and cook until translucent, about 5-7 minutes. Stir in the cloves of garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  2. Add potatoes: Add potatoes and salt and pepper. Pour in vegetable stock. 
  3. Simmer: Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer and allow it to cook for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  4. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly for 8-10 minutes over medium heat.
Person pureeing and mixing soup in a collage of two images.
  1. Puree: Add the parsley. Then, using an immersion blender, puree the soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender.
  2. Garnish and serve: When ready to serve, ladle into bowls, and garnish with feta crumbles and more parsley.

What To Serve it With?

While you can enjoy this cream of broccoli soup all on its own, there are a few ways to jazz it up. You can try:

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw and Reheat?

What I love the most about this vegetable soup with feta is the fact that it stores well, so you can enjoy the leftovers in the following days. Here is how I store it:

  • Storage: You can store leftovers of this broccoli soup with feta in an airtight container for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan to freeze this soup, I recommend not adding the feta to the soup, as dairy doesn’t freeze well.  Follow the recipe as written, cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the frozen broccoli soup overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles.
Bowls of healthy broccoli soup garnished with parsley and croutons from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Use an immersion blender. This way, you can puree this feta cheese soup in the same pot with no extra dishes. This Kitchen Aid stick blender (affiliate link)  is the one I own and recommend.
  • If you do not own an immersion blender, you can blend the soup in a blender or food processor. However, whichever gadget you use, fill it about halfway full and be extra careful when blending hot liquids.
  • Puree to desired consistency. Keep a few chunks of broccoli intact or puree until silky smooth.
  • Mash with a potato masher. Rather than blending, mash the soup with a potato masher to keep it chunky.

FAQs

Is broccoli soup healthy?

Yes, it is. As the main ingredient in this soup, broccoli has a long list of health benefits. It is packed with minerals, vitamins, and antioxidant properties. Plus, this soup is packed with other good-for-you ingredients like onions, celery, garlic, and potatoes, which are also recommended as foods that should be in a healthy diet.

Can broccoli cheese soup be frozen?

Yes, this soup freezes well. Omit the feta cheese before freezing, and top with the cheese once thawed, reheated, and ready to serve.

Can you put feta in soup?

Yes, you can, but putting it at the end is recommended.

Other Broccoli Recipes You Might Like:

This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Emilie Raffa’s The Clever Cookbook.

Broccoli Feta Soup in a bowl garnished with feta and parsley.
Print

Broccoli Feta Soup Recipe

This vegetarian and gluten-free 30-Minute Broccoli Feta Soup is a lifesaver when you are short on time. It is easy to make and a great way to incorporate vegetables into your diet. Once it is topped off with fresh Italian parsley and feta cheese you end up with a delicious and veggie packed soup that will warm your heart.
Course Soup
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 cups
Calories 135kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 2 stalks celery chopped
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 large Yukon Gold Potato peeled and cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 4 cups low-sodium vegetable stock plus more as needed
  • 6 cups broccoli florets rinsed and drained
  • 1/3 cup Italian parsley rinsed and chopped coarsely – plus more as garnish
  • 1/3 cup feta cheese crumbled – plus more as garnish

Instructions

  • Heat olive oil in a Dutch oven (or any large, heavy bottom pot would work). Add in the onion and celery. Cook until they are soft, 5-7 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Stir in the potatoes, salt, and black pepper. Pour in the vegetable stock. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 10 minutes or until the potatoes are soft.
  • Stir in the broccoli florets and cook briefly, 8-10 minutes, over medium heat.
  • Right before you are ready to puree the soup, add in the chopped parsley.
  • Using a hand blender, puree soup in the pot. Alternatively, you can puree it in batches in a blender. I prefer my soup rustic-style with chunks of broccoli, but if you prefer it to have a smooth texture, then puree it until it has a silky texture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning* if necessary.
  • When ready to serve, ladle some into bowls and garnish with feta crumbles and parsley leaves.

Video

Notes

  • *While we want the soup to be properly seasoned, be sure to taste your feta cheese before adding more.
  • It is optional, but you can finish it with a drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac if you have it.
  • Storage of leftovers: Bring to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Freeze: Follow the recipe as written (except omit using crumbled feta in the end), cool completely, and store it in a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw it overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat a bowlful of soup in the microwave in 30-second intervals, stirring each time in between, or reheat the whole batch on the stovetop over medium heat until bubbling and simmering. Top with feta cheese crumbles and garnish with fresh parsley right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 135kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 949mg | Potassium: 458mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1217IU | Vitamin C: 93mg | Calcium: 99mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Broccoli Feta Soup appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/30-minute-broccoli-and-feta-soup/feed/ 18
Rosemary Mashed Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/rosemary-mashed-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/rosemary-mashed-potatoes/#comments Mon, 31 Oct 2022 19:01:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61277 Potatoes are a classic, crowd-pleasing side dish that everyone looks forward to enjoying during the holidays and throughout the year. Plus, they’re super versatile and are guaranteed to be delicious in all forms. Some of my favorite potato recipes for the holidays include my Layered Mashed Potato Casserole, these Mashed Sweet Potatoes, and my Muffin Tin Potatoes.  Ingredients There’s nothing better during the holiday season than a no-fuss, yet delicious,...

The post Rosemary Mashed Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

Potatoes are a classic, crowd-pleasing side dish that everyone looks forward to enjoying during the holidays and throughout the year. Plus, they’re super versatile and are guaranteed to be delicious in all forms. Some of my favorite potato recipes for the holidays include my Layered Mashed Potato Casserole, these Mashed Sweet Potatoes, and my Muffin Tin Potatoes

Mashed potatoes with garlic and rosemary in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

There’s nothing better during the holiday season than a no-fuss, yet delicious, side dish that requires a few simple ingredients. In fact, you likely already have the ingredients on hand.

Ingredients for potatoes mashed with butter and rosemary from the top view.

To make these garlic rosemary mashed potatoes, gather Yukon Gold potatoes, salt, whole milk (or your milk of choice), unsalted butter, fresh rosemary, fresh garlic cloves, kosher salt, and ground white pepper or black pepper.  

Substitutions

Our fridges and pantries seem to be extra full this time of year, so feel free to make ingredient substitutions to use what you have on hand or to accommodate dietary restrictions. After all, potatoes mixed with lots of butter and rosemary are bound to be good no matter how you make them! 

  • Potatoes: I prefer Yukon Gold potatoes for this recipe because they’re buttery and easy to cook, but red potatoes would also work if you can’t find Yukon Golds. You can also substitute russet potatoes in a pinch. 
  • Milk: The whole milk in this recipe yields a smooth texture and lots of creamy goodness, but you can also substitute half and half or even heavy cream for a rich flavor and extra creaminess. Non-dairy milks like almond milk or oat milk would also do the trick. 
  • Butter: While this recipe requires a lot of dairy, don’t stray away if you’re a vegan or lactose-intolerant! Simply substitute your favorite brand of vegan butter for a non-dairy alternative. 
  • Garlic: If you love a kick of garlic flavor and want to take these mashed potatoes to the next level, you can use roasted garlic in this recipe. Simply follow my recipe for Roasted Garlic (using heads of garlic), or make Air Fryer Roasted Garlic if you’re in a rush. In a pinch, you can also use garlic powder instead. 
  • No fresh rosemary, no problem: To me, the addition of fresh rosemary makes it taste and smell like Christmas, but if you cannot get your hands on fresh rosemary, you can use dried rosemary (1 teaspoon should be sufficient). However, please be aware that the rosemary flavor will be less potent. 

How to Make This Recipe?

These rosemary garlic mashed potatoes are a life-saving side dish, especially during the holidays, because you can whip them up in no time. They require little effort for a big reward! Here’s how to make them:

A person showing how to boil potatoes on the stove from the top view.
  1. Boil the potatoes: Add the cubed and peeled potatoes to a medium saucepan and cover with cold water. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat and add the salt. Cook potatoes for about 15-20 minutes or until fork tender. Drain and place potatoes back in the pot. Set aside. 
  2. Melt the butter: Add the milk and butter to a small saucepan. Cook over medium heat until the butter is melted (no need to bring it to a boil). Turn off the heat, add the rosemary sprigs and garlic, and let it sit for about 10-15 minutes. Keep in mind that the rosemary flavor gets stronger as it steeps. 
  3. Mash the potatoes: While the rosemary is steeping, use a potato masher or a food mill to mash the potatoes until creamy and smooth (or your desired consistency). 
A person adding rosemary infused butter to mashed potatoes on the stove.
  1. Add the milk mixture: Remove the sprigs of rosemary from the milk and melted butter mixture and pour it over the mashed potatoes. Stir until well combined.  
  2. Season: Season the potatoes with salt and pepper, taste, and add another pinch of salt or more ground pepper if needed. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the potatoes to a large bowl, top with chopped rosemary, and serve. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, & Freeze?

If your holiday schedule (or schedule in general) is a bit hectic, you can make this dish ahead of time to relieve some stress on busy days. Simply store it in the fridge until you’re ready to serve, and pop it in the oven to reheat. Here are some tips: 

  • Make ahead & reheat: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance. To store, let the potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe dish (to make for easy reheating), cover it with stretch film, and place it in the fridge. Reheat in a low-heat oven for about 15 minutes, making sure to stir a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
  • Store: The best way to store your garlic and rosemary mashed potatoes is in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. 
  • Freeze: If you made too much or want your potatoes to last longer than a few days, you can store them in the freezer. Make the potatoes, let them cool completely, and store them in an airtight freezer bag or a freezer-safe container for up to one month. 

What to Serve It With

Mashed potatoes provide a buttery flavor and richness that pairs beautifully with a variety of main dishes. Serve them with your favorite protein for a hearty, satisfying meal, or pair them with a vegetarian main for a touch of comfort and creaminess. Here are some suggestions:

  • Chicken: Elevate a simple chicken dish by adding mashed potatoes with rosemary for a restaurant-quality meal. The creaminess of the potatoes pairs so well with my Greek Yogurt Chicken recipe, Chicken Breast Fricassee, and Cornish Game Hens (which is why it is one of my favorite Cornish Hen Side Dishes).
  • Beef: Potatoes and beef are a classic combo! Make my Brown Gravy Recipe and drizzle it over mashed potatoes for a next-level side dish. Or, serve it with a good old steak dinner, my Pressure Cooker Roast or for an international flair, try serving my Kofte Recipe over a generous bed of mashed potatoes.
  • Turkey: Would a Thanksgiving table be complete without turkey and mashed potatoes? I think not. Serve this rosemary mashed potato recipe with my Healthy Turkey Meatloaf for a year-round dinner, or serve them during the holidays alongside Turkey Tenderloin, Turkey Legs, or Air Fried Turkey Drumsticks. 
  • Vegetarian: If you’d like your vegetarian meal to be a bit more hearty and filling, don’t be afraid to throw some potatoes on the plate. Some of my favorite vegetarian recipes are Vegan Stuffed Eggplant and Cauliflower Coconut Curry

Expert Tips

Do you want to know how to make your mashed potatoes taste as if they came from a 5-star restaurant? Below, I compiled a few expert tips that make all the difference when it comes to elevating the flavor and texture of your recipe. 

  • Fresh rosemary: The fresh, earthy flavor notes of the rosemary blend so well with the garlic and butter in this recipe. Just keep in mind that the longer the rosemary “steeps” in the butter and milk, the stronger the flavor. Because of this, I don’t recommend letting the rosemary steep overnight. I found that the sweet spot is only 10-15 minutes. 
  • Salted water: Always make sure to salt your water when boiling potatoes, as it seasons the potatoes and contributes to a creamy texture. I recommend adding 1-2 tablespoons of salt to the water when boiling. 
  • Consistency/texture: My favorite tool to use for mashed potatoes is a potato masher, but a food mill, potato ricer, or hand mixer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture. I recommend sticking to handheld tools and avoiding tools like food processors or blenders, as they result in a gummy texture. 
  • Double the recipe: If you’re serving this recipe for a holiday dinner or a large crowd, feel free to double the recipe as many times as you need. You can even make a little extra for those who may want a second helping (who wouldn’t?). 
  • Taste for seasoning: Mashed potatoes aren’t nearly as good when they’re bland, so make sure to taste for seasoning before serving. Feel free to add in some extra salt or ground pepper to enhance the flavors of the dish.

FAQs

Does rosemary go with mashed potatoes?

Rosemary is a great pairing with mashed potatoes, especially with the addition of lots of butter and garlic for a ton of flavor. Let the rosemary steep for a few minutes on the stove in a mixture of butter, milk, and garlic to let its earthy flavors infuse into the mixture.

How many potatoes should you make per person for mashed potatoes?

As a rule of thumb, use half a pound of potatoes per person, which is equivalent to one medium potato.

Should I peel potatoes to make mashed potatoes?

Peeling potatoes is optional, especially if you are using Yukon Gold potatoes, as their skin is very thin. However, if you decide not to peel, be sure to scrub it very well using a vegetable brush.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Like

Potatoes are a perfect side dish for a simple, easy, and delicious pairing to virtually any recipe. Browse the links below for some inspiration:

If you try this Rosemary Mashed Potatoes recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Potatoes mashed with rosemary and butter in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Rosemary Mashed Potatoes Recipe

These Rosemary Mashed Potatoes are a buttery, decadent side dish that's a classic, crowd-favorite addition to any holiday table. Easily make these potatoes ahead of time to pop in the oven on a busy holiday, or whip them up to accompany a weeknight meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 348kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds Yukon gold potatoes peeled and cut into chunks
  • 1 tablespoon salt
  • ½ cup whole milk or almond milk
  • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter plus more as garnish if preferred
  • 2 sprigs fresh rosemary plus more as garnish
  • 3 cloves garlic* peeled and minced
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground white pepper or black pepper

Instructions

  • Boil the potatoes: Fill a medium saucepan with cold water and add the cubed potatoes making sure that they are fully submerged. Stir in the salt and bring it to a boil on medium-high heat. Cover and cook the potatoes until tender, 15-20 minutes. You can check doneness by inserting a sharp knife into a potato. If it comes in and out easily, it is ready to go. Drain potatoes, return to pot, and set them aside.
  • Infuse the rosemary: Meanwhile, place milk and butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Cook until butter is fully melted. You do not need to bring it to a boil. Turn the heat off, add in sprigs of rosemary and minced garlic and let it steep while you are mashing the potatoes. I recommend letting it sit for 10-15 minutes. However, you can let it steep longer. Be aware that the longer it steeps, the stronger the flavors of rosemary will be.
  • Mash the potatoes: Using a potato masher or a food mill (if you have one), mash the potatoes until they reach your desired consistency.
  • Add the milk mixture: Remove the sprigs of rosemary from the milk mixture and pour the mixture over the mashed potatoes and mix until completely combined. At first, it will look like it has too much liquid, but it will thicken as it sits.
  • Season: Season with salt and pepper. Taste for seasoning and add in if needed.
  • Serve: Transfer onto a serving bowl, garnish with chopped rosemary and more butter if preferred. Serve.

Notes

  • Garlic: If you love a kick of garlic flavor and want to take these mashed potatoes to the next level, you can use roasted garlic in this recipe. Simply follow my recipe for Roasted Garlic (using heads of garlic), or make Air Fryer Roasted Garlic if you’re in a rush. In a pinch, you can also use garlic powder instead. 
  • Make ahead & reheat: I recommend making these potatoes no more than a day in advance. To store, let the mashed potatoes cool to room temperature, place them in an oven-safe baking dish (to make for easy reheating), cover it with stretch film, and place it in the fridge. Reheat in a low-heat oven for about 15 minutes, making sure to stir a few times for even reheating. If you’re making this recipe for a holiday dinner, pop them in the oven after your turkey or ham comes out to take advantage of an already-warm oven. 
  • Store: The best way to store this dish is in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. You can reheat it in a low-heat (300 degrees F) oven for 10-15 minutes or until warmed thoroughly.
  • Freeze: To freeze leftovers, let them cool completely and store them in an airtight freezer bag or a freezer-safe container for up to one month. Thaw it in the fridge overnight.
  • Consistency/texture: My favorite tool to use for mashed potatoes is a potato masher, but a food mill, potato ricer, or hand mixer would also work well to achieve a creamy, smooth texture. I recommend sticking to handheld tools and avoiding tools like food processors or blenders, as they result in a gummy texture.
  • Double the recipe: If you’re serving this recipe for a holiday dinner or a large crowd, feel free to double the recipe as many times as you need. 
  • Taste for seasoning: Mashed potatoes aren’t nearly as good when they’re bland, so make sure to taste for seasoning before serving. Feel free to add in some extra salt or ground pepper to enhance the flavors of the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 348kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 2063mg | Potassium: 1020mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 594IU | Vitamin C: 45mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Rosemary Mashed Potatoes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/rosemary-mashed-potatoes/feed/ 4
Maple Roasted Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/maple-roasted-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/maple-roasted-carrots/#respond Thu, 27 Oct 2022 22:33:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=61178 If you are looking for Healthy Thanksgiving Dinner Recipes the whole family will love, then you have come to the right place. These maple syrup carrots add a bright, colorful hue to any table – much like these Whole Roasted Carrots, but with so much more holiday cheer! Make them ahead of time to save yourself some time on the big day, or serve these little guys any night of...

The post Maple Roasted Carrots appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

If you are looking for Healthy Thanksgiving Dinner Recipes the whole family will love, then you have come to the right place. These maple syrup carrots add a bright, colorful hue to any table – much like these Whole Roasted Carrots, but with so much more holiday cheer!

Make them ahead of time to save yourself some time on the big day, or serve these little guys any night of the week as part of a complete meal. And if you have extra carrots on hand, definitely try Carrot and Ginger Soup and Carrot Hummus, too!

Carrots baked in a maple brown sugar glaze in a serving bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You Will Need:

The ingredient list for this maple-glazed carrots recipe is short and sweet. Gather together unsalted butter, maple syrup, brown sugar, cinnamon, kosher salt, black pepper, and carrots.

Ingredients for maple caramelized carrots from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Carrots: As far as carrots go – any kind of carrots will work. Go for rainbow carrots (multicolor carrots), whole orange carrots, purple carrots or a bag of baby carrots (no prep work required!). If I am serving this for a holiday dinner, I like the look of maple glazed whole carrots, but as I mentioned, any carrot you have on hand would work.
  • Butter: Buttery maple syrup glaze is divine, but you could also use olive oil, coconut oil, or avocado oil instead. Brown butter would add another level of nutty flavor.
  • Maple Syrup: Use pure maple syrup for the best flavor. Any color – light, amber or dark – will do.
  • Sugar: Brown sugar is classic, but I love the slightly less sweet and nuanced flavor of coconut sugar, which also allows the natural sweetness of this maple carrots recipe to shine. It also makes it secretly paleo, too!
  • Honey: For a fun honey maple spin, use a mix of half honey and half maple syrup. Or if you are out of maple syrup, feel free to use an equal amount of honey instead. Honey maple glazed carrots taste a bit different but are still delicious.
  • Spice: Cinnamon adds a pleasant, warming touch. A few other spices you could add are garlic powder, onion powder, ground coriander, red pepper flakes, or ground cayenne pepper.
  • Herbs: Garnish the dish with fresh herbs, like fresh thyme leaves, fresh rosemary, fresh parsley, or those green and frilly carrot tops / leaves. Flaky salt helps balance the sweetness, too.

How to Make This Recipe?

This brown sugar maple glazed carrots recipe is ready from start to finish in no time. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

  1. Prep equipment: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a sheet pan with parchment paper. Set aside.
A person showing how to make a maple glaze for carrots from the top view.
  1. Make the glaze: Whisk together the melted butter, maple syrup, brown sugar (or coconut sugar), ground cinnamon, salt, and pepper in a small bowl or measuring cup until smooth.
  2. Prep carrots: Remove the carrot tops and rinse the carrots thoroughly. Peel (or scrub) the carrots and slice them into 2-inch pieces. For larger carrots, cut them in half lengthwise. For smaller carrots, leave them as is. Place carrots on the parchment-lined rimmed baking sheet.
  3. Coat carrots with the glaze: Toss the maple syrup glaze mixture with the carrots until fully coated. Spread them out on the baking sheet so that they are in one even layer.
  4. Bake: Bake for 25-30 minutes, tossing halfway through. The carrots are fully cooked when you can easily pierce the larger pieces with a paring knife. Please keep in mind that baking time might slightly change based on the size of the carrots so it is best to keep a close eye on it after the 25-minute mark.
  5. Cool and serve: Cool for 5-10 minutes on the baking sheet, then transfer your freshly roasted maple glazed carrots to a platter or serving bowl. Enjoy!

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

Make ahead glazed carrots are a cinch to make, and any leftovers can be enjoyed throughout the week. Here’s how I like to do it:

  • Make Ahead: Prep and bake maple syrup roasted carrots as instructed, and cool them completely. Transfer to an oven-safe serving dish, cover tightly with aluminum foil, and store in the fridge for 1-2 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat maple glazed carrots in a 350 degrees F oven, covered for 15-20 minutes, or until warmed through. If I’m serving these as a side dish for the holidays, I like to pop them in the oven with the rest of my side dishes while the turkey is resting.
  • Storage: Leftover roasted maple syrup carrots will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in 30-second intervals in the microwave or as instructed above.
Oven baked sweet carrots on a sheet pan from the top view.

How to Serve This Side Dish?

Candied carrots with maple syrup make a wonderful addition to any holiday table or weeknight dinner table. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

FAQs

Can I make glazed carrots in advance?

Yes, glazed carrots can be made 1-2 days in advance. Store them in an oven-safe dish, that way all you have to do on the day of serving is reheat them in the oven until warm.

How many calories are in maple glazed carrots?

One serving of maple glazed roasted carrots is about 290 calories.

Should you peel carrots before roasting them?

Peeling carrots before roasting is optional and more about personal preference. I like to give them a good scrub to remove any dirt using a vegetable brush before slicing, but you can definitely peel it if that’s what you prefer.

Do roasted carrots reheat well?

Yes, roasted maple carrots can be stored in the fridge, then reheated in a covered dish at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 10-15 minutes.

Other Vegetable Side Dish Recipes You Might Like:

Whether you are serving this carrot recipe to add a pop of color to your Christmas or Thanksgiving tables or treating yourself with an extra special side dish for a Tuesday dinner, it is guaranteed to impress. Here are a few other similarly delicious and colorful dishes you might also like:

If you try this Maple Roasted Carrots recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Glazed baked carrots in a serving bowl from the top view.
Print

Maple Roasted Carrots Recipe

These Maple Roasted Carrots are caramelized to perfection and coated in a cinnamon brown sugar glaze with maple syrup. This make-ahead friendly, festive side dish is guaranteed to be a hit at your next holiday dinner, but it's also a family favorite to serve alongside an everyday weeknight meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 45 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 289kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter melted and slightly cooled
  • cup maple syrup
  • 2 tablespoons brown sugar or coconut sugar
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon optional
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 pounds carrots rainbow, baby carrots, or regular carrots would all work

Instructions

  • Prep equipment: Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Make the glaze: In a measuring cup, whisk together butter, maple syrup, brown sugar, ground cinnamon, salt, and pepper.
  • Prep carrots: Rinse and peel (or scrub) carrots and cut them into 2-inch pieces. If they are too large, cut them in half lengthwise. Transfer them onto the prepared sheet pan.
  • Coat carrots with glaze: Pour the maple syrup glaze mixture over the carrots. Toss to make sure that carrots are fully coated with the glaze. Spread them so that they are in a single layer.
  • Bake: Roast in the oven for 25-30 minutes, making sure to give them a toss halfway through the baking process until they are fork-tender. To test doneness, insert a paring knife into one of the larger carrots. If it comes in and out easily, it should be ready.
  • Cool and serve: Let them cool for 5-10 minutes, transfer them to a platter, and serve.

Notes

  • Melt the butter. Rather than softened butter, melted butter coats the carrots much more evenly. I like to pop it in the microwave for a few seconds or melt it in a small saucepan on the stove.
  • Try to cut the carrots roughly the same size. As you know, with any roasted vegetable, the more even in size, the more even they will cook.
  • Line the baking sheet with parchment paper. Otherwise, the maple roasted carrots will become mushy and stick to the pan. It makes for easy cleanup, too.
  • Spread the carrots into one single layer. And make sure there is enough room between each piece so that the carrots will caramelize rather than steam.
  • A hot oven is key. The higher temperature is key for these brown sugar glazed carrots. It will also promote browning and create a glistening sheen.
  • Toss halfway through. This will promote even color and prevent sticking.
  • Cooking time will vary based on the size of the carrots. Check for doneness around the 25-minute mark, and keep roasting until carrots are tender and you can easily pierce the carrots with a paring knife.
  • To make ahead: Prep and bake carrots as instructed, and cool them completely. Transfer to an oven-safe serving dish, cover tightly with aluminum foil, and store in the fridge for 1-2 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat, covered, in a preheated 350-degree F oven for 15-20 minutes, or until warmed through. If I’m serving these as a side dish for the holidays, I like to pop them in the oven with the rest of my side dishes while the turkey is resting.
  • Storage: Leftover roasted maple syrup carrots will keep in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in 30-second intervals in the microwave or as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 289kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 453mg | Potassium: 800mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 38239IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Maple Roasted Carrots appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/maple-roasted-carrots/feed/ 0
Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread with Jiffy Mix https://foolproofliving.com/jalapeno-and-scallion-cornbread/ https://foolproofliving.com/jalapeno-and-scallion-cornbread/#comments Wed, 19 Oct 2022 13:28:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5555 Cornbread is one of life’s little pleasures that is cozy and comforting. It’s the perfect side dish for many soups, stews and chilis, and it makes an even better accompaniment to main dish meals. I love to use this jalapeno cheese cornbread for my Vegetarian Cornbread Stuffing when the holiday season comes around. And if you don’t have any boxes of Jiffy corn muffin mix at home or would prefer...

The post Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread with Jiffy Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Cornbread is one of life’s little pleasures that is cozy and comforting. It’s the perfect side dish for many soups, stews and chilis, and it makes an even better accompaniment to main dish meals.

I love to use this jalapeno cheese cornbread for my Vegetarian Cornbread Stuffing when the holiday season comes around. And if you don’t have any boxes of Jiffy corn muffin mix at home or would prefer a from-scratch recipe, try my Savory Cornbread Muffins instead.

Jalapeno cheddar cornbread on a plate from the top view.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

While I love classic cornbread, the addition of jalapeno and cheddar really takes it over the top. I know you will love it because:

  • One-bowl 30-minute recipe: That’s right – all it takes is one bowl and a whisk to have this Jiffy jalapeno cornbread ready for the table in 30 minutes.
  • Balanced and Flavorful: The jalapeno adds a little kick and the perfect balance of heat to the sweet cornmeal and creamy cheddar cheese.
  • Super Customizable: With plenty of options to swap out one ingredient for another, the recipe variations are endless and a great way to stay creative in the kitchen. 

Ingredients You Will Need

This Jiffy cheddar jalapeno cornbread requires a short list of only 7 simple ingredients. Gather together large eggs, sour cream, unsalted butter, honey, Jiffy corn muffin mix, canned jalapenos and cheddar cheese.

Ingredients for cornbread with jalapeños and cheese from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Sour Cream: Use whole milk sour cream for a great texture and moist cornbread recipe.
  • Honey: We like sweet jalapeno cornbread, and since the Jiffy mix already has sugar, a teaspoon of honey goes a long way. Feel free to omit or replace it with maple syrup instead.
  • Oil: Swap out the butter for a neutral flavored oil, like avocado oil or refined coconut oil.
  • Canned vs. Fresh Jalapeños: I used diced canned jalapenos, but fresh jalapeno peppers, stemmed, seeded, and diced, or canned green chiles (be sure to drain it well) would also work. If adding jalapenos to the cornbread mix sounds too spicy to you, feel free to adjust the quantity based on your preferred heat level.
  • Cheese: I used white sharp cheddar cheese since that’s what I had on hand. A few other cheese options include pepper jack cheese, sharp cheddar, Monterey jack, or Mexican blend cheese.
  • Creamed Corn: If you’re looking for a Mexican cornbread with jiffy mix spin, add half a can of drained creamed corn (aka cream-style corn). Cooking time should remain the same.

How to Make This Recipe?

This easy Jiffy jalapeno cornbread recipe is just that – easy! It comes together in just a few minutes, and the rest of the time it’s left to bake away in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

A person greasing a pan and whisking wet ingredients from the top view.
  1. Grease pan: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Generously grease a 9 x 9-inch baking pan with butter or cooking spray.
  2. Whisk wet ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together eggs, sour cream, melted butter and honey, if using, until thoroughly combined and emulsified.
A person making honey jalapeno cornbread using jiffy mix.
  1. Add corn muffin mix: Fold in the two boxes of Jiffy cornbread mix. It will feel like you don’t have enough liquid. Be patient. As you mix, the batter will come together.
  2. Stir in additions: Add jalapenos to the cornbread mix, along with the cheddar cheese.
A person spreading cornbread mix into a pan and then baking it in the oven.
  1. Bake: Transfer the cornbread batter to the prepared baking dish. Spread it evenly throughout the pan with a spatula. Bake for 20-25 minutes, or until the top is lightly golden brown and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Allow to cool for 15 minutes. Slice and serve.

How to Make in Cast Iron Skillet or Muffin Tin?

This cheesy jalapeño cornbread recipe is just as easy to make in a cast iron skillet or muffin tin. Here’s how to do each one:

  • Cast Iron Skillet: Prepare the cornbread as directed. Spread into an even layer into a very well-greased / buttered 10-inch cast iron skillet. Bake at 350 degrees F for 20-22 minutes, or until the top is golden and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Cool for 15 minutes before slicing.
  • Muffin Pan: To make corn muffins, prepare the corn muffin batter as directed. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with 12 parchment paper liners (affiliate link). Divide the batter into the prepared muffin cups. Bake at 350 degrees F for 20-23 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and the centers spring back to the touch. Cool in the pan for 10 minutes, then serve warm or transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely. This cheesy jalapeno cornbread recipe will make 12 muffins.

How to Store Leftovers?

  • Storage: This Jiffy jalapeno cheddar cornbread can be stored in an airtight container or zip top bag in the fridge for up to 5 days. For best results, bring to room temperature or reheat as per the instructions below before serving.
  • Freeze: To freeze, slice the cornbread into individual slices. Place on a rimmed baking sheet small enough to fit in your freezer. Freeze for 1 hour. Transfer to a freezer bag and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat in the oven or toaster oven set to 300 degrees F for 5-10 minutes or until warmed through.

Main Dish Recipes to Serve with Cornbread

Cheddar jalapeno cornbread is a wonderful addition to many soups, stews, chilis and those comforting fall and winter meals. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

Cheesy cornbread with jalapeño in a pan from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Bring all ingredients to room temperature. This will create a smoother, well-mixed batter.
  • Drain the canned jalapenos. It’s important to drain canned jalapenos before mixing them into the cornbread mix, or you run the risk of making the batter too wet. I like to drain and even pat them dry with a paper towel.
  • Save a little extra shredded cheddar cheese for the top. It adds a visual appeal and another level of cheesy goodness. It is optional, but a few jalapeno slices on top adds a nice touch, too.

FAQs

What can you add to Jiffy corn muffin mix?

Jiffy corn muffin mix turns out much better with the addition of sour cream, eggs and melted butter. And to make it even more crave-able, jalapeno peppers and cheddar cheese add a generous amount of heat and creamy goodness to the original recipe.

How do you make Jiffy cornbread so it doesn’t crumble?

The best way to make Jiffy cornbread so it doesn’t crumble is to enrich the dough with eggs, sour cream, butter or oil, and a touch of honey. All will add moisture and a well-balanced flavor profile.

How can I spice up my cornbread mix?

To add some pizzazz to your cornbread mix, stir in one small can of diced jalapenos and 1 ½ cups of shredded cheese.

Why is Jiffy mix cornbread so crumbly?

The Jiffy cornbread recipe on the back of the box makes cornbread that is a little on the dry side. To combat this, a combination of sour cream and melted butter adds moisture, as well as flavor.

Other Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

I won’t lie; I think jalapeno peppers are awesome, and I love using them in my cooking every opportunity I get. Here are a few recipes from the archives where they shine:

If you try this easy Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread with Jiffy recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Jalapeno cornbread cut into squares placed on a plate.
Print

Jiffy Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread Recipe

This recipe for Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread with Jiffy Mix adds a hint of spice, a touch of sweetness, and lots of cheesy flavor to your classic cornbread mix. Make this 7-ingredient recipe in only 30 minutes for an irresistible side to soups, stews, chilis, and more.
Course Bread
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 22 minutes
Cooling time 10 minutes
Total Time 42 minutes
Servings 9 servings
Calories 415kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 large eggs at room temperature
  • 1 cup sour cream at room temperature
  • ¼ cup melted unsalted butter cooled plus more for greasing the pan
  • 1 teaspoon honey optional
  • 2 boxes Jiffy Corn Muffin Mix 8.5 ounces each
  • ½ cup diced canned jalapenos* fully drained and chopped
  • 1 ½ cups shredded cheddar cheese

Instructions

  • Grease pan: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Generously grease a 9X9 inch baking dish with butter (or cooking spray).
  • Whisk wet ingredients: Whisk eggs, sour cream, melted butter and honey, if using, in a large mixing bowl until fully combined.
  • Add dry ingredients: Stir in the Jiffy corn muffin mix. At first, it will feel like you don’t have enough liquid, but as you mix, it will come together.
  • Stir in mix-ins: Fold in the chopped jalapenos and cheddar cheese.
  • Bake: Transfer the mixture to the prepared baking dish and spread it evenly throughout the pan. Bake for 20-25 minutes, or until the top is lightly browned and a toothpick inserted in the middle comes out clean. Let it cool for 15 minutes. Slice and serve.

Notes

Notes:
  • Bring all ingredients to room temperature. This will create a smoother, well-mixed batter.
  • Drain the canned jalapenos. It’s important to drain canned jalapenos before mixing them into the cornbread mix, or you run the risk of making the batter too wet. I like to drain and even pat them dry with a paper towel.
  • Save a little extra shredded cheddar cheese for the top. It adds a visual appeal and another level of cheesy goodness. It is optional, but a few jalapeno slices on top adds a nice touch, too.
  • To make it in a Cast Iron Skillet: Prepare the jalapeno cornbread as directed. Spread into an even layer into a very well-greased / buttered 10-inch cast iron skillet. Bake at 350 degrees F for 20-22 minutes, or until the top is golden and a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean. Cool for 15 minutes before slicing.
  • To make it in a Muffin Pan: To make corn muffins, prepare the corn muffin batter as directed. Line a 12-cup muffin tin with parchment paper liners (affiliate link). Divide the batter into the prepared muffin cups. Bake at 350 degrees F for 20-23 minutes, or until the tops are golden brown and the centers spring back to the touch. Cool in the pan for 10 minutes, then serve warm or transfer to a cooling rack to cool completely. This cheesy jalapeno cornbread recipe will make 12 muffins.
  • Storage: This cornbread can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. For best results, bring to room temperature and preheat in a low-heat (300-degree oven) until warmed through 10-15 minutes.

Nutrition

Calories: 415kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 85mg | Sodium: 710mg | Potassium: 137mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 198mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Jalapeno Cheddar Cornbread with Jiffy Mix appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/jalapeno-and-scallion-cornbread/feed/ 8
Gigi Hadid Pasta Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/gigi-hadid-pasta-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/gigi-hadid-pasta-recipe/#comments Mon, 10 Oct 2022 21:17:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=60794 This supermodel’s variation of penne alla vodka went viral on Instagram and Tiktok in 2020, and the recipe has only gained popularity since then. Even Gigi’s sister, Bella Hadid, has jumped on the bandwagon, and fellow model Hailey Bieber has also tried her hand at this 30-minute recipe.  Whether you are looking for a new favorite pasta dish or want to follow in the foot steps of celebrities, here is...

The post Gigi Hadid Pasta Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>

This supermodel’s variation of penne alla vodka went viral on Instagram and Tiktok in 2020, and the recipe has only gained popularity since then. Even Gigi’s sister, Bella Hadid, has jumped on the bandwagon, and fellow model Hailey Bieber has also tried her hand at this 30-minute recipe. 

Whether you are looking for a new favorite pasta dish or want to follow in the foot steps of celebrities, here is everything you need to know about Gigi Hadid’s Spicy Vodka Pasta Recipe. 

Pasta with a spicy cream sauce topped with basil in a skillet from the top view.

Recipe Ingredients

Gigi Hadid’s spicy vodka pasta recipe uses classic Italian ingredients like garlic, onion, basil, and parmesan cheese. Plus, the addition of heavy cream makes the vodka sauce so rich and irresistible. 

Ingredients for a pasta with spicy vodka sauce from the top view.

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients for this recipe. For the pasta component, all you need is a pound of shell pasta (or any pasta shape you prefer). 

To make the spicy vodka pasta sauce recipe, gather extra virgin olive oil, an onion, garlic, tomato paste, heavy cream, unsalted butter, kosher salt, black pepper, chili flakes, vodka, parmesan cheese, and fresh basil leaves.

Ingredient Notes & Optional Add Ins

When it comes to making this restaurant-quality pasta dish, it’s hard to go wrong. If you don’t have all the ingredients on hand, feel free to make it your own with substitutions or add-ins. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Pasta: While Hadid uses pasta shells for this TikTok vodka pasta, any kind of pasta you prefer would work. For example, you can use rigatoni, noodles, fusilli, other variations of white pasta, or even whole wheat pasta. Or, use penne pasta to make it a classic spicy penne alla vodka recipe. 
  • Onion: Hadid mentions using either a red onion or a shallot in her spicy vodka sauce recipe, so feel free to use one of those if you have either on hand. I chose to use a white onion because I personally like the flavor of the sauce with this type of onion. 
  • Vodka: Use your favorite brand of vodka for this TikTok vodka sauce, as any brand will do the trick to enhance the flavor of the dish. 
  • Basil: While fragrant, fresh basil leaves take this pasta to the next level, you can also use an equal amount of fresh parsley or a teaspoon (or more) dried basil in the creamy tomato sauce instead. 
  • Add chicken: Add some extra protein by making this Gigi Hadid pasta with chicken. Try adding my easy Air Fryer Chicken Legs, or top off the pasta with this Baked Bone-In Chicken Breast or Greek Yogurt Chicken (aka my go-to grilled chicken recipe). 
  • Make it vegan: Just because the original recipe uses a lot of dairy doesn’t mean it can’t be vegan! To make this a vegan Gigi Hadid pasta, simply substitute coconut cream for the heavy cream and use vegan parmesan and vegan butter. 

How to Make It Without Vodka

If you wish to make this pasta recipe without vodka, I have you covered. As it turns out, you can make Gigi Hadid’s pasta sauce completely alcohol-free. Here are a few vodka substitutes:

  • Lemon juice: A tablespoon of freshly squeezed lemon juice is a great substitute for vodka while still giving the vodka sauce recipe an acidic kick. 
  • Apple cider vinegar: Apple cider vinegar provides that acidic, slightly alcoholic taste while being alcohol-free. This stuff is strong, so all you need to do is add a splash to your Gigi Hadid vodka pasta recipe without vodka. 
  • Pasta water: Adding a splash of pasta water in place of the vodka will give your spicy vodka pasta without vodka more flavor and thin it out a bit. 
  • Omit: The easiest way to make vodka sauce without vodka is to simply omit it! The penna alla vodka purists might disagree, but this recipe would still turn out delicious without vodka, so feel free to omit it and make your creamy tomato-based sauce without alcohol. 

How to Make It?

This vodka pasta dish packs a lot of flavor for how simple and easy it is to make at home.

You’ll be surprised it’s not from a fancy Italian restaurant! Simply follow the steps below to have this dish on the table in about 30 minutes. 

A person showing how to boil pasta and make a pasta sauce from the top view.
  1. Cook the pasta: Add water and a generous amount of salt to a large pot and bring to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package directions if needed. Before draining, keep a cup of pasta water for later.  
  2. Saute the onions: While the pasta cooks make the spicy vodka sauce. To do so, add the oil to a saucepan or large skillet and heat over medium heat for about 2-3 minutes. Add the onion and saute for 3-4 minutes, constantly stirring, until soft. 
  3. Add the garlic: Add the garlic to the pan and cook, constantly stirring, for 30 seconds. 
  4. Add the tomato paste: Add in the tomato paste and constantly stir with a whisk (or a wooden spoon) for 1-2 minutes. If it separates or appears curdled, that is normal and nothing to worry about. 
A person showing how to make a sauce with vodka from the top view.
  1. Pour in the heavy cream: Pour the heavy cream into the pan and whisk the spicy pasta sauce until combined. Bring to a boil and simmer for up to a minute. Keep an eye on it and continue stirring constantly. 
  2. Stir in the butter and the seasonings: Add the butter, salt and pepper, and red pepper flakes, if using. Whisk until the butter has melted.
  3. Add the (optional) vodka: Take the pan off the heat. If using vodka, add it to the creamy sauce and stir to combine. To make a no vodka vodka sauce, simply omit the vodka or try one of the substitutions listed above. 
  4. Combine with the pasta: Add the cooked pasta to the spicy vodka sauce and toss to combine. If the pasta sauce appears too thick or starts sticking, add a splash or two of the reserved pasta water. 
A person adding parmesan and basil to a vodka pasta from the top view.
  1. Garnish and serve: Top with parmesan cheese and garnish with chopped basil leaves. Serve.

How to Store & Reheat?

This dish is easy to store and reheat, so you can enjoy it over the next few days if you weren’t able to polish it off in one sitting (as much as you might want to). Here are some tips:

  • Store: Store your pasta in an airtight container in the fridge for 2-3 days. 
  • Reheat: The best way to reheat this dish is on the stove. I recommend adding a splash of half and half, heavy cream, or water while heating to return the dish to a creamy consistency. 

What to Serve It With?

Serve this spicy pasta alla vodka alone for a quick, simple, and supermodel-approved weeknight meal, or amp it up by pairing it with a side dish. Here are my serving recommendations: 

A serving of Gigi Hadid creamy pasta with basil in a bowl from the top view.

FAQs

What ingredients do you need to make Gigi Hadid pasta?

To make the Gigi Hadid pasta recipe, you will need shell pasta, olive oil, onion, garlic, tomato paste, heavy cream, unsalted butter, salt, pepper, red pepper flakes, vodka, parmesan cheese, and basil.

What is Gigi Hadid pasta called?

The Gigi Hadid pasta is actually called spicy vodka pasta. This viral pasta recipe became attached to supermodel Gigi Hadid after she shared it on her Instagram stories, leading to its viral success. 

How many calories is a serving of Gigi Hadid’s pasta recipe?

One serving of the Gigi Hadid pasta recipe is about 690 calories per serving.

How to make Gigi Hadid pasta without vodka?

It’s easy to make Gigi Hadid pasta without vodka. In place of the vodka, you can use a tablespoon of fresh lemon juice, a splash of apple cider vinegar, or a little bit of pasta water. Or, simply omit the vodka without a substitute.

Other Weeknight Pasta Recipes You Might Also Like

Italian nights always call for a delicious, cheesy pasta dish, some crusty bread, and a yummy side salad, so why not have more of them? For more pasta night inspiration, check out a few more easy pasta recipes below:

If you try this Gigi Hadid Pasta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A pasta with vodka cream sauce in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Gigi Hadid Pasta Recipe

This Gigi Hadid Pasta, a viral recipe shared by the supermodel on social media, is a delicious spin on penne alla vodka. With a spicy, creamy vodka sauce, perfectly al dente shells, and lots of basil and parmesan, this recipe is a must-make for a quick and easy weeknight dinner.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6
Calories 690kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound shell pasta or any shape you like such as penne, orecchiette, ziti etc.
  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 1 small onion chopped – about 2/3 cup
  • 4 cloves of garlic minced
  • cup tomato paste
  • 1 cup heavy cream
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt*
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 2 tablespoon vodka optional
  • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese
  • ½ cup fresh basil leaves loosely packed – or 1 teaspoon dried basil

Instructions

  • Cook the pasta: Fill a big pot with water and a generous amount of salt. Bring to a boil, add the pasta, and cook, following the package instructions, until al dente. Reserve 1 cup of the pasta water before draining, drain and set aside.
  • Saute the onions: Heat oil in a large saucepan over medium heat until warm, 2-3 minutes. Add in the onion, constantly stirring, and cook for 3-4 minutes until the onions are softened.
  • Cook the garlic: Stir in the garlic and cook, constantly stirring, for 30 seconds.
  • Add the tomato paste: Add the tomato paste and cook, constantly stirring with a wooden spoon, for 1-2 minutes. It might separate a little bit (and look like it is a bit curdled). That is normal.
  • Add the heavy cream: Pour in the heavy cream and whisk until combined. Bring the mixture to a boil and let it simmer for 30 seconds to a minute. This happens so quickly, so do not leave sight of it and do not stop stirring.
  • Stir in the butter and seasonings: Stir in butter, salt and pepper and red pepper flakes, if using.
  • Pour in the (optional) vodka: Off the heat; if using, stir in the vodka and mix.
  • Combine with the pasta: Add the now-cooked pasta to the vodka sauce. Give it a toss to make sure that the sauce is evenly distributed. Pour in some of the reserved pasta water if it gets too thick or starts sticking.
  • Garnish and serve: Finish it off with parmesan cheese and chopped basil. Ladle into bowls and serve.

Notes

  • Servings: This recipe serves 4 people generously, but you can stretch it to serve 6 if you serve it as a side dish. You can also half the recipe by using 8 ounce/ 225 grams of pasta (usually half a box).
  • Store: Store your pasta in an airtight container in the fridge for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: I think the best way to reheat this dish is on the stove. However, you can use your microwave too. I recommend adding a splash of milk, half and half, heavy cream, or water while heating to return the dish to a creamy consistency.
  • How to make it without vodka? You can easily make this recipe without using vodka. Simply use one of the suggestions below or omit it.
    • Lemon juice: A tablespoon of freshly squeezed lemon juice is a great substitute for vodka while still giving the vodka sauce recipe an acidic kick. 
    • Apple cider vinegar: Apple cider vinegar provides that acidic, slightly alcoholic taste while being alcohol-free. This stuff is strong, so all you need to do is add a splash to your Gigi Hadid vodka pasta recipe without vodka. 
    • Pasta water: Adding a splash of pasta water in place of the vodka will give your spicy vodka pasta without vodka more flavor and thin it out a bit. 

Nutrition

Calories: 690kcal | Carbohydrates: 67g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 592mg | Potassium: 566mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 1421IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 140mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Gigi Hadid Pasta Recipe appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/gigi-hadid-pasta-recipe/feed/ 2
Kale Waldorf Salad https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/ https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/#comments Thu, 15 Sep 2022 14:29:05 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6054 This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with baked turkey bacon or even some chicken breasts. And once you master massaged kale, it will become your favorite salad you’ll want to make over and over again. Why Should You Try This Recipe? This kale Waldorf salad was inspired by Whole Foods and my chicken Waldorf salad recipe. I...

The post Kale Waldorf Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
This kale Waldorf salad recipe is a balanced, texturally appealing, delicious recipe that can be taken one step further with baked turkey bacon or even some chicken breasts. And once you master massaged kale, it will become your favorite salad you’ll want to make over and over again.

A kale Waldorf salad in a bowl with a wooden spoon from the top view.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

This kale Waldorf salad was inspired by Whole Foods and my chicken Waldorf salad recipe. I know you will love it because:

  • Healthy and nutritious: Packed full of dark leafy greens, fruit, nuts, and healthy fats, it’s a hearty salad recipe to keep you full and satisfied.
  • Ready in less than 20 minutes: Most of the work is in the preparation of ingredients. Once that’s out of the way, all you have to do is massage, toss, and enjoy.
  • Super customizable: With plenty of options to swap out one ingredient for another, you can truly make this kale salad your own.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Waldorf kale salad come in three parts – massaged kale, dressing and salad.

Ingredients for a kale salad in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: For the massaged kale, gather together kale, olive oil, and kosher salt.
  • Salad Dressing: For the salad dressing ingredients, you will need mayonnaise, plain yogurt, Dijon mustard, apple cider vinegar, kosher salt, and black pepper.
  • Salad ingredients: Gather together an apple, red seedless grapes, celery, walnuts, and raisins.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Kale: While there are many types of kale, I love easy-to-find curly kale or Tuscan kale. Both are easy to cut and store ahead of time to save you a step in the kitchen. If you want to use baby kale, there is no need to massage it with the oil beforehand.
  • Mayonnaise: Use an avocado oil mayo or vegan mayo.
  • Yogurt: Feel free to use regular yogurt or Greek yogurt for extra protein. Just make sure it is plain and full-fat for the richest flavor.
  • Vinegar: Apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar both work. Lemon juice is also a great sub.
  • Apple: Any color apple you enjoy works beautifully, like Granny Smith, Gala or Pink Lady.
  • Grapes: Red, green or black seedless grapes would all be delicious.
  • Nuts: Swap out the walnuts for almonds or pecans, or use sunflower seeds or pumpkin seeds for a nut-free recipe.
  • Dried Fruit: Dried fruit like raisins, craisins, or even dried cherries add that extra pop of sweetness. A few tablespoons of raisins go a long way.

How to Make

This kale version takes the same approach as a classic Waldorf salad with a typical mayonnaise base. And it’s ready in a few easy steps. Here’s how to do it:

A person massaging kale and making a creamy dressing from the top view.
  1. Massage kale: Place prepped kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using your fingertips, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened and turn a deeper shade of green.
  2. Make salad dressing: In a small bowl or jar, mix together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt, and pepper until it reaches a creamy consistency.
A collage of images showing how to make a kale salad from the top view.
  1. Assemble salad: Into the bowl with the massaged kale, add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins. Drizzle with the salad dressing and toss. Serve immediately in your favorite serving dish.

Serving Suggestions

Massaged kale Waldorf salad is best served right away for the ultimate crunch and texture notes. I love to serve it as:

How to Store

This kale salad with apples and walnuts will keep for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

A kale salad with nuts and fruit in a bowl with spoons from the side view.

Expert Tips

  • Prep ingredients ahead of time. The grapes, celery and walnuts can all be prepped ahead of time. Store the grapes and celery in the fridge and the walnuts on the kitchen counter.
  • Massage kale with fingertips. This breaks down kale’s tough fibers and infuses the leaves with olive oil.
  • Start with half the dressing, toss, then determine if you would like more dressing. The salad dressing will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Change Up The Dressing: While I am a big fan of the classic mayo-yogurt-based dressing of Waldorf Salad, I sometimes change the dressing for a different flavor profile. Other dressings like my Creamy Avocado Dressing and Green Cashew Sauce would also complement this superfood-packed salad recipe.
  • Would you rather make this with homemade mayonnaise? If so, check out this helpful How To Make Mayo tutorial post from The Endless Meal.

FAQs

What is a Waldorf salad ingredient?

Traditional waldorf salad is made with apples, grapes, celery and walnuts, then tossed with a mayo-based dressing.

What is the meaning of Waldorf salad?

Waldorf salad started off as a simple apple-celery-mayo combination that debuted at the Waldorf Astoria Hotel in NYC, from where it got its name.

Should you blanch kale for a salad?

No, it is not necessary to blanch kale for salad. But massaging kale with your hands takes it to another level.

How long will massaged kale salad keep?

Massaged kale salad will keep for up to 3 days in a sealed container in the refrigerator.

Can you eat kale raw in a salad?

Yes, raw kale can be eaten in salad, but it is much more enjoyable to eat when first massaged with your hands.

Other Salad Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Kale Waldorf Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.


a bowl of kale apple salad from the top view.
Print

Kale Waldorf Salad Recipe

This quick and easy Kale Waldorf Salad is wholesome, colorful, crunchy, and the perfect balance of sweet and savory with the most delicious tangy dressing. Throw it together for a light lunch or top with your favorite protein source for a healthy dinner.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 453kcal

Ingredients

For Massaging Kale:

  • 1 bunch lacinato kale washed, rinsed, and cut or curly kale
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Salad Dressing:

  • cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
  • ½ cup plain yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 tablespoon apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 1 apple cut into small cubes (I kept the skin on)
  • 1 cup seedless red grapes halved
  • 1/2 cup celery stalks, cut into small pieces 2 medium-size
  • 1 cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • ½ cup dried raisins or cranberries

Instructions

  • Place rinsed and cut kale in a large bowl. Drizzle with olive oil and kosher salt. Using clean hands, gently rub kale leaves for 2-3 minutes, turning often to make sure all kale leaves are softened.
  • Make the salad dressing by mixing together mayonnaise, plain yogurt, vinegar, salt and pepper in a small bowl or jar.
  • To assemble the salad: Add apple cubes, grapes, celery stalks, walnuts, and raisins into the bowl with massaged kale. Drizzle it with the salad dressing.
  • Give it a toss to make sure everything is combined. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Leftovers can be kept for up to 3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. After the 3-day mark, the fruit and vegetables will become mushy.

Nutrition

Calories: 453kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 14g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 736mg | Potassium: 394mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin A: 1567IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Kale Waldorf Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/kale-waldorf-chicken-salad-with-cashew-and-avocado-mayo/feed/ 10
Roasted Garlic Butter https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/#respond Mon, 12 Sep 2022 23:58:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=59860 Roasting your garlic is a must for this recipe, which is why we’ve included a step-by-step method for foolproof roasted garlic. Once you roast the garlic, the rest of the recipe comes together in a flash. Ingredients You won’t believe how easy it is to take a stick of butter from boring to restaurant-quality with just a few simple ingredients. Our main ingredient, the roasted garlic, adds so much depth...

The post Roasted Garlic Butter appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Roasting your garlic is a must for this recipe, which is why we’ve included a step-by-step method for foolproof roasted garlic. Once you roast the garlic, the rest of the recipe comes together in a flash.

A log of garlic butter cut into slices from the side view.

Ingredients

You won’t believe how easy it is to take a stick of butter from boring to restaurant-quality with just a few simple ingredients. Our main ingredient, the roasted garlic, adds so much depth and flavor to the butter, while the fresh herbs brighten everything up. 

Ingredients for roasted garlic butter from the top view.

For this roasted garlic spread recipe, gather:

  • A bulb of garlic
  • Olive oil
  • A stick of unsalted butter
  • Kosher salt
  • Black pepper
  • Fresh herbs (I used fresh rosemary, chives, and parsley)

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins 

Whether you’re looking for a simple roasted garlic butter for bread or a more complex flavored butter for a specific dish, this butter can do it all. There are a number of swaps and additions you can make to customize the butter to your liking. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Butter: I use unsalted butter in this recipe to control the amount of salt I’m adding, but feel free to use salted butter instead. Just be careful when adding additional salt if you’re using salted butter. This roast garlic butter recipe also works well with vegan butter.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh, fragrant herbs take this roasted garlic butter spread to the next level and give it that fancy restaurant-quality taste. You can use your favorite herbs or any you have on hand, but I recommend fresh parsley, rosemary, thyme, chives, or basil. As a rule of thumb, use two teaspoons of finely chopped fresh herbs per stick of butter. 
  • Spices: Amplify the flavor of your butter by adding some spices. You can cater the spices to a specific recipe’s flavor profile, so feel free to get creative. Sweet paprika, oregano, or a pinch of red pepper flakes are great additions that complement a variety of recipes.
  • Flaky sea salt: Topping your compound garlic butter with flaky sea salt brings out all the delicious flavors of this recipe and adds the perfect finishing touch. Trust me on this one. My favorite brands of sea salt are Maldon Sea Salt Flakes and Jacobsen Flake Finishing Salt. 
  • Parmesan Cheese: I usually add a few tablespoons of parmesan cheese if I am using it to make my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes.

How to Make Roasted Garlic Butter?

Once you roast the garlic, all you have to do is add in the rest of the ingredients and give it a mix! We’re using our oven-roasted garlic method for this recipe, but if you’re in a pinch, you can cut roasting time in half by following my Air Fryer Roasted Garlic recipe. I even have a Roasted Garlic Without Foil version! Here’s how to make this easy recipe:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to roast garlic in aluminum foil from the top view.
  1. Prep the garlic: Slice the top of the garlic with a paring knife, so the cloves are exposed and place the bulb on a piece of foil. Add a drizzle of olive oil on top of the cloves. 
  2. Wrap the garlic: Wrap the whole head of garlic tightly with foil so that it resembles a pouch. Place on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. 
  3. Roast: Roast the garlic in the 400-degree oven for 40 minutes. You’ll know the garlic is done if it appears soft and lightly caramelized (be careful when opening the aluminum foil pouch, as it will be hot). If it doesn’t appear done, wrap the garlic back up and roast for another 5-10 minutes. 
  4. Remove the cloves: After letting the garlic cool for at least 20 minutes, remove the roasted garlic cloves by gently squeezing the bulb from the root end until each individual clove is squeezed out. Discard the outer skin and place the cloves in a bowl. 
A series of images showing how to mash garlic and combine it with butter.
  1. Mash the garlic: In a small bowl or on a cutting board, use a fork to mash the roasted garlic until it’s pureed. 
  2. Add the remaining ingredients: To the same bowl, add the softened butter, salt and pepper, and (optional) chopped herbs. Mix until well combined, or blend in a small food processor. 

How to Roll Compound Butter into a Log?

Now that you know how to make roasted garlic butter, you can stop there and store garlic butter in a bowl. However, I find it easy (and fun) to roll my butter into a log. Doing so makes for easy slicing, and, as a bonus, it looks extra fancy! Follow these simple steps:

A person showing how to roll garlic compound butter into a log.
  1. Shape the butter: Place the roasted garlic compound butter on a piece of plastic wrap or parchment paper and shape it into a cylinder. Wrap it up tightly so it holds its shape. 
  2. Cool: Place the butter log in the fridge and cool for at least three hours. To serve, unwrap the butter, cut it into slices, and use it in your favorite recipes! 

How to Use Garlic Butter?

You can use this homemade roasted garlic butter anywhere you’d use regular butter, so the sky’s the limit if you’re a butter fanatic! This flavorful butter is the perfect finishing touch to make any meal or snack come to life. Here are a few suggestions to get you started:

  • Spread it on crusty bread: It’s no secret that you can use this garlic compound butter for garlic bread. There’s nothing better than melty, garlicky butter spread on crusty, fresh bread. This butter pairs beautifully with my No Knead Bread, Olive Bread, French Bread, or your favorite dinner rolls! It is also wonderful to spread on when making garlic bread in an air fryer.
  • Use it to flavor fish: Fish and garlic butter are a match made in heaven! This roasted garlic and herb butter really elevates my Grilled Mahi Mahi, and my Grilled Shrimp Skewers aren’t complete without some garlicky, buttery goodness. 
  • Serve over steak: Many restaurants use roasted garlic butter for steak, and it’s always such a treat to order a buttery, sizzling steak from your favorite steakhouse. But with this delicious butter, you can bring those steakhouse flavors right to your own kitchen! Slather as much butter as you desire on Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin or Grilled Steak
  • Add to roasted vegetables: In my opinion, roasted veggies aren’t complete without a liberal helping of butter. Roasted garlic herb butter adds a more caramelized flavor to roasted mushrooms, so be sure to pair this butter recipe with my Roasted Portobello Mushrooms, Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms, or my Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms. Or, transform my Southern-inspired vegetable recipes, such as these Garlic Butter Green Beans, my Mashed Potato Casserole, or Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, into true comfort food by topping them with a dollop of garlic butter with roasted garlic. 
A bowl of compound butter with garlic and herbs from the top view.

How to Store & Freeze

If you still have some extra homemade garlic butter on hand after spreading it on everything you can think of (we won’t judge), then feel free to pop your leftovers in the fridge or freezer so you can enjoy them another day! Here are my storage recommendations:

  • Make Ahead: If you want to save time, you can roast your garlic a day in advance. Simply combine your roasted garlic with butter when ready to serve. 
  • Store: If stored either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container, this simple compound butter recipe stays fresh in the fridge for up to three days. Be sure to consume your butter within this time period, as a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic sits for too long in an oxygen-free environment. Try making a smaller batch of this recipe or make only one batch at a time to avoid waste and ensure you can consume the butter within the three-day period. 
  • Freeze: Freeze your rosemary garlic compound butter for up to a month, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your butter from frozen by taking it out of the freezer an hour before you expect to serve it. Make sure only to thaw the amount you want to use.

FAQs

Is garlic butter good for you?

Butter has various health benefits and is a great source of vitamins A and E, which support skin health, the immune system, eye health, and heart health. Garlic is also very nutritious, and a major health benefit of garlic lies in its immune-boosting properties.

Can you get botulism from garlic butter?

Botulism, a foodborne illness, can occur when a homemade garlic-in-oil mixture is stored in a room-temperature environment. Bottled or otherwise enclosed raw garlic creates an oxygen-free environment that supports bacterial growth, which can lead to botulism. To reduce the risk of botulism, per food safety guidelines, always store homemade garlic mixtures, including garlic butter, in the refrigerator and consume them within three days.

How many tablespoons are in a clove of garlic?

There are about two to three tablespoons of garlic in each garlic clove, depending on the size of the garlic bulb.

Can I use salted butter?

Yes, you can. However, if you do so, be sure to adjust the amount of salt you use in the recipe below.

Can I make this with pre-peeled garlic?

Yes, you can. However, keep in mind that it takes much less time to roast pre-peeled garlic, so be sure to adjust the roasting time accordingly.

Other Garlic Recipes You Might Like

If you can’t cook a single meal without using garlic, we can definitely relate. That’s why we have so many garlic recipes here on the blog! Check out the links below for more garlic inspiration: 

If you try this Roasted Garlic Butter recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A log of garlic compound butter cut into slices from the side view.
Print

Roasted Garlic Butter Recipe

This easy Roasted Garlic Butter combines bold oven-roasted garlic with creamy butter and fresh herbs for a mouthwatering addition to endless recipes. Simply spread on fresh bread or elevate your favorite fish, meat, or vegetable dishes by topping them off with a dollop of this delicious butter.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Resting Time 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 4 ounces
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 whole garlic bulb
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 4 oz. unsalted butter, at room temperature (1 stick)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 teaspoon chopped fresh herbs rosemary, chives, and parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Slice the top off the garlic and place it on a piece of aluminum foil.
  • Add oil: Pour olive oil over the garlic bulbs.
  • Roast: Wrap it tightly. It should look like a small pouch. Place it on a baking sheet and roast it in the oven for 40 minutes.
  • Check for doneness: To check doneness, carefully remove the aluminum foil (be careful as it is hot and steamy) and see if the garlic cloves are softened and lightly caramelized. If they are, you are good to go. If not, wrap it back up and let it roast for 5-10 more minutes or until the cloves are fully softened.
  • Remove the cloves: Let the roasted garlic cool for 10-15 minutes. Gently squeeze the head from the root end, pushing out all the soft cloves until you are left with the outer skin. Discard the skin and transfer the roasted garlic into a medium bowl.
  • Mash: Using the back of a fork, mash garlic until it is fully pureed.
  • Combine the ingredients: Into the same bowl, add the softened butter, salt, black pepper, and chopped herbs (if using). Mix until everything is combined. Alternatively, you can do this in a food processor.
  • Shape: You can use your garlic butter right away or shape it into a cylinder (make it a compound butter) for better presentation and portion control. To do so, place the garlic butter on a piece of plastic wrap (or parchment paper), shape it into a cylinder, and wrap it tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least 3 hours before using. When ready to serve, unwrap and cut it into slices and use in your recipe.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: Roast the garlic a day in advance and combine with butter and other ingredients when ready to serve. 
  • Store: Store in the fridge, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container, for up to three days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze for up to a month, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container. 
  • Thaw: Take the butter out of the freezer an hour before you expect to serve it. Make sure only to thaw the amount you want to use.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 0.3g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 294mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 713IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.04mg

The post Roasted Garlic Butter appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/feed/ 0
Peach Mango Smoothie https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/ https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/#comments Tue, 30 Aug 2022 17:58:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14529 It is no secret that smoothies are the ideal summer breakfast/snack with a long list of benefits, especially if they are made without any additional sugars, just like this peach mango smoothie recipe.  Over the years, I have shared so many Superfood Smoothie Recipes and have no plans of slowing down. If you are a fan as well, be sure to check out Cantaloupe Smoothie and Mango Turmeric Smoothie, both...

The post Peach Mango Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
It is no secret that smoothies are the ideal summer breakfast/snack with a long list of benefits, especially if they are made without any additional sugars, just like this peach mango smoothie recipe. 

Over the years, I have shared so many Superfood Smoothie Recipes and have no plans of slowing down. If you are a fan as well, be sure to check out Cantaloupe Smoothie and Mango Turmeric Smoothie, both of which are perfect for warmer months.

A person holding glasses of peach mango drink from the top view.

Ingredients

To make this peach mango drink, you will need fresh mango, peach slices, fresh orange juice, ice cubes, and your favorite yogurt. 

Ingredients for a mango peach smoothie in bowls from the top view.

Substitutions & Possible Add-Ins

  • Frozen Fruit: If fresh peaches and mangos are not in season, you can always make this mango and peach smoothie with frozen peaches and mangos. If you’re going to use frozen fruit, make sure you use less ice. Using ice and frozen fruit results in a really thick smoothie, almost like a peach mango puree. Of course, if you’d rather have a smoothie with a thicker consistency, you can always make a smoothie bowl.
  • Yogurt: Greek yogurt is a key ingredient to give this smoothie the creamy texture and tangy taste that pairs so well with sweet tropical fruits. The good thing is that you can use any type of yogurt. I have also made this smoothie using my vanilla yogurt many times and it turned out great. For a low-fat option, use skim milk yogurt; for a vegan smoothie, use vanilla almond milk yogurt or soy milk yogurt. If you want to enhance the peach flavors, you can even add in a coconut milk-based peach yogurt. And if peach and mango smoothie with yogurt is not your thing, add a handful of unsalted cashews to achieve a similar consistency.
  • Add a banana instead of sugar: While I think that ripe peaches and mangos make this smoothie sweet enough, if you want to add a bit more sweetness, I recommend adding a ripe banana. A refreshing peach mango banana smoothie is ideal, especially if you are serving it to kids as a poolside snack.
  • Add in some protein and more superfoods: As it is with any smoothie recipe, you can add in a tablespoon of hemp seeds, chia seeds, ground flaxseed, or even your favorite protein powder for an added nutritional boost. 
  • Play around with adding other fruit: Add a touch of tropical flavor to your summer fruit smoothies by adding pineapple, strawberries or any of your other favorite fruits in season.
  • Make it a juice instead: Want to make it a peach mango juice recipe? While it is healthier to eat fruit as a whole (or in pureed form like it is in this recipe), you can strain it through a colander to turn it into a juice instead.
  • Add greens: If you’re a fan of green smoothies, add a handful of spinach or kale to make sure you’re getting your daily vegetable intake. 
  • More flavor: Adding a dash of vanilla extract or maple syrup to your mango peach yogurt smoothie is a quick and easy way to elevate the overall flavor of the drink.

How to Make This Recipe

Making this tropical mango peach smoothie cannot be easier. Here are the steps:

A blender with ingredients for a smoothie with mango and peach from the top view.
  1. Blend ingredients: Combine mango chunks, peaches, orange juice, yogurt, and ice cubes into a blender. Pulse your ingredients a few times before blending them at high speed until it has a smooth consistency. 
  2. Serve: Pour your smoothie into your favorite glass. I like to garnish it with hemp seeds on top before serving, but it’s optional. 

How to Store

Store your drink in a cup with a lid (like a mason jar) for easy storage. It should be good for up to two days. Note that the longer it stays in the fridge, the more liquid it will become. Make sure you shake it up before serving it.

Peach Mango Milkshake in a glass from the front view.

FAQs

What fruits blend well with peaches?

Peaches blend well with oranges, strawberries, apricots, and pineapples.

How many calories are in a peach mango smoothie?

This smoothie recipe has 278 calories per serving. Please review the recipe card below for more nutritional information.

What is a good fruit combination with mango?

You can add various kinds of fresh fruit to your mango puree smoothie recipe to make it even more flavorful. Different fruits such as strawberries and raspberries are great for summer months, whereas a ripe banana is a great option for all-year-round.

Other Smoothie Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you liked this mango peach smoothie recipe, here are a few other delicious reader-favorite smoothie recipes you might enjoy:

If you try this Peach-Mango Smoothie recipe or any of our other smoothie recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach mango smoothie garnished with hemp seeds in a glass.
Print

Peach Mango Smoothie Recipe

This 5-ingredient Peach Mango Smoothie is the perfect easy breakfast or afternoon snack for a refreshing boost of nutrients! Make this tropical smoothie in only 5 minutes with fresh or frozen fruit.
Course Smoothie
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 serving
Calories 278kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup mango cut into large chunks from 1 large ripe mango
  • 1 cup peach cut into large chunks for 2 small or 1 large ripe peach
  • ¾ cup orange juice or pineapple juice
  • ¼ cup Greek yogurt or any other one of your favorite yogurt
  • 1 cup ice

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a blender and blend until smooth. Serve right away.

Notes

  • Fruit: If fresh fruit is not available, you can use frozen mango and frozen peach instead. If you use frozen fruit, I recommend adding half the amount of ice.
  • Yogurt: You can use any type of yogurt you like here, homemade vanilla yogurt or even your favorite brand of vegan yogurt would also work.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 278kcal | Carbohydrates: 61g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 53mg | Potassium: 908mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 53g | Vitamin A: 2661IU | Vitamin C: 159mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Peach Mango Smoothie appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/peach-mango-smoothie/feed/ 6
Jennifer Aniston Salad https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/#comments Fri, 19 Aug 2022 14:40:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=58624 The buzz about the viral recipe eventually caught the attention of Aniston, who spoke out in a recent interview, saying she actually never ate the famous salad on set! The mix-up arose when Aniston shared the salad recipe during an Instagram takeover for the Living Proof brand.  So while she did eat the “Jennifer Aniston Salad,” it wasn’t the same one she had on set. According to a Los Angeles...

The post Jennifer Aniston Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
The buzz about the viral recipe eventually caught the attention of Aniston, who spoke out in a recent interview, saying she actually never ate the famous salad on set! The mix-up arose when Aniston shared the salad recipe during an Instagram takeover for the Living Proof brand. 

A salad with bulgur, veggies, herbs, cheese, and pistachios in a bowl from the top view.

So while she did eat the “Jennifer Aniston Salad,” it wasn’t the same one she had on set. According to a Los Angeles Times article, Aniston’s fellow co-stars (Lisa Kudrow and Courtney Cox) said the real salad recipe Jennifer Aniston ate on Friends was a “doctored up” Cobb salad, to which she added chickpeas and turkey bacon.

Regardless of the mix-up, the salad that we initially thought to be “The Jennifer Salad” is still delicious, viral-worthy, and incredibly satisfying. We love cooking with bulgur wheat here on the blog, so we just had to share the recipe! 

Why is This Recipe Worth the Hype?

It’s no wonder this legendary salad went viral on social media. It’s fresh, healthy, colorful, and filling- everything you could ever ask for in a salad! Here are some other reasons to give this internet-famous recipe a try:

  • Quick, easy to make, delicious, and filling: In our opinion, a good salad is just as filling as it is nutritious! Thanks to bulgur as a base, this salad will keep you satisfied for hours. It’s also super quick to throw together and, most importantly, incredibly delicious! 
  • Easy to customize (make it your own): While we love Jennifer Aniston’s original combo, feel free to customize this salad and swap out ingredients to make it your own! Play with various veggies, nuts, and herbs to see what combo suits your taste buds. 
  • Perfect for meal prep: This wholesome Jen salad recipe is the perfect salad for meal prep. It keeps in the fridge for up to 5 days, so you can make a big batch on the weekends and enjoy it for lunch all week!

Ingredients

This easy salad recipe has three sets of ingredients: hearty bulgur wheat for the base of the salad, a combination of fresh, colorful veggies and herbs, and a simple lemon juice and olive oil dressing. Here’s what you’ll need: 

Ingredients for bulgur salad in bowls from the top view.
  • Bulgur wheat: Any type of bulgur that you have on hand will work, but I personally like to use medium coarse bulgur. You can pick up Bob’s Red Mill (affiliate link) bulgur from the grocery store or get this brand (affiliate link) online. If you want to learn more about bulgur, check out my Types of Bulgur guide. I also have a How to Cook Bulgur guide that outlines the best way of cooking bulgur for foolproof results. 
  • Salad dressing: For the salad dressing, gather fresh lemon juice, extra virgin olive oil, kosher salt, and ground black pepper. 
  • Salad ingredients: For the salad, you’ll need an English cucumber, a can of chickpeas, red onion, fresh mint, fresh parsley, pistachios, and crumbled feta cheese.

Substitutions & Variations 

  • Use quinoa instead of bulgur: If you don’t have bulgur on hand or can’t find any at your local grocery store, you can use an equal amount of cooked quinoa (for gluten free option), cooked farro, or another bulgur substitute instead! Either will provide a filling, hearty base for your salad. 
  • Fresh herbs: If mint or flat-leaf parsley don’t suit your taste buds, fresh dill or basil could take their place! 
  • Cucumber: The cucumber in this celebrity salad adds extra color and a nice crunch. You can either use one large English cucumber, Persian cucumbers, or mini cucumbers. 
  • Cheese: Feel free to swap the feta cheese in this recipe for your favorite cheese or whatever you have in the fridge. Mozzarella or shredded cheddar are great options! Keep in mind that feta adds a nice salty flavor to the salad, so you may need to add more salt if using a different type of cheese.
  • Red onion: Are red onions just a bit too sharp for you? Try subbing them for scallions (green onions), or try my Mexican Pickled Onions recipe! 
  • Make it vegan: To make Jennifer Aniston’s salad vegan, simply omit the cheese! 
  • Add an avocado: To add some extra healthy fats to this viral salad and make it even more filling, try adding an avocado.
  • Extra protein: Turn this Jennifer Aniston bulgur salad into an easy, protein-packed weeknight dinner to add to your list of main courses by topping it with my Bone-In Chicken Breast, Baked Turkey Bacon, or these Air Fry Chicken Legs

How to Make This Recipe

The Jennifer salad recipe just requires a little bit of chopping, which you can do while the bulgur cooks. All it needs is a gentle toss and a drizzle of dressing, and you’re done! Here are the details:

A person showing how to cook bulgur from the top view for the Jennifer salad.
  1. Cook the bulgur: Add the bulgur and 2 cups of water (or chicken/veggie broth) to a small saucepan over medium heat. Bring to a boil, cover, and simmer over low heat until all the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest while you prepare the rest of the salad. If you are new to cooking bulgur, be sure to check out our guide on How To Cook Bulgur Wheat.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and pepper to a small bowl or measuring cup. Whisk until combined. 
A person showing how to assemble a bulgur salad with veggies, herbs, cheese, and pistachios.
  1. Assemble the salad: Place the cooked bulgur (make sure to fluff with a fork before adding), cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh herbs, pistachios, and feta cheese in a large mixing bowl. Drizzle with the dressing, gently toss and taste for seasoning. Add more salt or pepper if desired. 

How to Store

This salad stays fresh in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 5 days, making it perfect for meal prep. The grains and veggies soak up the dressing and herby flavors while it sits, so it gets better and better each day!

A salad with bulgur with spoons in the bowl from the side view.

FAQs

What’s in the Jennifer Aniston salad?

This viral Jen Aniston salad, also known as the Rachel Salad, is made up of bulgur wheat, cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh mint and parsley, pistachios, and feta cheese. The simple salad dressing recipe combines lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and pepper.

Is Jennifer Aniston salad healthy?

Yes, Jennifer Aniston’s favorite salad is very healthy! Bulgur wheat, which makes up the base of the salad, has many health benefits, as it’s a great source of plant-based protein, fiber, magnesium, and iron. No wonder everyone wants to partake in the Friends diet!

How many calories is the Jennifer Aniston salad?

One serving of the Jen salad recipe contains about 402 calories. You can learn more about the nutrition facts of this salad in the recipe card below.

What did Jennifer Aniston eat every day on the set of Friends?

While many believe that Aniston ate the viral “Jennifer Aniston Friends Salad” every single day while working on the set of the show Friends, she actually ate a spruced-up Cobb salad. This Jennifer Aniston Cobb salad recipe included many of the usual Cobb salad ingredients plus her special additions of garbanzo beans and turkey bacon.

Other Grain-Based Salad Recipes You Might Like

If you’re looking for more fresh, colorful, flavorful, and filling salads like this viral Bulgur Salad recipe, you’re in for a treat! Browse my other delicious salad recipes using the links below:

If you try this popular salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Jennifer Aniston Salad recipe in a bowl with spoons from the top view.
Print

Jennifer Aniston Salad Recipe

The Jennifer Aniston Salad is definitely worth the hype! This recipe is so filling, fresh, and delicious, thanks to hearty bulgur (or quinoa), fresh veggies, fragrant herbs, creamy feta cheese, and salty pistachios. Whip up this wholesome salad for a quick weeknight dinner, or meal prep it for flavorful lunches all week!
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 402kcal

Ingredients

For the Bulgur Wheat:

  • 1 cup bulgur wheat* or quinoa
  • 2 cups water or vegetable or chicken stock*

For the Salad Dressing:

  • ¼ cup freshly squeezed lemon juice
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt* more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Salad:

  • 1 English cucumber chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 1 15 oz. can chickpeas, drained and rinsed
  • cup red onion chopped
  • ½ cup fresh mint chopped
  • ½ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • ½ cup pistachios shelled and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup crumbled feta

Instructions

  • To cook bulgur wheat, place bulgur and 2 cups of water (or chicken or veggie broth) in a small saucepan (with a lid) over medium heat. Bring to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat to low and cook until all the cooking liquid is absorbed. Let it rest while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. Right before adding it to the salad, fluff it with a fork.
  • To make the salad dressing: In a measuring cup (or a small bowl), whisk together lemon juice, olive oil, and salt and pepper.
  • To assemble the salad: In a large salad bowl, place the now-cooked bulgur, cucumber, chickpeas, red onion, fresh herbs, pistachios, and feta cheese. Drizzle with the salad dressing. Give it a gentle toss, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Bulgur or Quinoa: I used medium coarse bulgur, but Bob’s Red Mill’s Red Bulgur or quinoa can also be used in this recipe. If you need a refresher, be sure to check out my guide on How To Cook Quinoa.
  • Salt & Feta cheese: As it is with any salad that uses feta cheese, I recommend tasting the feta cheese before adding a lot of salt to this salad.  
  • Swap water with chicken stock or vegetable broth: One of the easiest ways to make this easy salad even more flavorful is to cook the grain of your choice (whether it is bulgur, quinoa or farro) in vegetable or chicken stock.
  • Storage: Store in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 5 days. 
  • Serving size: This recipe is approximately 1 1/2 (one and a half) cups per serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 17mg | Sodium: 525mg | Potassium: 534mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1098IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 3mg

The post Jennifer Aniston Salad appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/jennifer-aniston-salad/feed/ 11
Potato Salad with Capers https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/#comments Tue, 16 Aug 2022 20:18:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3278 Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as tangy and comforting. It comes together in a flash and can be served in a number of ways. And if you happen to have extra potatoes on hand, give these muffin tin potatoes or this mashed potato casserole a try. Why Should You Try This Recipe? Nothing says potato salad...

The post Potato Salad with Capers appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Inspired by my deviled egg potato salad and red potato salad, this potato salad recipe with capers is just as tangy and comforting. It comes together in a flash and can be served in a number of ways.

And if you happen to have extra potatoes on hand, give these muffin tin potatoes or this mashed potato casserole a try.

potato salad recipe with capers on a plate from the top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

Nothing says potato salad more to me than a drool-worthy dressing to toss it in. I know you will love it because:

  • Update on classic potato salad. This one comes with a world of fixings, including capers, pickles, onions, and hard-boiled eggs.
  • Serving is versatile. You can serve this summer potato salad recipe warm, room temperature or cold. The choice is yours!
  • Super customizable. With plenty of ingredient swaps and substitutions, you can really make this potato salad your own.

Ingredients

This easy potato salad recipe is broken down into three parts – potatoes, dressing and the salad ingredients.

  • Potatoes: You will need Yukon Gold potatoes, kosher salt, and water.
ingredients for salad dressing for potatoes salad from the top view
  • Salad Dressing: Gather mayonnaise (or veganaise), whole grain Dijon mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper.
ingredients for lemon potato salad in bowls from the top view
  • Other potato salad ingredients: Prepare dill pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, hard-boiled eggs, and fresh parsley.

Ingredient Substitutions and Notes

  • Potatoes: Yellow potatoes, such as Yukon gold, give an extra buttery consistency. But waxy potatoes, such as red potatoes, fingerlings, baby potatoes, or new potatoes, will all work. Just note cooking times will vary.
  • Acid: Replace the lemon juice with white wine vinegar or red wine vinegar instead.
  • Pickles: Feel free to use dill pickles, sweet pickles, bread and butter pickles, garlic pickles or extra briny cornichons.
  • Olives: Up the salty bite a bit more with the addition of sliced green olives or black olives.
  • Onions: I love the mix of sweet red onion and scallions, but chives and spring onions are a great combo too.
  • Vegan: Use veganaise and omit the hard-boiled eggs.
  • Fresh Herbs: Toss in a handful of fresh dill or replace the parsley altogether.

How to Make

This homemade potato salad recipe is so easy to make and takes under 30 minutes to put together. Here’s how to do it:

person showing how to boil potatoes and make dressing for warm potato salad from the top view
  1. Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Set the pot over medium-high heat. Bring the potatoes to a boil, then turn down the heat to medium. Cook until the potatoes are slightly tender when pierced with a sharp knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander. Leave aside to cool slightly.
  2. Make the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper until combined.
showing how to assemble potato salad with lemon from the top view
  1. Make the salad: Once the potatoes are cool enough to handle, cut them into small cubes or thin rounds. Place potatoes in a large bowl, then stir in the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle toss. Serve right away or store in the fridge for later.

What to Serve it With?

This homemade potato salad is a crowd pleaser and the ultimate summer side dish that goes with just about anything. Some of my favorite pairings include:

How to Store

This creamy potato salad will last for days in the fridge. Here’s how to do it:

  • To Store Leftovers: Transfer to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Make Ahead: If looking to get ahead for a party or BBQ, potato salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap, in your serving bowl of choice for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
a bowl of salad from the top with a spoon on the side

Expert Tips

  • Cooking time will vary based on the size of the potatoes. Start checking at the 15-minute mark after boiling.
  • Make the dressing and prep the rest of the ingredients while the potatoes boil. This cuts down on prep time.
  • Thoroughly drain the potatoes in a colander. This further allows excess water to drain and evaporate.
  • Toss the potatoes with the dressing while they are still warm. This ensures that the dressing is thoroughly absorbed by the potatoes, making them extra delicious and creamy.
  • New to cooking hard-boiled eggs? My friend Beth’s article on How to Make Hard Boiled Eggs is my go-to guide for perfectly hard-boiled eggs every time.

FAQs

What type of potato is best for potato salad?

Avoid starchy potatoes, like russet potatoes, and stick to buttery, thin-skinned potatoes such as Yukon Gold or Red Potatoes.

How long will potato salad last?

Potato salad will last in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.

Is it better to boil or steam potatoes for potato salad?

I find it much easier to boil potatoes for potato salad. Steaming potatoes requires much more attention since the water evaporates from the pan during cooking.

Should you let potatoes cool before making potato salad?

Potatoes should be cool yet slightly warm to the touch when tossed with the dressing. This way, the potatoes absorb more of all those delicious flavors.

Why does my potato salad get watery?

When you boil potatoes, they absorb much of the boiling water. It’s important to leave them to cool slightly and dry out to allow the excess water to evaporate.

Do you salt the water when boiling potatoes for potato salad?

Yes, a healthy pinch of salt is key. The general rule of thumb I follow is 1 Tablespoon Kosher salt for every 1 quart of water.

Is it better to peel potatoes before boiling for potato salad?

I prefer to leave the skins on entirely, for both texture and color. That being said, if you prefer to peel them, boil the whole, unpeeled potatoes first, then peel them.

Can you freeze potato salad?

I do not recommend freezing potato salad. The texture of both the potatoes and dressing will change once thawed from frozen.

Other BBQ Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Potato Salad with Capers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe was originally published in 2014 and was called The Ultimate Potato Salad. In August 2022, it has been updated with new photos and helpful information with no changes made to the originally published recipe.

potato salad with capers and parsley in a bowl from the top view
Print

Potato Salad with Capers Recipe

This Potato Salad with Capers recipe is what I'd like to call "The Ultimate Potato Salad recipe". Creamy potatoes mixed in with capers, cornichons, onions, and eggs, it offers the perfect balance of creamy, salty, and earthy flavors.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 340kcal

Ingredients

For the potatoes:

  • 2 pounds Yukon Gold potatoes washed thoroughly and unpeeled
  • Kosher Salt

For the dressing:

  • 3/4 cup mayonnaise or veganese
  • 3 tablespoons whole grain mustard
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed through a garlic press
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper

For the salad:

  • 1/4 cup dill pickles chopped
  • 1 red onion (a small one – approximately 1/2 cup chopped onions)
  • 5 stalks scallions both green and white parts, chopped
  • 1/2 cup capers drained
  • 2 hard-boiled eggs chopped
  • 1/4 cup Italian parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Boil Potatoes: In a large pot, cover potatoes with cold water by one inch and liberally salt the water. Bring the potatoes to a boil over medium-high heat, then turn down the heat to medium and continue to cook until potatoes are barely tender when pierced with a knife, 15-20 minutes. Drain the potatoes in a colander and set them aside to cool.
  • Make the dressing: In a small mixing bowl, whisk together the mayonnaise, mustard, lemon juice, garlic, salt and black pepper.
  • Make the salad: Cut the now-cooled potatoes into small cubes. Place them in a large mixing bowl. Add the pickles, red onion, scallions, capers, eggs, and chopped parsley. Pour the dressing over the mixture and give it a gentle stir. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Serve warm, room temperature, or cold.

Video

Notes

  • To Store Leftovers place them to an airtight container and store in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • Make Ahead: If you are looking to get ahead for a party, this salad will keep well in the fridge, tightly wrapped in plastic wrap for 2-3 days. Please note that the potatoes will absorb the dressing over time. If you prefer a looser potato salad come serving time, make an extra batch of dressing.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this potato salad recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 340kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 1122mg | Potassium: 735mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 421IU | Vitamin C: 38mg | Calcium: 56mg | Iron: 2mg

The post Potato Salad with Capers appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/the-ultimate-potato-salad/feed/ 39
Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/ https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/#comments Fri, 12 Aug 2022 01:04:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57692 Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings. Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us...

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Serve it with fresh berries and crunchy granola for a healthy breakfast or an afternoon pick-me-up, or add it to your favorite recipes that call for vanilla yogurt. Better yet, make our Overnight Oats Recipe with Yogurt for a quick breakfast for busy mornings.

Yogurt is such a perfect complement to so many foods, so trust us when we say the yogurt recipes don’t stop here. If you’re like us and love the classic combo of yogurt and fruit, you’ll love this Frozen Yogurt Bark & my go-to Yogurt Dip for Fruit

vanilla yogurt in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the top view

Recipe Ingredients

This ultra quick and easy homemade vanilla yogurt recipe requires only 3 staple ingredients that you probably already have on hand or can quickly grab from the grocery store. You’ll need plain whole milk Greek yogurt, vanilla extract, and honey. 

ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view

Substitutions

The beauty of this easy recipe is that it’s totally customizable based on your preferences. Once you make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt, that’s just a jumping-off point! Feel free to substitute or make additions to suit your sweet tooth or dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions:

  • Yogurt: While I personally love that creamy greek yogurt taste and texture, you can use whatever type of yogurt you prefer for this recipe! Regular yogurt, whole milk yogurt, or skim milk yogurt would all beautifully pair with vanilla and honey. You can even use plant-based yogurt if you’re vegan!
  • Other sweeteners: To make sweetened Greek yogurt, feel free to play around with added sugar based on your preference. Here at FPL headquarters, we prefer flavoring plain yogurt with natural sweeteners, like maple syrup and raw honey, but you can use confectioners’ sugar (aka powdered sugar) in its place for extra sweetness. To make a keto version of this recipe, sub in low-carb sweeteners, like monk fruit sugar or erythritol. We also recommend that you be careful when adding artificial sweeteners, like aspartame, sucralose, xylitol, etc., to unsweetened yogurt, as it can highly impact the flavor. 
  • Vanilla: Adding a dash of pure vanilla extract to plain yogurt is usually what I prefer, but you’re also free to use vanilla bean paste for a 1:1 substitute (meaning you can substitute one for equal amounts of the other). You can also use imitation vanilla extract, which tends to be more affordable. Or, if you’d rather, you can use half of a vanilla bean (vanilla beans have a potent flavor, so half of a bean is all you need). 
  • Honey syrup: As another sweetener option for this recipe, you can use my Honey Syrup recipe (a combination of honey and water) for honey vanilla greek yogurt. If you choose to use honey syrup, use double the amount of honey that the recipe calls for.   
  • Ground cinnamon: This is an optional addition, but adding a sprinkle of ground cinnamon to your plain vanilla yogurt really complements the flavors. 

How to Turn Plain Yogurt into Vanilla Yogurt

You can whip up this delicious recipe in no time! Simply:

person showing how to make vanilla yogurt from plain yogurt in a photo collage
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the yogurt, honey, and vanilla extract to a bowl. Whisk until smooth and well combined. 
  2. Taste and adjust: Give it a taste and add more vanilla extract or honey, if desired. 

How to Store

If you have leftovers of this honey and Greek yogurt recipe, you can store them in the fridge or freezer to enjoy later. Here are some tips:

  • Storage: You can store your homemade honey vanilla yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze your vanilla-flavored yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: To serve the vanilla honey greek yogurt from frozen, first thaw your container of yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The yogurt may appear separated once thawed, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products. To revive the thawed yogurt, give it a stir to incorporate the ingredients or add in a small amount of yogurt if it’s watery. If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed! 

How to Use Vanilla Yogurt in Recipes?

Not only can you enjoy this flavorful vanilla greek yogurt recipe by itself as a breakfast or snack, but you can also use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt! Here are some vanilla yogurt recipe ideas:

  • Make yogurt parfaits: Name a better combo than creamy vanilla yogurt, fresh fruit, and crunchy granola. For one of my favorite vanilla yogurt recipes, try making my Yogurt Parfait recipe!
  • Try it in a smoothie: Vanilla yogurt is the perfect addition to any smoothie because it gives it that coveted thick, creamy texture and adds in just the right amount of sweetness. Try adding it to my Strawberry Banana Yogurt Smoothie or Cantaloupe Shake recipe for an ultra-tasty and refreshing smoothie. 
  • Pair it with fruit: Whether you’re making a fruit salad for a brunch crowd, bringing a fruit platter to your next gathering, or setting out a big fruit bowl for dessert, this easy recipe pairs perfectly with all your favorite seasonal fruit. 
  • Top it off with granola: Something about the crunchy texture and salty-sweet flavor of granola goes so well with yogurt. Simply top a bowl of yogurt with my Chunky Granola and call it breakfast!
  • Turn it into ice cream: Want to know how to make plain yogurt taste better? For a healthier yet delicious version of our favorite summer treat, try using this recipe to make Vanilla Frozen Yogurt!
plain vanilla yogurt with honey in a bowl with strawberries on the side from the side view

FAQs

Can you add vanilla extract to yogurt?

Yes, you can! Adding a dash of vanilla extract in plain yogurt really complements the tanginess of the yogurt and gives it a subtly sweet taste and flavor. Make it even better by adding a tablespoon of honey!

How much vanilla to add to plain yogurt?

When making plain yogurt vanilla-flavored, add half a teaspoon of vanilla extract for every cup of plain yogurt. Feel free to add more or less, depending on your personal preference.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

If you have an abundance of yogurt in your fridge that you’re dying to use, or if you’re just a yogurt fanatic like me, here are some other yogurt recipes you’ll love! 

If you try your hand at making this recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

vanilla yogurt recipe in a bowl with strawberries on the side from top view
Print

Vanilla Yogurt Recipe

Learn how to turn plain yogurt into vanilla yogurt with this simple Vanilla Yogurt recipe! This refreshing, subtly sweet yogurt requires only 3 ingredients and takes 2 minutes to prepare. Enjoy it as a yummy breakfast with granola and berries or as a bedtime snack, or use it in any recipe that calls for vanilla yogurt!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 2 minutes
Total Time 2 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 283kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain whole milk yogurt regular or Greek yogurt
  • 2 tablespoons hone
  • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, honey and vanilla extract in a bowl. Whisk until well combined.
  • Give it a taste and add more if necessary.

Notes

  • Storage: Store yogurt in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze yogurt for up to 2 months to preserve the best taste and texture. 
  • Thaw: Thaw frozen yogurt in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). If the yogurt has separated while thawing, stir to reincorporate the ingredients. Add a few more tablespoons of yogurt if it’s too watery, or blend for a few seconds in a food processor. Make sure not to refreeze once thawed.

Nutrition

Calories: 283kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 115mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 243IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 299mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Vanilla Yogurt From Plain Yogurt appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vanilla-yogurt/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Elotes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/#respond Sun, 31 Jul 2022 13:26:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57299 Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic, charred corn flavor; it will be ready and on the table in 15 minutes.  Why Should You Make This Recipe? This elote recipe is the air fryer version of my fan favorite Mexican Street Corn, one of my most popular recipes. It is the perfect side dish or a quick...

The post Air Fryer Elotes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic, charred corn flavor; it will be ready and on the table in 15 minutes. 

air fryer Mexican street corn on a plate from the top view

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

This elote recipe is the air fryer version of my fan favorite Mexican Street Corn, one of my most popular recipes. It is the perfect side dish or a quick snack to make when you are short on time. If that’s not reason enough, I have listed a few more below:

  • A great alternative to grilling: Mexican street corn in the air fryer is perfect for you if you don’t have a grill. You still get that excellent, charred corn taste without all the mess of grilling.  And since you can fire up the air fryer no matter the weather, every day can be Cinco de Mayo. 
  • Ready in 20 minutes: You will be stunned at how fast you can whip together this authentic Mexican corn on the cob in the air fryer. 20 minutes is all you need from start to finish.

Ingredients

Using the freshest corn on the cob and a few simple ingredients are all you need to make this melt-in-your-mouth air fryer street corn.

air fryer Mexican corn ingredients

Let’s start by gathering your fresh sweet corn (fully husked) and vegetable oil for cooking. For your elote sauce, you will need mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder. And lastly, Mexican cotija cheese and fresh cilantro for your garnish.

Substitutions & Variations

If you are missing some ingredients or want to experiment a little, no worries; I’ve listed a few of the most common substitutions and variations below. Feel free to make this recipe your own.

  • Mexican Crema: If you are lucky enough to get your hands on some authentic Mexican crema, you are in for a treat. A cross between American sour cream and French crème fraiche, Mexican crema is thick and tangy, the perfect addition to Mexican fare, and a great alternative to air fryer corn on the cob with mayo and sour cream-based elote sauce. Simply omit mayo and sour cream and use ½ cup Mexican crema instead.
  • Cheese: Have everything you need but the cotija cheese, don’t panic; you can substitute parmesan cheese and even feta cheese (though I would recommend using low sodium feta) and still end up with excellent results.
  • Elote Seasoning: If you have access to Trader Joe’s, their elote seasoning is worth trying in this recipe.
  • Lemon juice:  If you don’t have any lime juice and are in a pinch, feel free to use some lemon juice in its place.
  • Spice it up: If you enjoy spicy flavors, you can increase the heat by adding more chili powder or cayenne pepper.
  • Frozen corn on the cob: You can use frozen corn to make Mexican fried corn on the cob when fresh is no longer available. You can find the instructions to use frozen corn in the recipe card below.
  • Not a fan of cilantro: You either love it or hate it. If you don’t care for it, omit the cilantro. 

How To Make Air Fryer Street Corn

If you find yourself with an abundance of fresh sweet corn and a craving for Mexican food, this air fryer Mexican street corn recipe is exactly what you need. Follow my step-by-step instructions below for quick and delicious elotes.

Be sure to preheat your air fryer to 380° F.

person making street corn in air fryer
  1. Prep corn: While you wait for your air fryer to preheat, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil (or olive oil). 
  2. Air Fry corn: Once your fryer is ready, place ears of corn in a single layer in the air fryer basket and cook for 5-6 minutes.
  3. Make your elote sauce: While your corn is cooking, assemble your sauce by gently mixing your mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a small bowl. 
  4. Rotate corn: Check your corn and rotate the ears to ensure even cooking. Fry for another 7-8 minutes (a total of 12-15 min of air frying time). 
person adding toppings to Mexican corn
  1. Apply sauce and serve: Carefully remove hot ears of corn from the fryer basket and allow to cool. After a few moments, cover each air fried corn generously with Mexican street corn sauce. Sprinkle all sides with Mexican cotija cheese, extra chili powder (if you wish), freshly chopped cilantro, and garnish with lime wedges. Enjoy!

How To Serve

On the cob or off the cob? That is the question. Fortunately, this recipe is a hit either way; I have listed some options for you to try below, let me know your favorite form of serving it.

  • As a snack by itself: My favorite way of eating air fryer Mexican corn on the cob is right from the air fryer and smothered in tangy Mexican flavored sauce; the mixture of hot charred corn and the kick of creamy sauce is pure perfection.
  • Elote in a cup: This is an excellent alternative to eating it on the cob. For elote in a cup, you will slice the charred kernels from the corn cobs and gently mix them in a small bowl with the prepared street corn sauce. For an elegant touch, spoon the corn mixture into glass cups, top with cheese and seasonings, and garnish with lime wedges for a perfect dinner party appetizer.

How To Store

This Mexican street corn air fryer recipe is so scrumptious that it will be hard not to eat it all at once; if you find yourself with some leftovers, below are some instructions for storage.

  • Storage: You can store your delicious corn leftovers in an airtight container. If your street corn is already assembled, it will be good for up to one day in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.
air fryer street corn with toppings from the side view

Expert Tips

Is this your first time making air fryer elote? Here are some helpful tips that will guarantee perfect results on your first try:

  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket.
  • Do not overcrowd your fryer basket: To get the best possible char on each ear of corn, you want to be sure to place corn in a single layer.
  • You can use frozen corn: If you don’t have fresh corn on hand, you can make frozen corn elote. My method requires only 5 minutes of additional (hands off time) and requires no thawing. Instructions and cooking time are included in the recipe card below.
  • Use a flat platter for prep: Mixing your sauce ingredients on a flat platter or a large plate and then rolling your ears of corn through the mayonnaise mixture may help you get a more even sauce coverage. Finish each ear with a sprinkle of chili powder, cheese, and cilantro.
  • Extra Salt: Be sure to taste your Cotija cheese before adding salt to the elote sauce, as some Cotija cheese brands can be very salty.
  • Want to make it dairy free? Here is a recipe for Dairy-Free Mexican Street Corn Sauce you can use should you prefer it to have no dairy.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Air Fryer Mexican Corn recipe or any other Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

air fryer elotes on a plate with toppings from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Elotes Recipe

These Air Fryer Elotes are perfectly seasoned, roasted to perfection, and topped with a creamy homemade elote sauce and plenty of cheese and cilantro. Serve this take on Mexican Street Corn as a quick appetizer or side dish for a weeknight dinner or your next fiesta. With only a few ingredients, you can throw these together in 20 minutes!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 5
Calories 213kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn On The Cob

  • 5 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil or melted butter

For The Street Corn Sauce

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • ¼ cup sour cream
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice plus wedges of lime for serving
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder plus more to sprinkle over at the end
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese*
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process. Let it cool for a few minutes before spreading it with the sauce.
  • Meanwhile, make the sauce by mixing together mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a bowl.
  • When ready to serve, brush each corn on the cob with a generous amount of the mayo mixture. Sprinkle each corn with cotija cheese and chopped fresh cilantro on all sides. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Additional Salt: Be sure to taste the cotija cheese you are using before adding salt to the salt. Some cotija cheese is very salty. If it is not, then you can add in ½ teaspoon salt and adjust it accordingly after giving it a taste.
  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket. However, be sure not to overcrowd the basket to get proper charring.
  • Times may vary: It is a known fact that air fryer cooking times may vary. Take the cooking time here as a place to start and adjust accordingly. One easy way to gauge the process is to check halfway through the frying process. If it is getting too charred, then shorten the cooking time. Or visa versa.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to one day. 
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 255mg | Potassium: 275mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 380IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 1mg

The post Air Fryer Elotes appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/#respond Fri, 29 Jul 2022 19:16:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57261 Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer Mexican Street Corn recipe.    Ingredients Crispy, sweet, and juicy corn on the cob is the star of the show in this delicious air fryer recipe, so take advantage of your local farmers’ market to find the freshest, sweetest corn possible.  Get started by gathering your ears of sweet corn...

The post Air Fryer Corn On The Cob appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer Mexican Street Corn recipe.   

A plate of corn on the cob in air fryer recipe from side view

Ingredients

Crispy, sweet, and juicy corn on the cob is the star of the show in this delicious air fryer recipe, so take advantage of your local farmers’ market to find the freshest, sweetest corn possible. 

Air fryer sweet corn ingredients from the top view

Get started by gathering your ears of sweet corn (make sure you husk them first), some vegetable oil, kosher salt, and black pepper.

Substitutions & Optional Seasonings

  • Vegetable oil: I used avocado oil, but you can also use olive oil. If it is easier, you can also use cooking spray.
  • Unsalted butter: If you want to be decadent, you can use 1 tsp of unsalted butter in place of the vegetable oil. The butter helps crisp the corn and adds a creamy taste to the roasted corn kernels.
  • A sprinkle of parmesan cheese: If you are serving your air-fried corn as a side dish and want to elevate it to the next level, sprinkle it with grated parmesan cheese. The juicy kernels of corn mixed with crispy fried parmesan cheese bits are amazing, addicting, and a must-try.
  • Seasoning ideas: For additional flavors, get creative with your favorite seasoning blends. Try smoked paprika and/or chili powder for a splash of color and a little heat. Garlic powder sprinkled on each ear is also fantastic.
  • Frozen corn: If fresh corn is not in season, you can use this recipe with frozen corn. When using frozen corn, you do not need to thaw it first; it can go straight from the freezer to the air fryer; check the modification to cooking times described below.

How to Cook Corn On The Cob In Air Fryer 

You can make this air fryer corn on the cob at the height of summer or in the middle of winter. Whether you use fresh or frozen corn, the only thing that will be different is how you cook them.

I am giving you both options below to ensure you experience the most incredibly flavorful, crispy air fryer sweet corn imaginable. 

For both methods, preheat your air fryer to 380° F

If using fresh corn:

Person brushing oil on corn and adding salt and pepper from the top view
  1. Oil and season: Lightly brush each ear of corn with a thin layer of oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper (you can also add the optional seasonings at this time).
Roasting corn in the air fryer from the top view
  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your air fryer reaches 380° F, arrange your ears of corn in a single layer. Do not overcrowd your fryer basket.
  2. Air fry for 12-15 minutes: Rotate each ear of corn halfway through (around 6-7 minutes) for even cooking. If you want crispier corn, you can apply a layer of melted butter to each ear before rotating.
  3. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the corn from the basket and smother it with butter or take it to the next level and try topping it off with my roasted garlic herb butter or drizzling it with Buttery Garlic Sauce. That being said, butter is optional but highly recommended. 

If using frozen corn:

Cooking frozen corn on the cob in an air fryer is not much different. It is only 5 minutes longer and there is no need to thaw the corn.

  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your fryer has reached 380° F, arrange the frozen corn on the cob (no need to thaw first) in a single layer and fry for 5 minutes.
  2. Brush with oil: Carefully remove the hot ears of corn and lightly brush with oil, sprinkle with salt and pepper (additional seasonings can be added now) and place corn back into the fryer basket.
  3. Air fry for 10-12 minutes: You will want to check on the corn after cooking for 5-6 minutes. Rotate and cook for the remaining time.
  4. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the hot ears and layer on the butter. Again, the butter is optional, though it is highly suggested you give it a try.

What to Serve it With

The amazing thing about this recipe is its versatility. Air fryer roasted corn on the cob makes a perfect side dish all on its own, or you can remove those crispy kernels and add them to any recipe calling for corn. 

Below are a few recipe ideas to serve it with:

  • Seafood: Corn and seafood are a classic combination. Nothing screams coastal vibes more than fried corn and Grilled Shrimp Skewers, except perhaps pairing this corn with my delicious Grilled Mahi Mahi
  • Chicken: If seafood isn’t your thing, I’ve got you covered; corn on the cob makes a fantastic pairing with chicken. Give it a try with my Yogurt Marinated Chicken or alongside Mediterranean Lemon Chicken; either one makes for a delicious combo.
  • Salads: While I am a big fan of eating corn on the cob, I also like to husk it and throw it into my summer salad recipes, such as my Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad and Esquites. I find that this is especially a good use of the leftover corn.

How to Store Leftovers and Reheat

Whether you include your air-fried corn on the cob as a part of your weekly meal prep or have some leftovers, below are the instructions to store and reheat:

  • Storage: A perfect make-ahead dish, this corn stores so well that you can keep it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days without losing flavor.
  • Reheat: To reheat the corn, pop it back into the air fryer basket and cook for 5 minutes at 320 F degrees to crisp it up.
Air fryer frozen corn on the cob with butter on it from the top view

Expert Tips

New to air frying? Here are some great tips for the best air-fried corn on the cob (even on your first try!).

  • Choose corn that is equal in size: For the best results, you want to choose corn that is similar in size, as mixing thin corn cobs with thick corn cobs could cause excess browning or undercooked corn.
  • Cut them in half: If you have a small fryer basket, you can cut the cobs in half for a better fit. Cutting them into smaller pieces is also great if you have a crowd of people or to make it easier for children to grab onto.
  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket: Keep the corn in a single layer so that the hot circulating air can reach every corn kernel and ensure even cooking.
  • Be sure to rotate the ears halfway through: To keep the corn from being cooked unevenly, you should turn them halfway through cooking.
  • Quick cooking: Air frying corn on the cob takes a fraction of the time necessary for other methods, so while it’s a good idea to get your fryer preheated, you will want to put off cooking the corn until the last thing, when the rest of your meal is close to being ready. Cooking the corn at the end ensures your piping hot meal is ready all at once. If you misjudged the time, it’s no big deal; cover the hot corn with aluminum foil to keep the heat in.
  • Cook time might slightly change based on your air fryer: Pay attention to the color and doneness while you are rotating the corn on the cob in the air fryer halfway through the cooking process. It is a known fact that there might be slight differences in cooking times with different brands of air fryers.

FAQs

How long to air fry corn on the cob?

Air fry corn on the cob for 12-15 minutes in an air fryer preheated to 380° F.

Do I have to cut corn on the cob in half to air fry them?

Cutting the ears of corn is optional. For air fryers with smaller baskets, it may be necessary to cut the corn so it will fit. Cutting the corn also makes it easier for kids to handle.

Can I cook frozen corn ears in the air fryer?

Absolutely! You can pull your frozen corn straight from the freezer and add it to your air fryer; no need to thaw it first. Cooking times and procedures may vary. See the instructions above to make perfect air fryer corn on the cob from frozen corn.

Can corn on the cob pop like popcorn in the air fryer?

Not unless it is a cob of popcorn variety corn. There is a difference between sweet corn and popcorn. The perfect corn for this recipe is sweet corn. So, no worries about it popping in your air fryer.

Can I air fry corn on the cob in husk?

You can air fry corn in its husk, but it will take a much longer time, and you will lose the crispy roasted flavor air-fried corn is famous for. For best results, I suggest husking the corn fully (don’t forget those little corn silks).

Other Easy Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

Here are a few other side dishes you can make using your air fryer:

If you try this Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer corn on the cob on a plate from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Corn On The Cob Recipe

This easy air fryer corn on the cob recipe produces crisp, perfectly tender corn with a hint of sweetness and a buttery finish- without a grill! This versatile, 15-minute recipe makes for an easy side dish to accompany a weeknight dinner or can be served as a crowd-favorite addition to your BBQ or outdoor gathering.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 128kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter optional

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process.
  • Remove from the air fryer and top it off with butter*, if preferred.

Notes

  • Instructions for making this recipe with frozen corn: If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it before air frying them.
    Simply place frozen corn on the cob in the air fryer basket and the air fryer for 5 minutes. Carefully remove them from the basket, lightly brush with oil and season them with salt and pepper. Air fry for another 10-12 minutes making sure to rotate halfway through the air frying process. Carefully remove them from the basket onto a plate and top it off with butter if using.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 5 days. 
  • Reheat: Reheat the corn in the air fryer at 320 F degrees for about 5 minutes, or until crisp. 
  • Butter: Use our Roasted Garlic Butter or Melted Garlic Butter Sauce to drizzle them in the end.

Nutrition

Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 246mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 344IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 0.5mg

The post Air Fryer Corn On The Cob appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 0
Yogurt Dill Sauce  https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/#comments Mon, 25 Jul 2022 14:48:59 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=56832 Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such as my Yogurt Fruit Dip, Yogurt Ranch Dip, and Yogurt Tahini Sauce! Why Make This Recipe This irresistible homemade dill sauce packs a flavorful punch, especially for how simple and easy it is to make. If you need more convincing, here are some other reasons why you have to give...

The post Yogurt Dill Sauce  appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
Trying to finish off that open tub of yogurt in your fridge? Try my other easy recipes with yogurt, such as my Yogurt Fruit Dip, Yogurt Ranch Dip, and Yogurt Tahini Sauce!

A bowl of dill yogurt sauce with a whisk in the bowl from the top view

Why Make This Recipe

This irresistible homemade dill sauce packs a flavorful punch, especially for how simple and easy it is to make. If you need more convincing, here are some other reasons why you have to give this recipe a try:

  • You only need 5 ingredients: Few ingredients means less prep time and cleanup and more time enjoying this easy yogurt dill sauce. The best part? The ingredients in this recipe are probably already in your fridge!
  • Healthy, light, and creamy: Not only is this creamy sauce incredibly delicious, but it’s a great addition to your collection of healthy recipes! Yogurt makes this an especially healthy sauce because of its high protein content and digestive support. 
  • It rivals store-bought brands: We all love the authentic sauces from our favorite Mediterranean restaurants (the cult-favorite Cava yogurt dill dressing is especially popular), but why buy when you can get the same results at home? You’ll also save money and avoid some of the added sugar and preservatives that are present in a lot of commercial sauces. 

Ingredients

This easy dill sauce recipe requires only a handful of flavorful, simple ingredients. You’ll need whole milk (full fat) plain yogurt (I use Greek yogurt), freshly squeezed lemon juice, olive oil, minced garlic, fresh dill, and kosher salt. 

Greek yogurt dill sauce ingredients

Substitutions

  • Yogurt: While I personally love the rich, creamy taste that full fat yogurt provides, it’s higher in total fat when compared to other yogurts. You can swap it for nonfat plain Greek yogurt or regular nonfat yogurt for a lower calorie version of this lemon dill yogurt sauce. Or, for an extra creamy yogurt dill dip, try it with Icelandic yogurt! 
  • Garlic: If you don’t have a fresh clove of garlic on hand, you can use garlic powder instead. Just keep in mind that garlic powder yields a milder flavor than a garlic clove.
  • Dill: Fresh dill really takes this dill yogurt dip to the next level and yields a stronger flavor, so try to buy fresh dill if you can. If not, you can substitute with dried dill for a more mild dill flavor. 
  • Parsley: If you’re not a fan of dill, try adding in some fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley (Italian parsley), instead!
  • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice gives this recipe a tangy, acidic kick. Red wine vinegar provides a similar flavor if you don’t have lemons on hand.

How to Make Greek Dill Sauce

This simple yogurt dill sauce literally comes together in the blink of an eye. Simply:

the ingredients for garlic dill yogurt sauce in a bowl from the top view
  1. Combine the ingredients: In a small bowl, whisk together all ingredients until smooth and fully combined. 
person mixing the ingredients
  1. Season to taste: Give it a taste and add more fresh dill or another half teaspoon of salt or black pepper, if necessary. 

How to Serve It

The sky’s the limit when it comes to serving this garlic dill yogurt sauce! Feel free to get creative, but here are some of my favorite serving suggestions:

  • Drizzle over seafood: The bright, tangy flavor of this simple lemon dill sauce pairs beautifully with a variety of seafood dishes. I love to use Greek yogurt dill sauce for salmon, and it’s especially good drizzled over Slow Baked Salmon. You can also make this a lemon yogurt sauce for fish by serving it with my Breaded Fish or my Grilled Shrimp Skewers
  • Pair with chicken or beef: No Mediterranean-inspired meal is complete without this Greek yogurt lemon dill sauce! Try it as a dill sauce for gyros or a dill Greek yogurt dip paired with my Chicken Pita Wraps, Greek Yogurt Marinated Chicken, Chicken Shish Tawook, or Kofte (Turkish meatballs). It’s also a great way to make these Greek Turkey Burgers extra mouthwatering! Try making a Greek yogurt cucumber dill dip, otherwise known as Tzatziki sauce, if you want to go authentic Mediterranean. 
  • Make it a veggie dip: Looking for ways to make healthy foods a little bit more appealing? Serve this recipe as a Greek yogurt veggie dip dill sauce with roasted vegetables, such as my Baked Asparagus, Garlic Butter Green Beans, Air Fried Green Beans, or Baked Eggplant Slices. One of my favorite ways to serve Greek yogurt dill dip is with Falafel!
  • Spoon it over mains and soups: Who says you can’t put sauce on soups? This dill and Greek yogurt sauce is the perfect topping for my Cream of Zucchini Soup or Chilled Cucumber Soup. Or, you can add a creamy, tangy flair to your favorite vegetarian main course, such as this Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw

If you can’t get enough of this Greek dill sauce and find yourself making it in large batches (I know I would), you can always store it to enjoy later! Here are some tips:

  • Storage: You can store this dill and yogurt sauce refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
  • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
  • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery (add a few more tablespoons of yogurt). If it’s still not quite smooth, try blending it in a food processor before serving. 

Variations

Since this dill sauce with Greek yogurt is so simple, there’s plenty of room to customize it to your liking. Here are some suggestions:

  • Make it vegan: If you’re one of my vegan friends, I got you covered! To make a vegan yogurt dill sauce, simply use vegan yogurt. Plain coconut or almond milk yogurt make a great plant-based substitution.
  • Amp up the flavor and richness: For an extra rich and creamy variation of this Greek dill dip, add in a tablespoon of mayo to turn it into a lemon dill mayonnaise sauce! This version actually tastes more like ranch dressing. If you’re looking for other yogurt-based dressings, try my Yogurt Salad Dressing or my Poppy Seed Greek Yogurt Dressing.

FAQs

How is yogurt dill sauce different than tzatziki sauce?

The difference between a recipe for dill sauce and one for tzatziki sauce comes down to just one vegetable! Cucumber is a star ingredient in creamy Greek tzatziki sauce, but it’s absent in yogurt dill sauce. Traditional tzatziki sauce requires a little more work because you have to slice the cucumber and remove excess water, so yogurt dill sauce is a more simple recipe. 

Can you freeze creamy dill yogurt sauce?

Yes, you can freeze dill yogurt sauce! Just make sure to thaw it in the refrigerator (preferably overnight). The sauce will likely separate while thawing, so give it a stir before serving or add in a few more tablespoons of yogurt.

Is yogurt dill dressing healthy?

Yogurt garlic dill dressing has several health benefits! Just one cup of yogurt provides about 50% of your daily value of calcium, and it’s also high in protein, B vitamins, and probiotics that support gut health. Yogurt also provides healthy fats that are known to benefit heart health.

Other Yogurt Recipes You Might Like

If you’re a fan of this Greek yogurt and dill dip, you’ll probably love my other yogurt recipes! 

If you try this Yogurt Dill Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Yogurt dill sauce in a bowl with a whisk in the bowl from the top view
Print

Yogurt Dill Sauce Recipe

A quick & easy Yogurt Dill Sauce that is perfect for all your Greek and Mediterranean dishes. Takes 5 minutes to make, this yogurt sauce makes a great drizzle for fish (especially salmon), falafel, and gyro recipe. It can also be served as a dip with vegetables or meze platters.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 413kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Whole Milk full fat plain yogurt, I use Greek Yogurt
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh dill or more to taste
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • 1/8 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place all ingredients in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if you like.

Notes

  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container for up to 3 days. The next time you’re ready to serve, give it a quick whisk to combine any ingredients that may have separated. If it’s too watery, add in a few tablespoons of yogurt to thicken it up. Taste for seasoning and add more dill or salt if necessary. 
  • Freeze: Freeze the yogurt dill lemon sauce for up to a month. 
  • Thaw: To serve the sauce from frozen, refrigerate it until thawed (preferably overnight). You’ll likely find that your thawed sauce has separated a bit, which tends to happen when you freeze dairy products, so give it a stir before serving. You can also revive your dill dip with yogurt if it’s too watery.

Nutrition

Calories: 413kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 1258mg | Potassium: 450mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 462IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 313mg | Iron: 0.3mg

The post Yogurt Dill Sauce  appeared first on Foolproof Living.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/yogurt-dill-sauce/feed/ 2